Home

MusicTime Deluxe Menu - Passport Music Software

1. M 142 x 142 MIDI Channel Chnl m 142 x jee i i r Le NET re 142 Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings esses 143 DOVICE NAMOS arsip e AE n 143 Assigning Different Programs for Each Voice 143 Stall eris CON PR ERI TT 143 The Choose Program d IIo eR TETTE DEDE 144 VOICES de e 144 Gain VOIDIETIO WEE 144 Table of Contents Changing the Staff Sheet Order 144 ac derer ge Wl ele 145 Playing the kevboard AA 145 foo cc 145 Changing the Octave TUN 145 Watch StavesS SetUp ME 146 Displaying Notes on the Keyboarrd ccccseccsecceeecesecseceseceeeseeeseeesseesaeeses 146 I ueexulgesM 146 Changing the TONDO NERIS 146 Resetting to the Saved Tempo 146 The Tempo Window and Tempo Changes o nonnonnennornennsrrerrsrrsrrerrsrrereerne 147 S cereo 147 Customizing the Toolbar nennen 147 OO Cll 5 GOES EA 147 The Menus for Windows eene 148 mA UU 148 RI ERR m 148 PFO LW RTT 148 ilz Tele m ort bl NET ETT 148 else e 148 Measures Per System Systems Per agoe 148 Starting Template RE inet enna iacee dette nccsaiccueedeseacdneendeuiees
2. 87 Changing the Color l Selected ODJOCIS eee ann ere ee eee 88 Customizing TSP AGG ETT m 88 The Score Colors Dialog WEE 88 e Table of Contents The Menus Mac 89 Music Time Deluxe Menu 89 EE 89 age 89 IO OTT 89 FOON ee 89 Auto GUS SS CAV ernea n na aN E Naai EAEN R E iai 90 POS 0 0 E 90 Setup Toolbar Mode EE 90 Record Transcription Setup NETTE T RM 91 Sie dw ns 93 HIR PSU M 94 miis M u 95 p 95 mice TT E EE E E A EE E 95 Piano Vocal Giant cccc cece eeccseeceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeegeesseesgeseueeaneeaeeeseeeeeees 95 elle 95 Measures Per System Systems Per agoe 95 Staning Template RR ease erea e e EE EERE EEE 95 Make e e EE 96 Create then open using Wizard VWumdows 96 Aic ecard ence Ee 97 KIRICH 97 M ET 97 ODEN EE 97 ql 97 vi 97 erg 98 PREV OLE LO SAVE MN EE T Ue 98 ES delen m 99 mb A ES LOIN EE 99 Auto Compress FSOSIS ssceiuntirimiUbRdrE Rr brdibren veut inti bxc DK UbdM e HEMOS VoRK RD EDADURIE 99 Extracting Text and Lyrics esseaendenusudtsuitseractr ient on
3. O 202 Changing th Olave T E 202 Watch Staves SetUp RR RO 203 Displaying Notes on ekevboard 203 TOPO VV GOW m 203 Changing the TOMI DO Rm 203 Resetting to the Saved Tempo 204 The Tempo Window and Tempo Changes o nonnonnennornennsnrerrsrrerreresrreresrne 204 Customizable TOOIDOE E 204 Customizing the Toolbar sees nennen nnn nnns 204 DCU EES 204 Setup MenU WE 204 Pe YOON AE T N E A AA E E E E ENT E E 204 IROIIOW FIY ie E 205 Auto ques S BEST darum cinia diuidi ewe andudmevscdeutusnweansnimannnineoats 205 AUD SACS semis ea du mudo eco dmn DUI E AEA UN EDS DEUS 205 Ee ge END PTT 206 FS CONG E 206 Transcription Setup cece ceccceccceecceeeceeeeeeceeeeaeecaeeeeeeesseeeeeeueeeneeeeeteeetaeetaeeeeeees 206 GICK SI RERUMS 207 ees ucintigt are me e 207 VIE ee TEENS 207 MBIEZ 0 E O 208 JIIRIWIrisiscodBuo t 208 VEER TEE 208 p Table of Contents PRONE MIG Tc ener 208 TOOID AR SOU e EE 209 mz n 209 jo 209 CUNE TOD N 209 OVOX HORIS e E EA E 210 About MusicTime Deluxe eae ett ee ee he eee eee iu cn 210 Voices In MusicTime Deluxe
4. MIDI Items MIDI Items refers specifically to the text indication added to the score when controller or program changes are added using the Tools palette Even when MIDI items are hidden they continue to affect the MIDI playback of the staff they are attached to By hiding MIDI items you can enter more appropriate text strings for the event For example you may use a different program on your synthesizer when a change in tonality 1s needed but the basic instrument could remain the same By hiding the MIDI item and adding a text box instead you can indicate the performance change using more suitable terminology MusicTime Deluxe also has the option to print the MIDI items on the score by checking the Print MIDI Items box Time Signature Time signature changes that occur at the beginning of a system can be indicated at the end of the previous system This is called a reminder time signature When time signature reminders are hidden the time signature will only be indicated in the measure where it begins The Menus Key Signature Key signature changes that occur at the beginning of a system can be indicated at the end of the previous system This is called a reminder key signature When key signature reminders are hidden the key signature will be indicated only in the measure where it begins Color MusicTime Deluxe gives you the ability to display and print your music in color This can be useful for showing d
5. cccccccsecccseeceeeeceeeseeeseeceseesaueeseeseueesaeesseeesaes 172 Change Sm othly giro c RR T 172 Add NNI e EUR EE 172 Te SVC pepsi E 173 GINO E E E A E A A E E N E A TATTA 173 Fide MEGI D T RRES 173 Time Signature ne 174 PICKUP TEEN 174 le ET 175 Use Instruments Key Transposed Score or Set All Staves to same Key C 100 C 175 No Double Ss ANS cis ET ET T 175 Just Delete the Current Key Signature aannnannannnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnrrnnrnnenne 175 Just this staff aiseeeraxu nto tu nm totus c btemursd ne ratum Sram eirnce bep UIDI unURU EUN DRIN KE NEMUS 175 Move NOOS PPP TTE ET 176 Move Endings and Kn ee 176 Changing the Key Signature for bDlavback 176 Reminder Key Signatures cccccccccscccececeeeceeeeceseeeuceseueesaeeseusesaeessueeseeesees 176 BaNG VD RETO TM 176 miii UC Et 176 6 0 lut cee en ne MMC E M E 177 Er Jee 0 gt ieee nent NETTE 177 Lock Ending Open Closed WEE 178 Changing the Vertical Position of Endmgs 178 Coda PIrdse S eer E A E A EE 178 MeasHre une 179 CORIDIOSSeO EE 179 ANON PAO ACK EEN 180 e lee Eeer E 181 ALOM DACO NEED OO DOO 181 Endaver s AGI DE 181 Mathematically ga o E 181 Adjust Measure e d 182 Adjust Measures Per Gvstem 182 Adjust TOP Ee 182 PMG ectetuer SUME Mi PEE uu ete eesti M DE UEM INCID 182 General Spacing Guidelines ccccccccsecceeecceseeceeceeeeeeeeceueeseeeesueeseessuee
6. 211 Keyboard Shortcut for Changing Voices anneanoennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnreennnrrnrenn 211 The Voice Seletor TT EENEG 211 Rests In Different Voices and Hidden Heets 212 VOCO 212 delti min O 212 Stem Direction and ee 212 WOIGES and TC Le Le acs e E 212 When To Use Another VOIGGO EE 213 Changing the Voice Selector to View Separate ele 213 What Happens If Don t SEIUBIIaUdee f RT 213 BZiviefielfeltgelaC Klee 214 USING TWO VOICES S ac crsercces cts cence nisin oner ENNES E EEO NEEE ESERE E E EEE 214 STHOWIBOAITIG CEET 215 Entering AGGMION al VOICES m 216 CIOS Sal oS D ING EE 216 Voicing MIDI Files and Live Recording 218 Voicing a Real Time Recording EE 219 Advanced TOPICS ccccececceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeseeeeeeres 221 MIDI E EE 221 SEET 221 Spacing and Clef CA EE 221 FS E e E E E E EE E E 222 VI8TRt ite 223 BOS CAINS EE 223 MIDI Setup Mac eee 224 MIDI Drivers and MusicTime Deluxe esee 224 MIDI drivers on l ids sme RR TTE 224 MIDI Setup on Mac OS X EE 224 Using Apple s General MIDI DLS Synthesizer Built In Synth 224 Configuring MI 225 Setting Output Devices Channels on Macintosh 225 Staff MIDI Device
7. Choose Add a staff to this Piano Staff Place the insertion cursor in the pickup bar of the treble staff When you add a staff MusicTime Deluxe needs to know where to insert it MusicTime Deluxe will insert a staff above or below the staff that contains the insertion cursor or as an alternative a staff that has been selected Add Staff The App Srarr dialog box appears Cy Add 1 Note Staves Add a Piano Staff Gei Add a staff to this Piano Staff Note Use a Piana Staff for crass staff beaming Click OK Placement Add Abo A new blank treble staff appears above the piano staff NOT UNDOABLE Cancel gt OK Open Setup ok 9 Open the Staff Sheet and name the new Staff 1 Enter Vocal in the STAFF NAME dialog You can also assign a separate MIDI channel and program for the new staff Maybe you d like it to be played by a piccolo Breaking the Barline Select Staff 1 From the Score menu choose CONNECT STAVES The new staff is connected to the piano staff at each barline In a piano vocal arrangement the barlines are typically broken between the vocal and Connect Staves piano staves The Connect Staves dialog box appears sae ne Fee Click the checkbox labeled BREAK BARLINES pou ok A check appears in the box Click OK The barlines are broken MIDI Step Entry bech 2 MIDI step entry is probably the fas
8. Edit Undo Undo is available for most editing operations within MusicTime Deluxe For operations which are not undoable you will either see a warning within the dialog or you will be given an alert before the operation continues with an option to cancel Cut Cut deletes any selected area and places it in the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard Using the Paste command lets you paste the cut material elsewhere in the score The MusicTime Deluxe clipboard retains the information until another Cut or copy operation is performed and replaces it The Menus Copy Undo Clear Cr Copy places a duplicate of whatever you select onto the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard You can then paste the copied Cut Chr notation to another area in either the same score or another Copy Ctrl C score using the Paste command FX Clear Del Select All Chrl 4 Select Range Paste Paste places the contents of the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard into the score Paste will not work when an area is selected To paste copied or cut data choose the starting location for the paste operation with the arrow tool You should have a flashing Mudge Left Cru insert cursor in a measure before using Paste Nudge Right Ctrl Mudge Up Ctrl ShiFk Autospace On While Pasting Nudge Down Chat If Auto Space Setup is on pasted notation is automatically aligned following each paste If the paste operation does not replace all of the notes in a measure non pasted notes in
9. Z X H C V Del H A E 8 25 T 25 n 35 E 35 8 E 35 4g U 35 H D Ctrl Ctr H 2 35 T 35 9 4gH T 35 L Key Cap Chart Windows Ctrl N Ctrl H N Ctrl O Ctrl W Ctrl S Ctrl 2 S Ctrl HR Ctrl P Ctrl 8 P Alt F4 Alt BkSp or Ctrl Z Del or Ctrl X Ctrl Ins or Ctrl C Ins or Ctrl V Del Ctrl A Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl 8 Ctrl 8 Ctrl I Ctrl n Ctr E Ctrl 2 E Ctrl OU Ctrl D Ctrl lo Ctrl 8 9 Ctrl T Ctrl 9 T Ctrl IL Shortcuts Slur Notes below Beam Group Beam On Beat Change Pitch Change Duration Change Velocity Make Chord Make Grace Cue Guess Durations Raise Pitch Lower Pitch Raise Pitch by octave Lower Pitch by octave Mac 6 L B 26 B Ctr X Ctrl D Ctrl V Ctrl C Ctrl G 3 G 25 3 8 E 36 The variable n represents a number from 1 to 8 Measures Menu Add Measure Delete Measure Tempo Time Signature Key Signature Barline Type Endings Coda Phrases Measure Numbers Align Spacing Align Playback Bypass AutoSpace Barline Bypass Aut
10. eC IA 1 1 a PF F AF UE S E F1 FIL S9 BR J d LL JO bh 8 7C J J a 0 LINZ IL L L LLLI Wwe o Een LII paa mnm _ LL PF ZW yg Zi F 7 JP gy NN Spacing Defaults Spacing Defaults This function sets global defaults for beam stem Beam Stem Length half spaces lengths beam thicknesses horizontal vertical tie offsets and measure spacing distance Beam Thickness of half space rs between barline clef time signature and ke Horizontal Tie Offset uarter spaces i i m signature Vertical Tie Offset quarter spaces Measure Spacing 2 i2 j2 j2 tin half spaces Each score can store its own set of spacing defaults but an initial setting is determined by the preferences or template file settings Change Score Colors The Change Colors dialog gives you a way to make global color changes and to change the MOTE half space means ane half the height of a staff space color of other score elements like staff and bar lines In order to save the color selections as a default make your color selections and then Export the score as a Template or as the default score setting Change Colors The drop down menu enables you to change the colors of specific score elements Notes and rests in voices one through eight inactive voices other symbols Use Prefs Colors and the background Inactive voices a
11. 5 and then 5 measures are inserted before measure 5 on all staves the tempo change will occur at measure 10 Cancel When measures are inserted for only one staff tempo The Menus changes are unaffected MusicTime Deluxe allows a maximum tempo value of 400 beats per minute The minimum is 1 Time Signature Time signatures are used to indicate how many beats are in each measure Set Time Signature and what note value is used for each beat E h DE MusicTime Deluxe can define one time signature per measure as often as needed Measures and pages added to the score use the last time signature 8 defined The time signature determines how many notes MusicTime m Click 1 times per measure Deluxe will play for each measure but it is possible to both hide the time 2 signature and enter more notes than can be played if Auto Space is off EE taie d If you select the area you wish to change before opening the Time poene Co Signature dialog your selection will be entered into the dialog s measure range If no selection has been made the measure range will default to the current location or Measure 1 Note All measures between the first and last measure indicated will be included in the operation When the Time Signature dialog is first opened the time signature indicated is for the measure number that appears in the From box of the measure range If the measure range is altered within the dialog the time
12. Composer s Name Four lines are available for the right side of the first score page Traditionally this location 1s used for the composer s name but can be used for any text desired Each line can use a different font selection and selections are independent of the other lines Headers and Footers Headers appear along the top of a page Footers appear at the bottom of a page You can create two different header items and footer items for each score Header and footer contents can combine text with automatic options for adding page numbers and The Menus Text Elements Title Instructions Composer Header 1 Header 2 Footer 1 Footer 2 i Composer Right Title Font Style Times New Roman HH f Bold Italic Size 12 E f Underline Composer time indications Justify options can place each header and footer on either side or centered Flip on even odd pages takes the page number into account when placing header and footer items on the page This is especially useful if you will ultimately be printing two sided pages and binding your score For example if you use a right justified header to print a page number on your score and check Flip on even odd pages the first page number will appear on page 1 in the upper right corner Page 2 s number will appear in the upper left corner This placement will hold true for all subsequent odd and even numbered pages Page Date and Time P is used to indicate the current pag
13. To change the tuplet value double click on the tuplet item in the Notes palette This opens the Choose Tuplet dialog where you can enter the new tuplet configuration Common tuplet indications are Triplet 3 2 Quintuplet 5 4 Sextuplet 6 4 Septuplet 7 4 Any combination can be created using numbers from to 15 Changing Durations For Notes Already Entered You can quickly change the duration for any note or group of notes in your score by first selecting the note with the arrow tool and then typing the number for the new duration Using the shortcut keys for dots double dots and tuplets further modifies the selected notes Typing the R key turns all selected notes to rests Although you can undo this operation once you cannot turn rests into notes Real Time MIDI Note Durations Recorded durations are displayed according to the quantize value set in the Transcription Setup dialog MusicTime Deluxe gt Preferences menu Unless the MIDI durations are changed using Change Durations or the selection shortcut MusicTime Deluxe will keep the original recorded durations Guess Durations will alter the MIDI data however and the transcription value selected will determine both the shortest duration to display and when to start rounding off playback durations Accidentals Accidentals are selected separately from notes and applied to notes in the score by clicking directly on the note head or by selecting the note or note
14. maj9 11 13 11 majl3 11 add9 7 b5 b9 omit3 7 bS 9 11 omit5 7 b9 9 2 etii a 4 d sus sus4 7sus4 9sus4 13sus4 EE Dem sus2 sus4 Min m m7 m maj7 m9 m13 m add2 m7 add4 m9 maj7 m11 m add9 m7 add11 m6 m 6 9 Aug 7 maj7 5 9 maj9 5 7 b9 7 9 Dim dim m7 b5 dim7 Custom Root Bass C D E F G A B C amp D E F Ge At Be Imm r c a e c Sleielain Cb Db Eb Fb Gb Ab Bb Cb Db Eb Fb Cb Ab Bb Adding a Chord Symbol Use the pencil and select either the C or the Fretboard from the Graphics palette Place the crosshair in your score at the location where you wish to add a chord and click This opens the Choose Chord dialog box Note If you click directly on a note head with the chord tool the pitch for that note will be used for the root selection in the CHOosE CHorD dialog The CuHoose Chor dialog is arranged with the root and alternate bass note selections at the bottom Chord types are arranged in the following order within the dialog The first group contains Major chords and most common extensions the second group contains Minor chords and then come Augmented and Diminished You can also create a custom chord by clicking on the Custom button Once you ve selected the desired chord symbol click OK to enter the indication into the score For convenience you can also double click within
15. wee MIDI Note GO Middle C Note The current clef selection will always appear at the start of each new system This clef reference cannot be removed The Graphics Palette The Graphics palette provides you with the tools to enter text lyrics chord names and guitar chords You can also enter circles squares rectangles lines as well as set the line style and width The Lyric Tool The Tool item labeled L enters Lyrics MusicTime Deluxe s special method for entering lyrics can add hyphens and melismas for you automatically MusicTime Deluxe connects lyric words and syllables to a note or chord At first lyrics are centered under their parent note but can be freely dragged left or right after entering the lyric Dragging the parent note moves the attached lyric Lyric lines can be also adjusted vertically for each system Additional lyric lines in MusicTime Deluxe use the voice indicator for each new line The eight voices in MusicTime Deluxe correspond to the eight possible lyric lines When you select the Lyric tool a Text menu replaces the Notes mene This Text menu only appears when using the Lyrics Text or Chord tools in the Graphics palette We recommend adding lyrics after you perform spacing and alignment for each system While not essential it can eliminate extra editing if you later change the number of measures in a system or the width of systems Align Spacing has an Adjust f
16. Center Systems Center Systems is similar to Center Staves but adjusts only the distance between each system Within each system the spacing between staves is maintained Caution Center Systems is NOT UNDOABLE Center Systems optimizes the page layout after establishing the system layout For final page layout of systems and staves see Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Systems per Page Systems Per Page changes how many systems appear on either the EJA uti ela at current page or the current page and all remaining pages Set systems on page z to Changing the number of systems per page will frequently change ORT the number of pages but will not affect the number of measures in cay We prese each system All remaining pages If the number of systems for a page will not fit on a printed page the extra systems are moved onto tiles below the bottom margin of the normal size page See Printing in MusicTime Deluxe for more information Measures Per System Measures Per System can change the number of measures for a single system or for all the remaining systems including the current system If you reduce the number of measures for a system the extra measures will be placed in the next system or the next several systems When changing the number of measures to be greater than the current amount measures in PLEITET E the following systems will be moved onto the current system Sel measures per system Ea Chang
17. Custom color palettes are saved when you save the score and do not affect the default color palette for new scores unless you save preferences If you save preferences while a score with a custom palette is open the default color palette will be changed to the custom palette The Score Colors Dialog The Score Corons Windows or CHANGE Score Coors Mac item in the View menu gives you a way to make global color changes and to change the color of other score elements like staff and bar lines You can also set the color defaults for new scores by using the CHANGE Coop dialog and then saving preferences For more on the Score Corons dialog see the View Menu in Chapter 7 Show Hide Color MusicTime Deluxe provides the option to not print the colors that appear on the screen Go to the View gt Show Hide dialog and deselect Color When Printing to print the score in black and white dat Golors eher Colors saek Colors pague Colors a p Q EE I a ns Palette Apple 1 Image Spectrum WH EE Black EN Blue DES Brown Cyan Green Magenta Orange Purple im Red Yellow n Whita T Blueberry W f AW Jk M Ki CT KS SV KK y mM Search Palette Cancel oK Cancel i E Ed Using the Palettes The Menus Mac Chape Seven Mere Deluxe contains eight menus The first three the MusicTime Deluxe File and Edit
18. F For more about the click function refer to the previous section Follow Playback When Follow Playback is selected an arrow head appears above the measure currently playing back The score scrolls as it plays In page view the playback arrow centers the page while scrolling keeping the current staff andmeasure in view Before starting playback place the arrow pointer in the measure and staff where you want playback to begin You can use the Fit Width item in the Zoom Tool menu to avoid horizontal scrolling during playback The Follow Playback status is saved in preferences The Auto Space function will beep if you attempt to add a note or rest to a measure that is full Auto Space defaults to on If you don t want MusicTime Deluxe to automatically space the notation choose Auto Space again to remove the check mark Auto Guess Beam If on this function automatically applies the Guess Durations and Beam on Beat operations for all recorded data imported MIDI or Master Tracks Pro files and step entered notes Auto Guess Beam automatically beams notes together when adding or erasing notes with the pencil and eraser tools Auto Guess Beam automatically readjusts beams and stem when dragging notes It will also attempt to move any slur that appears attached to the dragged note Holding down the control key during the drag bypasses these adjustments Please Note Operations that require selections
19. In all other voice layers the MIDI message uses the same channel used by the voice and staff selected MIDI and MusicTime Deluxe General Controller Tips Understanding how controllers work requires first learning which controller numbers your synthesizer will respond to and what parameters can be controlled Look for the MIDI Implementation chart in the synthesizer documentation for more information Besides the standard use of controller 7 for volume many synthesizers use controller 1 for modulation controller 10 for pan controller 91 for reverb and controller 64 for sustain Although every controller uses a range between 0 and 127 for exchanging information some controllers like sustain typically use only the high and low values of 0 and 127 to turn an effect on and off Controller 64 affects sustain on many synthesizers but usually only when a 0 or 127 is sent where 0 means sustain off and 127 means sustain on Sustain is not the only controller that uses this method to turn an effect on or off When in doubt check your synthesizer documentation As you become more familiar with adding program changes and controllers to a staff consider the advantages of hiding the MIDI Events and using either text or a graphic to represent the controller message or program change Importing MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files If you import a MIDI File or Master Tracks Pro file into MusicTime Deluxe controller informat
20. Lig Pictures 3 Documents 3 Controll New Folder Cancel E How often you choose to do this is up to you but consider how much time it would take to recreate a lost score if and use that as a guide One or two backups before you start or stop working is a good habit to get into but if you work for several hours on a score you should use Save As in addition to using the Save function and create alternate versions as you go along Since MusicTime Deluxe scores are relatively small a diskette is both an efficient and cost effective way to make backups Use Save As to make backups See the Save As section for more information Save As Save As 1s used to save MusicTime Deluxe scores that are new untitled scores or MIDI MusicXML and MasterTracks Pro files that were opened with MusicTime Deluxe Save As will save in the MusicTime Deluxe format The Save As dialog you ll see is the standard Save As dialog for your platform Revert to Saved The Revert to Saved function allows you to disregard all the edits made to a score since the last Save operation Revert to Saved is frequently used as the ultimate undo Most edits in MusicTime Deluxe can be undone using Undo in the Edit menu but only the last edit operation can be undone If you decide against a series of edits you can use Revert to Saved to discard all of your edits and start again without closing and reopening the file Of
21. MIDI or Master Tracks Pro file Each checkbox acts as a filter allowing the selected MIDI Data type to be recorded or imported with a file Note The record settings do not affect the Thru function This means that turning off pitch bend will not prevent pitch bend messages from being sent over the Thru channel and device Warning If you uncheck the item Notes you will only see rests when recording or importing files To prevent accidentally recording over your previous work MusicTime Deluxe has an option to Enable Enter Key to Start Stop Recording Transcription Setup The Transcription Settings item is used to select the shortest duration value to be used when guessing recorded or imported MIDI note data Note durations shorter than the selected duration will be rounded up to the selected duration Essentially this means that if you select sixteenth notes in the Transcription Settings a guess operation will never convert a note into any duration shorter than a sixteenth MusicTime Deluxe s guessing routine is designed to recognize multiple voices and to accurately transcribe triplets This may however result in unwanted triplets in some situations The Menus For this reason a checkbox in the Transcription Settings dialog forces MusicTime Deluxe to ignore triplets completely when checked You can choose to ignore triplets when guessing or re guessing the entire score or you can select the measure s
22. Score REESEN 130 JEE eidel CN 130 WE Table of Contents Composer s nn EE 131 Headers and Ae TEE 131 Page Date and Time RE T m 132 SIE o e E 133 PATE ONSE E 133 Copyright Notice cccccccseseceseeceeeceeeeceeeceeeseeeesaceseueeseeesaneesaeessueesaeessaeesaees 133 MIDI Device lnstrument Settings saci cceccnencdeseveecers lt shusacedsoeiencateesiedesadedecscerese 133 MIDI Playback En e E 136 View nl E 137 OO Tel 137 KIT 137 RK 10 e ERN ERR EEA EE A E E oe 137 CONTO me tmm 197 Seen CR n 137 Jeytirz E de oe IVINS ERROR 137 sire ON EE 138 Page Te Ur NR ET m 138 Print Rhythm Staf LING E 138 Left Barline Single Staves ENEE 138 VISITE 138 Time SS VANS eae c 138 KEY ele HE 139 OO T O t 139 nici A OO 139 Show Control POINTS NN RR TT 139 Pac DEUG E 139 FAS ocorre EE 139 EIE MEN TT 140 Hide Fioatng WINdOWS NE eee eee sees 140 Windows Menu ccccccccecceeceeceeceeseeseeeaesaeeaeceeseececeeeseeeueeeeseeeaes 140 KIRIS VOW 140 EE 141 Open All Fal CCS NETTE DT 141 Close EE 141 RE m c m 141 SEE c TII OO TET 141 3i me E 141 oleo m 141 REI Em 142 vi
23. The Tempo or Metronome Marking 1s a graphic indicating the score s tempo or a change in tempo within the score When used to define a new tempo the tool can also affect playback To place a tempo indication in the score click on the icon in the Tools palette with the pencil tool When moved over the score the pointer turns into a crosshair Click to enter the tempo indication and the Set Tempo Marking dialog box opens MEN Using the Palettes Set Tempo Marking Font Style Geneva H f Bold litalic Size 9 HH f underline Listessa Tempo e J lm p Tempo Value 100 f Dotted Ivi Change Playback L istesso The term L istesso also referred to as istesso tempo or lo stesso tempo comes from the Italian and means in the same time This direction indicates that the tempo remains the same even though the time signature has changed L istesso indications do not affect MIDI Playback and are graphics only Tempo Value Tempo Indications designating a new tempo value can affect MIDI Playback if the checkbox labeled CHANGE PLAYBACK is checked Tempo indications affecting MIDI remain in effect until the next measure where a tempo change occurs Inserting a tempo change will only change the MIDI Playback when the item is inserted Moving a tempo indication will not readjust the tempo for the new location If tempo changes were made using the Tempo dialog in the Measures menu inserting a new tempo indication wi
24. This indicates that the notation information has not been saved in an MusicTime Deluxe file The Menus The Menus tor Windows Chapter Seven ML Deluxe contains nine menus The first two the File and Edit menus contain all the usual commands plus a few unique to MusicTime Deluxe The next six Notes Measures Score View Windows and Setup contain operations for defining the contents and behavior of the music The Score and View menus are used for general aspects of score layout The Windows menu contains a list of your open scores and lets you open the Staff Sheet and various palettes The last menu is the Help menu File Menu New When you create a new score you have three basic Staff Formats from which to choose s Edit Mat M 5 Vi Wind Set Hel e Piano default e Piano vocal e Single staves ee cM e MN CN Mec A Mew Ctrl M Mew Default Score Chrl Shift h Open Ctra P lano Staff Close Ctrl i 3 5 Chris A Piano staff in MusicTime Deluxe is a special gie Save 4s Ctri2 5hifE 5 combined staff that appears as only one item in the Staff Sheet A piano staff is the only staff type that r allows cross staff beaming Print Selection Print Ctrl P Piano Vocal Staff Page Setup Ctrl shift P 1 X4 Encores Organ Fantasias and FuguesiBWwwv 56z21Bw w S62 Fantasia enc A P1iano Vocal score uses the Piano staff described 2 VM DAILYIBach EncoreSyOrganlFantasias and Fuguesl du
25. Tom 1 a Synth Bass 2 Clarinet violin Piccola vi Flute Cello Tem oM Pe MN pe t Blow izzicatoStr hakuhachi Harp Synth Brass1 impani synth Brass2 Ocarina SweepPad Shanai GunShot MIDI Channel 1 H o i 7 ms o UE aes EE Pan Gain Reverb Level Cancel MusicTime Deluxe the DLS SoundFont files will appear as an option in the Bank menu If you are using an external MIDI Device a popup menu allows you to choose a common mapping The Menus of instrument names to MIDI instrument number The default mapping uses General MIDI standard to which most newer synths adhere For more advanced synths text fields are displayed for Bank settings on the device The MSB setting corresponds to MIDI Controller 0 and the LSB setting corresponds to MIDI Controller 32 Refer to your synth s documentation for more information Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings stati ei Playback Device gl lens ics NN k Bank Apple General MIDI DLS Built in Synth2 p All Voices lI Piano Organ2 Fingered Bs Slow Strings Im Sax Saw Wave Soundtrack Agogo Honky tonk Fretless Bs Syn Strings2 Piano 1 Slap Gass 1 Chor Aahs Piano 2 Slap Bass2 Voice Oohs rpsichord Synth Bass 1 SynVox Bassoon 5th SawWave Echo Drops Synth Drum Bandoneon Symhtess2 OrchestraHi Celesta Nylon strGr Wei rumpet Piccolo Famasia rat ss i Stee sncr vi rombone Music Box P
26. When the time signature 1s based on eighth notes it 1s not possible to arrive at a universal beaming solution appropriate for every situation MusicTime Deluxe uses a beat value of three eighth notes for 6 8 12 8 and 9 8 For odd time signatures such as 5 8 and 7 8 the beat value is one eighth note For complex rhythms the beaming must be performed manually using Beam Group See Default Spacing Auto Beam Guess and Selecting Objects in MusicTime Deluxe and Moving in MusicTime Deluxe for more information related to beams Sub Group Sub Group clarifies a measure s rhythm Used after Beam Group the Sub Group command can remove secondary beams between groups of notes and or change the secondary beam direction You can also use Sub Group to change the direction of a secondary beam The Menus The following examples illustrate how Sub Group works Flatten Beams The Flatten Beams command changes angled beams so that they run in a straight horizontal line To see this command in action do the following 1 Place four eighth notes in a measure keeping the notes within the lines of the staff 2 Select the beam You must drag the pointer over the center point of the beam to select it 3 Click the Notes menu point to Beams then click Flatten Beams Change Pitch Transpose Change Pitch Transpose alters both the position of notes and their playback For Change Pitch Transpose to function you need to make a selectio
27. While the ALIGN SPACING operation can do a fine job of spacing musical phrases music notation is subjective so review the changes and make the final judgment yourself Tutorial 1 Select Measure 4 Place the cursor in Measure 4 Align Spacing From Measure 4 to 4 l 2 Choose ALIGN SPAcING from the Measures menu Engraver s Spacing The Spacinc dialog box appears Mathematically Perfect Adjust Measure Widths Adjust Measures per System MusicTime Deluxe s spacing dialog has options for Adjust Mi Ad just for Lyrics Measure Widths and Adjust Measures Per System but All Staves these will only be available if you select entire systems Adjust for Lyrics and All Staves will be selected by default Cancel ok Keep those choices active and continue On a Mac click the Engraver s Spacing radio button 3 Click OK The notes in Measure 4 are justified Because All Staves was selected the changes made in the top staff also affected the lower staff and both staves were adjusted together Note Copying notes and chords using the control option key is fast and simple but the operation should always be followed with both an ALIGN PLAYBACK and an ALIGN SPACING operation In addition notes should not be dragged to other measures and it 1s also best to avoid drastically changing the order of notes You can drag left or right to copy notes and chords but do not drag the notes past other notes
28. but if the duration is scaled to play at 50 the note will be played for the duration of a quarter note When Play before the beat has been selected the original note duration combined with the scaled amount will also determine at what time in the measure the note is to be played As an example place two eighth notes into the beginning of a measure Select the second eighth note convert it to a grace note with a duration of 25 and set it to play before the beat When this combination The Menus is played the grace note s duration will be played as a thirty second 25 of an eighth note and the note will start playing starting a thirty second sooner than where it occurs in the measure If the play duration was set to 50 for this example the note would play for the duration of a sixteenth half of the original duration and also start playing a sixteenth before its beat location Note Grace notes cannot borrow time from notes or rests that don t exist and cannot be set to a play duration greater than the value of the note or rest before the grace note Remember that the duration amount is for the original duration of the note you are converting to a grace note If you need to start a section or piece with a grace note you will need to uncheck Play before the beat as there will not be a note to borrow time from No Slash appoggiatura When No slash appoggiatura is selected the option to Play before the beat is automatically
29. discusses the basic types of messages used in MusicTime Deluxe and how to enter and edit those messages We cannot begin to discuss all the definitions for everything in the MIDI spec If you are interested in learning more about MIDI check your local music or computer store for what s available AII that concerns MusicTime Deluxe and our discussion are MIDI note messages and controller messages When a note is sent over MIDI two messages are actually sent at two different times The first message says basically start playing note such and such The second tells when that note should stop playing These two messages get sent when notes are played in MusicTime Deluxe The note s duration and the current tempo determine the time between the messages MIDI notes do not have sound associated with them When a note is played the message sent contains information about the pitch played but nothing saying what was played The message uses a number called velocity to describe how the note was played Velocity can be used to send information about how loud a note was played but how that numerical message 1s interpreted is up to the responding synthesizer Even the common pitch names are only reference points and a pitch may sound quite different from one synthesizer to another For instance Middle C might trigger either a piano or a snare drum The result ultimately depends on the sound capabilities of whateve
30. either text or both text and fretting indications for the guitar The letter C enters only a text spelling for a chord The Fretboard enters the guitar fretboard indications Once either indication has been added to the score they can be selected and changed to be either type of display using the Guitar Frets item in the View menu In MusicTime Deluxe chords are more than just text added to a score When transposing a section of music chord indications will be transposed along with the note information by selecting Transpose Chord Symbols in the Nores CHANGE PitcH DurRATION dialog When guitar chords have been added the graphic changes to represent the new fingering for the transposed chord MEN Using the Palettes Note The fingering indications supplied with the Frets fonts are standard for sheet music but cannot represent every possible guitar fingering combination A Custom option 1s available in the chord dialog that will enter a blank fret Custom chords are not transposed and the fingering indications must be added manually after printing the score Choose Chord Name maj Oo 7 m 9 mi 1 mis 5 pe maj bs asi maj9 bs 13 b5 majl3 b5 6 7 b9 13 b9 6 9 7 9 maj7 6 9 13 9 add2 711 maj7 11 9 11
31. i Voice 2 Notes amp Rests rest objects you have entered into your score like text and chord Voice 3 Notes Rests symbols Voice 4 Notes amp Rests Voice 5 Notes amp Rests Voice 6 Notes amp Rests Near the top of the Change Color dialog is the Color pop up Click Voice 7 Notes amp Rests on the color box and the pop up menu will appear to gain access ker ees nactive Voices to the 16 available colors Background Le score Other Symbols Th R Ca Staff 1 Upper m Co e graphic below the drop down menu provides a visual repre Lgs 1 Lower sentation of each of these items Choosing a color for any of the items will cause its color to change in the graphic nc RU EE Voice 1 Notes amp Rests HH The Staff Lines list box displays each of the staves in the score To change a staff s color select a staff in the list box and choose a color from the pop up Press and hold the shift key to select multiple staves G u ita r F rets NOTE Items will be changed throughout score Chord indications in MusicTime Deluxe are either text only or e 800 text and guitar fret indications With the Guitar Frets dialog you SS ee can change between either display for any selected section in your score Guitar Frets requires you to select the chords you want to change Select the chords and open the Change Guitar Frets dialog Hide Floating Windows MusicTime Deluxe has several floating windows Floating windows always a
32. is often not the best method to select areas in MusicTime Deluxe Yes for a small group of notes within a measure the arrow is ideal and operations such as SuB Gnour PRINT SELECTION and BEAM Group require using the arrow But when selecting entire measures or systems you should use easier more reliable methods This section outlines how each technique is applied within MusicTime Deluxe and when each is most appropriate Drag Selection Highlighting by dragging with the arrow pointer is a very common technique in all operating systems For most readers this need not be explained but to provide a thorough overview we ll describe the basic operation anyway Using the arrow click at the upper left corner above the notes or graphic you want to select Click and hold the mouse button and drag diagonally from upper left to lower right While dragging a highlighted version of your score appears in the growing rectangle As long as you hold down the mouse button you are drawing the selection Adding to a Selection MusicTime Deluxe allows you to add more selections without losing the last selection This speeds things up quite a bit when several different areas on a page all need the same change After selecting one area in MusicTime Deluxe hold down shift while making additional selections Make these selections either by clicking and dragging with the mouse or by using one of the other selection techniques disc
33. key on your computer s keyboard The eighth note had been selected in the Notes palette When you press the R key a rest of the same duration is selected If vou press R again the eighth note will again be selected Make sure the rest 1s selected when you re finished toggling between the two 2 Move the rest pointer over the bass staff in the pickup bar and click once An eighth note rest appears on the staff If you try to enter another rest in the pickup bar you should hear a warning sound from your computer With Auro SPACE on you cannot enter more notes or rests into a measure than are allowed by that measure s time signature Remember the pickup bar is displaying a time signature of 6 8 but it is really a 1 8 measure Creating a Staff Name The Staff Sheet lets you set each staff s playback status enabled muted or soloed playback key MIDI channel MIDI program and MIDI volume You can also give each staff a name and choose one of four font sizes for the staff s display Tutorial First give the staff a name 1 Choose Starr SHEET from the Windows menu The Staff Sheet window appears Staff 1 is the only staff with any data in it Remember MusicTime P Staff Sheet Name Play Solo Size Key Chn ProgramName Gain 1 DO 3 c 1 Built in Deluxe treats a piano staff as a single staff Staff Sheet Set Staff Name 2 Click in the text field below Name Name Font The Starr Name dialog box appear
34. menus contain all the usual commands plus a few unique to MusicTime Deluxe The remaining five Notes Measures Score View and Windows contain operations for defining the contents and behavior of the music The Score and View menus are used for general aspects of score layout The Windows menu contains a list of your open scores and lets you open the Staff Sheet and various palettes MusicTime Deluxe Menu About This is where the version copyright and registration information is When you first install MusicTime Deluxe the program will run in Demo mode To unlock and fully install the program simply enter your serial number when asked The program is fully installed when you can see the version information window P refe re n ces About MusicTime Deluxe The preferences menu contains choices to determine how MusicTime Preferences O eer Ka s ollow Playbac Deluxe communicates with your MIDI equipment what parameters are v Auto Guess Beam eg i icTi v Auto Space used for transcribing MIDI data some global score settings for notational 54 MusicTime Deluxe N S P I g 2 Hide Others Kat Record Transcription Set spacing and menu items that toggle settings on and off in MusicTime Click Setup Deluxe Quit MusicTime Deluxe Q MIDI Setup The toggle settings are Click On Off To hear a metronome click you can toggle the state on or off from the menu or use the shortcut combination of control command
35. od Table of Contents misc LING E NUV EEUU D T UIT 43 aigelbujec e 44 GMI E AINE TE ETE TI 45 wine m SM mco TED D 45 PING TU cc OI DOT T T 46 Selecting In Music Time Deluxe 47 Drag Selectors te ener eee ne eee eee eee re 47 Adding to a Selection cccccccccecccscceeecseeceeceueceeeceeeaeeceeecuesaeesaees 47 ohift Selecting Regions esee 47 Recognizing the Gelechon 48 SSIS CHING Control ONS MT 48 tems Without Control EE 48 Kiel 48 KC 48 Oher SAO MN CS ss T TUTTI 48 el 49 ohift Selecting Notes AE 49 Selecting Measures 50 Selecting Additional Measures ccccccssccceccceseceeeceeeeseeseeeseeessuesaneeaeess 50 Selecliid SAVOS sarene is EE ENN EE EREA rE EEEE 50 Single Click SCISCHON p ERROR OT T 50 JO UIC CICK S ClO CON EE 50 Selecting ele W ie ERR 50 selecting an Entire Hage 91 Using the Computer s Keyboard annannnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnenne 51 Combining TIechnoues cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeceeesaeeseeeeeeseeees 51 PAO UIE IW EE 51 Moving Objects in Music Time Deluxe 52 Moving Notes and Rests sees 52 IOVIFIO ROSI EE 52 Drag Copying notes and rests urine ccncsgatenssceercsensetaneganctienaeacegeeedenesiaeesecss 53 stretching One Measure sssssrspasrarirarorss
36. points Beam Thickness 100 of half space Horizontal Tie Offset lo Quarter spaces e Vertical Tie Offset 3 quarter spaces Spacing Defaults This function sets global defaults for beam stem lengths beam oo Y i us i i in half spaces thicknesses horizontal vertical tie offsets and measure spacing distance between barline clef time signature and key signature e SNC Nan i Mote half space means one Each score can store its own set of spacing defaults but an initial Cancel J naif the height of a staff space setting is determined by the preferences or template file settings Select the item to change color Change Score Colors The Change Colors dialog gives you a way to make global color changes and to change the color of other score elements like staff and bar lines In order to save the color selections as a default make your color selections and then Export the score as a Template or as the default score setting NOTE Items will be changed throughout score The drop down menu enables you to change the colors of specific score cancel Use Factory Presets elements Notes and rests in voices one through eight inactive voices The Menus other symbols and the background Inactive voices are the voices that normally gray out when you re using the Voice Selector to view individual voices Other Symbols are the non note P Select the item to change color
37. right click command click on the last note in the measure and drag the note to the left until there is enough room to accommodate the new clef You may want to widen the measure first by dragging its right barline further to the right Using the control and shift keys while dragging a note stretches the measure contents for all staves Using the control key without the shift key will stretch only the contents of the measure containing the selected note When you have created enough space to accommodate the new clef add the clef and continue To add a clef in the middle of a measure you can use the same stretch function dragging notes with the control and shift keys depressed from any point within the measure First enter all the data before the place where the clef change is to occur Auro Space should be off before adding notes after an inserted clef or the auto spacing operation may move notes on top of the clef With Auro SPACE Off complete the remainder of the measure You do not need to hand align the remainder of the measure unless it suits you To use the spacing operation in MusicTime Deluxe erase the clef within the measure This avoids the spacing operation moving notes on top of the clef We had you enter the clef to more easily reference the notes entered after the clef If you wish you can also enter the pitches without the clef change and insert the clef later Keep in mind when adding the
38. steps to create You ll need to add a measure define it as a pickup bar and enter the note used to start When Johnny Comes Marching Home Adding a Measure 1 Using the arrow pointer click on any blank Pa space in measure 1 Add 1 measure s before measure 1 The blinking insertion cursor will appear where you clicked If you clicked on a note or rest try On all staves again until you see the cursor O Only on staff 1 2 From the Measures menu choose ADD MEASURE cae The App Measvre dialog box appears Change the top line in the dialog to read Add 1 measure s before measure 1 The number of measures to add will default to 1 and the measure in which you placed the cursor will be indicated in the measure box at the end of the sentence The lower half of the dialog allows you to add the measure to one staff or to all staves Since we are using a song with only one piano staff there is no need to make any selection either will work for the purposes of this tutorial 3 Click OK A new blank measure appears You could just enter the notation into this blank measure call it a pickup bar and be done with it However if you simply entered a single eighth note you d hear that eighth note then five silent beats since it s in 6 8 time and then the rest of the piece To create a true pickup bar you need to change the Time Signature to correctly play only one eighth note for the first me
39. use the Key function in the Staff Sheet See the section on the Staff Sheet Windows menu for more information Change Duration Change Duration The Change Durations dialog can alter the display and playback Note Value of notation in your score set face values Change Durations requires a selection T em J Plain Dotted Set Note Durations d AAA Double Dotted This portion of the dialog requires the checkbox to be enabled if you wish the note types to change Use your mouse to place a check mark in the box next to the words Set Note Duration and select the duration including dots and the Play Duration tuplet indication if needed Set play duration to 4 of Face value Changing the duration will change both the duration and the start time for the notes If the new duration is greater than the number of beats in the measure notes in each measure that exceed the time signature will not be heard n b C Tuplet Note All of the choices in the Set Note Duration section can also be applied quickly to selections using shortcut keys See the section on the Notes palette for details Set Play Duration The second option in the Change Durations dialog concerns the MIDI duration to be played for each note Changing Play Duration for Step Entered Notes The default playback for notes entered with the mouse or step entered with a MIDI Keyboard is 90 of the displayed value Changing Play Duration
40. Cross Staff Beaming As explained earlier piano staves are unique and share all eight voices between two combined staves When notes on two different staves require a beam to be drawn between the staves a piano staff must be used When a piano staff is used beaming operations can ignore the normal rules and extend a beam from one staff to another Notes on both staves must be in the same voice since beams are only created between notes in the same voice Here is an example of cross staff beaming viewed for all voices The beamed notes in the treble clef of the piano staff use voices 1 and 2 and the bass clef uses the default voice 5 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Here is the same example viewed only for voice one Voice two was used for only one measure remember the bass clef is voice 5 It is not unusual for a voice to be required for just one or two measures In this particular example a trick was also used to make the second voice appear to be tied to the first voice In the first measure the second portion of the tied chord is actually two quarter notes However when viewed and played these notes are considered eighth notes By flipping the stem direction to match the existing eighth notes the appearance suggests the chord is of the same duration as the eighth notes in voice one To change the quarter notes so that they play back as eighth notes the two notes were selected and then changed to eighth notes Ne
41. Deluxe also lets you create your own personalized templates to put in the Starting Template window To add your personal templates simply create a score with the information you know want in it composer name copyright MIDI settings etc and Export it as a Score Template Make a C Score MusicTime Deluxe saves the templates as transposed scores with all key transpositions and playback adjustments ready to go However if you would rather work with a C score check this box and all playback transpositions will be removed so that every instrument will sound as written Create then open using Wizard Windows MusicTime Deluxe will take you through all the windows needed to completely set up a score These windows include Key Signature Time Signature Text Elements Staff Sheet Create Create will skip the Wizard and let you get right to your score to start writing New Default Score The item will create a new default score The default score is a piano score in C and in 4 4 You may set the default score to whatever set up you would like to use Please refer to the Export menu item for information on saving a default score The Menus Open The standard File Open dialog is used for the Open command and all four file types usable in MusicTime Deluxe and MusicTime files Master Tracks Pro MusicXML and MIDI files can be opened After opening MIDI Music XML or Master Tracks Pro files will be guessed and beamed
42. Initial Clef amp Time Hiding the initial clef and time signature can come in handy when you want to print blank The Menus manuscript paper Background There may be times when you have resized the score window allowing a portion of the background to become visible When the Background option is selected the program background will be a graphic pattern When Background is not selected the background is solid gray Page Margin The Page Margin indicates the area of graphic information that will be printed Staves and systems cannot be placed outside this area and graphics and text should remain inside the page margin When Page Margins have been enabled a broken line will indicate the page margin within your Score window Print Rhythm Staff Line A rhythm staff is a single line staff without key signature clef or barline indications Notes added to the rhythm staff use slashed note heads and are always placed directly on the single line indication When Print Rhythm Staff Line is selected the rhythm staff and any notes or rests it contains prints just as it appears onscreen When this option is not selected the notes and rests print but the line itself does not Left Barline Single Staves This option has an effect only when your systems consist of a single staff When selected the left edge of each staff has a bar line it is closed When not selected there is no bar line the left edge of each staff is open
43. Notes A slur is a curved line over or under two or more notes of different pitches indicating the notes are to be played as a group Slurs can be entered in MusicTime Deluxe using a variety of methods For more information about entering slurs using the pencil tool refer to the reference section for the Tools palette Using the Slur Notes command The menu item for Slur Notes will create a slur for you based on a selection The default slur is created over a group of notes Holding down shift while using the slur command will place the slur under the selected notes Slurs are drawn from either the note head or the stem depending upon the stem direction and the slur placement The default placement of the slur is at the note heads if all stems of the end notes face the same direction If the stems face the opposite direction the slur will be placed on the top Holding down shift will place the slur on the other side as the default The end points of slurs attempt to stay attached to the original notes and readjust when the notes are moved except when control key is down or Auto Guess Beam is OFF The selection for creating a slur should be made by highlighting the entire group of notes the slur appears over or under Make sure the first and last notes which define the slur are fully selected within the same rectangle Additional note groups can be selected using the shift key before defining the selections Shift selec
44. POUR Ru DRE EAERI 110 OS xd Iz UR RU OM oee RE 110 Changing Play Duration for Step Entered Notes 110 Changing Play Duration for Real Time and Imported Notes 110 enande ore EE 111 Make ges E 112 Make ge eer E 112 C 112 No Slash ADOC AI NR RR 113 OS HO 113 Standard Mb ell RENI RET 113 ROVOT TO RAN PN T OTT 113 CIE SISSE Mel EE 113 Transcribing Triplets RET EE 114 VOVO Ter 114 Measures Menu WE 114 e elt 114 Delete OT 115 Eje mem 115 Finding the Current Tempo for a Measure n nnonnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenrennnne 116 SE all VETO o RR RR 116 Changing by Percentage NR 116 Change Smoothly ETOL uui rau eR ned tentata pite b htm a ta nlsi d pni e Rod n apre GR 116 Add _ to EE EE 116 Blau INU E 117 RET VG A 117 alie mii RN u H 117 Time Signature Reminders enne nennen nnn nnn nns 118 FN E NE 118 PO IOAN REOR TTD 119 NO Double Barne RETE 119 Just Delete the Current Key Gonature 119 US EIS SAN RR RR T 119 Ignore Instrument Transposition Keys cece seee eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeeeeees 119 Move NON CS EE 119 Move Endings and E ee EE 120 Changing the Key Signature for Playback n nn0nnna
45. Printing and information on saving a selection as an a PDF or other format please see Chapter 11 Printing With MusicTime Deluxe Edit Menu see a screen like this Paper See US Legal A4 Select your printer from the Format for pop up menu Orientatidl M Then select the Paper Size and Orientation that you SS would like to use To enlarge or reduce your score B enter a number in the Scale box and click OK The 10 Envelope DL Envelope staves will remain the same size on your screen but the Chonksi 3 Eeer size of the displayed page will change Tabloid F A3 i i e Tabloid Extra To create a score with specific margin settings you will Super B A3 need to create a custom page set the page size and select options to access the margin settings Be sure to 1x1 save the settings with a specific name This way you Left A inch Really Big may use this setting again with other scores Manage Custom Sizes Edit Undo Undo is available for most editing operations within MusicTime Deluxe For operations which are not undoable you will either see a warning within the dialog or you will be given an alert before the operation continues with an option to cancel The Menus Cut Cut deletes any selected area and places it in the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard Using the Paste command lets you paste the cut material elsewhere in the score The MusicTime Deluxe clipboard retains the information until another
46. Rests Rests for each voice in MusicTime Deluxe can be hidden The default has the rests showing for voice and 5 as these two voices are used for the treble and bass clef of the piano staff Hiding rests in MusicTime Deluxe is provided because different uses for each voice may arise If a second voice is needed for only part of a measure it may not be appropriate to use a rest in the first portion of that measure At other times perhaps for the same instrument rests may well be needed for more than one voice indication In many cases the voice being indicated may technically be considered the same in regards to the actual music indicated but the need to sometimes hide or show the rests will require using two different voices to achieve that result With eight voices provided MusicTime Deluxe gives you plenty of choices to cover even the most complex voicing situations See Chapter 8 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe for some examples using hidden rests Show Control Points This shortcut toggles between showing and not showing the control points Use Handwritten Music Symbols MusicTime Deluxe has two music writing fonts Anastasia and our NorMusic Font By choosing this item all notes and symbols will be notated with a handwritten look After turning this option on you may manually change any of the text fonts to one of MusicTime Deluxe s handwritten style NorScript fonts The Menus LR o 5 A Jm
47. Sweep Pad Sharai Gunshot MIDI Channel 1 HA o Gain Pan Reverb Level Cancel Gain Volume Gain is controlled through the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog with the fader at the bottom Changing the Staff Sheet Order The order in which the staves appear within the system can be changed from within the Staff Sheet Changes made to the staff order affects all systems Note Changing the staff order will change the status of hidden staves To change the location of a staff click on the number for the staff in the Staff Sheet and drag the staff up or down to the new position Release the mouse button and the staff will be moved to the new location Note We strongly recommend that you remove any braces or brackets before rearranging the staff order The Menus Keyboard Window The Keyboard window is a graphic on screen keyboard that can be played with your mouse or from your computer s QWERTY keyboard This enables you to input music from a keyboard in step time or real time without the need for a MIDI keyboard Playing the Keyboard To play the keyboard with your mouse simply click on the keys If you ve got a soundcard or a MIDI sound module connected to your computer you will hear the notes sound as you click on the keys The instrument sound you hear is determined by the channel and program settings for the active staff the staff that contains the blinking insertion cursor
48. The hot spot for notes is always the note head Use the arrow to click on the note head and drag to adjust either the note s pitch or its horizontal placement Dragging up or down changes the note s pitch Moving left or right changes the horizontal placement Right clicking Windows or com mand clicking Mac on a note will bring up a pop up message displaying the note TIP name MusicTime Deluxe also allows you When moving notes the first direction applied to the note determines the result A to audition the first movement up or down affects only the note s pitch and the horizontal placement pitches without remains the same A left or right first movement changes only the horizontal location entering notes of the note or chord the pitch will not change Hold the right mouse command You cannot change both the pitch and horizontal placement simultaneously Thatis button down notes do not move diagonally while the mouse pointer is over When making pitch adjustments each pitch adjustment up or down sends a MIDI notege score and the message on the channel and port used by the staff pointer turns into a pointing hand Auto spacing and beaming automatically adjusts when notes and measures are moved Click the pointer on a staff location that Note If you choose to work with Auro Space off when moving notes and rests d doesn t have a note you need to use both ALIGN PLAYBACK and ALIGN SPACING after adding notes to the B mi
49. aannucenianctenatuassunensacetecseeceuentaancnaaer o3 SUPE digo ea ci c DRE TET o3 Moving Beams and Brackets c ccccecsecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeaes 53 MOVING A ET ee ee ee EE ee 54 MOVING TOXU c 54 MOVING le 54 Moving Chord Symbols ccccccccsccseecseeceeceeeceseceeeaeeseeeseeeseesaees 54 MOVNO fe E 54 Moving Other Graphics cccccccecccecceeeceecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaees 55 MOVING BANOS ETE TETTE ETT ET 55 Moving Staves And Gvsiems 55 Finding he Stal HOL SPOL rrene rsen Q 55 e Table of Contents Changing All Remaining Systems EE 56 Advanced fechnique s s senenenerensrrnrerererersrrrrrrrrnrnrnrsrerrrrnrnrnrerernn gt 56 The Score VWmdow eene 61 The Window Header Toolbar eese 61 ve ei e WT T TU T MULIERES 61 Buc WoM 61 Hii 32cr aMiesg 61 H c 3e aeM M c 62 WINS Ee re RE de EE 62 Tne Ray m 62 TESCO e RT TU T 62 TAC AA DAON p R 62 TAG ZOOM BUON NEE 62 Setting the Zoom ane mrestore E sepatu iNET EEEE EER 62 TAC AGG ICONS serra ea EE E EE E 63 Using Tbealetes cccceccecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 65 The Notes Palette 2 0 0 0 ccc ccceceec eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegeeeegeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 Klee inle WEE 65 Augmentation Dots and Rei 65 SA eu DE de E
50. across barlines Beam Group will work only if the selected area does not contain any notes previously beamed together Beam Group only affects notes in the same voice Beam Group creates additional brackets along with beams if the selected group includes quarter half or whole notes Beam Group can include rests either within or at the end of a beamed group Using Beam Group Select the group of notes you want to beam together Previously beamed notes require you to use the Beam Group command twice The first time will unbeam anything already beamed and the second operation will beam all of the selected items together Beaming Notes Over a Barline If you make a selection that includes notes in two measures the beam created will be drawn across the barline Note MusicTime Deluxe will create beams over one barline only Beaming operations with selections greater than two measures will stop at the end of the second measure Beams across measures should not be flowed to a new system Beam on Beat Beat On Beat uses the time signature to apply some basic rules to the way notes are beamed together If Auto Guess Beam has been enabled the Beat On Beat operation is applied every time a note is entered or erased from a measure Beat On Beat rules are fairly straight forward for time signatures based on quarter notes 2 4 3 4 4 4 etc Each quarter note in the measure is a beat and beams will not cross the beat boundaries
51. align playback after revoicing and adding any needed rests Set the Clef to Four checkboxes are available for selecting the clef to be used on the new staff Hybrid clefs or additional clefs can be added after the staff has been created Keep Notes in a Piano Staff This option changes a regular staff into a Piano Staff If Keep Notes in a Piano Staff is not checked the new staff will be a regular staff Connect Staves Connect Staves creates and removes both Brackets and Braces and breaks the barlines between staves in a system The Menus Connect Staves requires selecting the staves to be changed before opening the Connect Staves dialog Selection of the staves should be made using the single click method for selecting a system with additional staves selected by holding the shift key down You can also use select all if the operation is for connecting an entire system Break Barlines Barlines sometimes called measure lines are drawn by default between each staff in the system When lyrics are added to a system it is not uncommon to break the barlines below the staff with the lyrics Break Barlines removes the barlines between the selected staff and the staff below If more than one staff 1s selected the barlines will continue to be broken in the same manner for all selected staves Brace The Brace or curved bracket looks like an archer s bow and is placed to the left of a system The brace indicates two or mo
52. always floats Palettes in front of Score window side of a palette s ar l name will switch To move a palette click in the area next to its close box and drag it to a new location the palette to the next or previous unopened palette in the palette list When preferences are saved all open palettes and their positions are remembered Mac OS saves preferences automatically The Notes Palette The Notes palette appears along with the Score window the very first time you run MusicTime Deluxe As its name suggests this palette lets you select various notes as well as rests and accidentals Notes and Rests Using the pencil tool you can select notes or rests from the Notes palette and add them to any portion of your score As a shortcut for selecting more common durations the number keys 0 8 select from a double whole note rest to the 128th note rest see shortcuts The R key toggles between the note and rest for any selected duration Using any of the keyboard shortcuts for the Notes palette selects the pencil tool and opens the Notes palette The Notes palette defaults to the quarter note In addition to inserting notes and rests with the pencil tool the Notes palette is used to select a starting duration for keyboard step entry Please refer to the tutorial section on MIDI Keyboard step entry for further information Augmentation Dots and Tuplets Three selections in the Notes palette can modify the standard no
53. and Instrument Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeseese 225 The MIDI Setup Dialog 225 q Table of Contents SCIRE I eee EEE E E EOE e E 226 SEELEN 226 excu E 22 OVSIGI LEE 227 er OD BOIS MENTO UU C EA EEE E 227 MIDI And Music lime Deluxe 228 Volume Velocity PNO Circe e NETTE TOT E TM 230 MIDI Tool Controllers and Program Changes TERT EO 232 General Controller Tse 233 Importing MIDI and Master Tracks Pro EE 233 yore 6 aieo MNT 233 WB ES ole aa Ie RR M 234 Printing With MusicTime Deluxe 235 Page Margins and Page EaVOUbs E 235 Left Right Top and Bottom Page Ee ln LE 235 Printand Print SSC OU EE 236 mic 236 Using the Free MusicTime Deluxe Demo as a File Viewer 236 us nd 236 Gahbortcufe me nme nennen nenne 237 Toolbar Icons cece ecceceeceeceeeeteeeeeeeteeseceeseeeeeeeseeeeees 244 Table of Contents Tutorial his tutorial will teach you about MusicTime Deluxe s most commonly used features You may use this tutorial with MusicTime Deluxe out of the box with no previous set ups In this tutorial you ll open a standard MIDI file edit it on a piano staff and play it back on your MIDI instrument You ll add a vocal staff and record some music Finally you ll format and print your sheet music You ll learn many things to help you in your everyday work w
54. any of the cells in the chord spelling display to both select the chord type and OK the dialog Chords placed on the lower staff of a Piano staff will default to Voice 1 Moving Chord Symbols similar to lyrics chords use a vertical adjustment arrow in the left page margin to change the vertical position for all the chords entered in a system The horizontal position of each chord can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the text or graphic left or right If control option 1s held down while dragging a chord the item is copied to the new location MEN Using the Palettes Chord indications do not play back over MIDI The voice selector is used to relate each individual chord symbol s vertical position to the vertical alignment arrow When the same voice is used for each chord the vertical alignment for all the chords will be the same Sometimes a chord may need to be placed above a graphic or ending Each voice from 2 through 8 uses a Slightly higher vertical position in relationship to the vertical alignment arrow By selecting a higher voice number a chord can be placed at a different vertical position than other chord symbols For trickier situations the chord symbols can be entered as text Chord Parsing A special method exists for entering chord symbols using the MIDI Keyboard Chord Parsing uses specific keyboard voicings to automatically select the chord types in the Choose Chord dialog without the need to open the dialog
55. are ignored and lost should you choose to expand the compressed rests back into standard measures later However when Extract Part is used the compress rests option will consider barline types text boxes and other graphics and break consecutive measures of rests into groups when it encounters these items within the score Align Playback Align Playback changes the MIDI start times for notes within the selected area to exactly match the screen representation Align Playback can be used to change a real time or imported MIDI file to perform closer to the transcription obtained Align Playback can also be used if extensive editing for a section requires re establishing the correct note order and timing Align Playback does not affect durations A selection is required for Align Playback Only notes within the selection are affected by the Align Playback operation Multiple areas on a page can be changed together using shift to select additional areas after making the first selection See Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe for more information The Menus Swing Playback The Swing Playback function imparts a swing feeling to a staff by changing the start time for notes that fall within the beat or on the off beat and by changing the durations of all notes within the measure Swing Playback requires a selection Selections made to a portion of a measure will affect the entire measure but each system can be changed independently All staves of
56. be very helpful if you simply want to make temporary changes for example to record a particularly difficult passage in real time If however you save the score after changing the tempo with the Tempo window the tempo will be permanently altered The Tempo Window and Tempo Changes If you use the Tempo window to alter a piece that contains tempo changes all of the tempos will be scaled accordingly Let s say a piece starts out at 100 bpm Then after four bars the tempo changes to 200 bpm If the insertion cursor is in the first four bars the Tempo window displays 100 bpm If you change the tempo to 50 bpm the tempo will now change to 100 bpm at measure 5 Both tempos are reduced by 50 Customizable Toolbar MusicTime Deluxe features a floating customizable Toolbar This Toolbar contains icons that represent commonly used MusicTime Deluxe commands All of the icons and their related functions are shown at the end of this manual on the pages entitled Toolbar Icons Rules about selection and cursor placement still apply the toolbar simply provides a convenient shortcut The Toolbar is a floating window so it is affected by the Hide Show Floating Windows command in the View menu Customizing the Toolbar The Toolbar contains a few icons by default but it is fully configurable You can choose the icons and the order in which they appear This is accomplished with the Toolbar Setup item in the preferences menu For more info see
57. beam created will be drawn across the barline Note MusicTime Deluxe will create beams over one barline only Beaming operations with selections greater than two measures will stop at the end of the second measure Beams across measures should not be flowed to a new system Beam on Beat Beat On Beat uses the time signature to apply some basic rules to the way notes are beamed together If Auto Guess Beam has been enabled the Beat On Beat operation is applied every time a note is entered or erased from a measure Beat On Beat rules are fairly straight forward for time signatures based on quarter notes 2 4 3 4 4 4 etc Each quarter note in the measure is a beat and beams will not cross the beat boundaries When the time signature is based on eighth notes it is not possible to arrive at a universal beaming solution appropriate for every situation MusicTime Deluxe uses a beat value of three eighth notes for 6 8 12 8 and 9 8 For odd time signatures such as 5 8 and 7 8 the beat value is one eighth note For complex rhythms the beaming must be performed manually using Beam Group See Default Spacing Auto Beam Guess and Selecting Objects in MusicTime Deluxe and Moving in MusicTime Deluxe for more information related to beams Change Pitch Transpose Change Pitch Transpose alters both the position of notes and their playback For Change Pitch Transpose to function you need to make a selection The Change Pitch
58. changed but the pitches can either be transposed or left alone Selecting a measure range before opening the Set Key Signature dialog will enter the selected area into the measure range portion of the Set Key Signature dialog The key signature change will be applied to all measures between the first and last measure indicated Enter a new measure range if desired Use the scroll to select a key Use Instruments Key Transposed Score or Set All Staves to same Key C score If you select Use Instruments Key Transposed Score MusicTime Deluxe will insert the appropriate key signature depending on the staff s playback transposition set via the Staff Sheet Window For example if one staff s playback transposition is set for a Bb instrument and one in C then inserting a key signature of G Major will result in the first staff having an A Major signature while the second will have a G Major signature If you want all staves to have the same key signature then select Set all staves to the same key C Score No Double Barline Place a check mark in this box if you do not wish to have double barlines inserted into the set Key Signature E3 score at the place of the key signature change zm From measure Ea E Just Delete the Current Key Signature When a key signature needs to be removed the E Major option to Just delete the current Key Signature z should be selected This removes all key ap Ca Minar
59. clefs can be added after the staff has been created Keep Notes in a Piano Staff This option changes a regular staff into a Piano Staff If Keep Notes in a Piano Staff is not checked the new staff will be a regular staff Connect Staves Connect Staves creates and removes both Brackets and Braces and breaks the barlines between staves in a system Connect Staves requires selecting the staves to be changed before opening the Connect Staves dialog Selection of the staves should be made using the single click method for selecting a system with additional staves selected by holding the shift key down You can also use select all if the operation is for connecting an entire system Break Barlines Barlines sometimes called measure lines are drawn by default between each staff in the system When lyrics are added to a system it is not uncommon to break the barlines below the staff with the lyrics Break Barlines removes the barlines between the selected staff and the staff below If more than one staff 1s selected the barlines will continue to be broken in the same manner for all selected staves Brace The Brace or curved bracket looks like an archer s bow and is placed to the left of a system The The Menus brace indicates two or more staves that are to be read and played together The standard use for the brace is for instruments such as the piano celeste harp and organ Piano Staves in MusicTime Deluxe have bra
60. combined instrument staves such as piano staves are affected by Swing Playback equally A percentage amount defines how far forward the notes are to be moved 50 is equivalent to saying half the distance between beats which translates into no swing The default is 66 7 but any value between 50 0 and 75 0 can be used The Longest duration to swing determines how far the notes are to be moved and how much the duration is to be changed We recommend experimenting with the settings on a variety of music samples containing different note durations and tempos The default selection for eighth notes at 66 7 is also a good starting place Rather than try and explain the Swing Playback mathematics for this operation we re going to let Amount of Swing SEE os 50 0 to 75 0 your ears explain it for you Weeer ote Type to Swing camel To remove the effects of Swing Playback you CO Whole 9 Eighth can use either Align Playback or set the swing CO Half 18th percentage to 50 Either option effectively Quarter 32nd removes the swing effect Align Spacing Align Spacing establishes the horizontal and vertical spacing relationships between notes both within each measure and for all measures in the system Align Spacing affects all measures on all staves for a range of measures If the measure range is selected before opening the Align Spacing dialog the measure range will be entered into the upper portion of the dia
61. continue to use the gt gt key until the correct note or rest 1s highlighted After each chord is entered the same technique can be used to continue selecting notes or rests for Chord Parsing entry Once you learn this technique it is by far the fastest way to enter chord symbols into a score MEN Using the Palettes Suggested chord parsings Measures with rests do not have a parsing option for the chord indicated CONTROL KEY Cmaj Cmaj965 Cmaj C5 Cmaj9611 Cmaj Cmaj1365 Col Cm 6 9 Cmmaj7 Cm maj Cm7 dd4 Cm7 dd11 D 8 D EN Using the Palettes Chord Parsings 2 C sus C765 C709 C79 C711 C765 9 C7659 769 49 C C 709 C479 C9 C49 C9sus4 C905 C911 e C13 Cl3gys4 C1365 C1369 C13d9 C13d11 C omit3 C Csus Csus sus C omit5 o cf S CONTROL KEY CONTROL KEY CONTROL KEY EN Using the Palettes Chord Parsing should not be confused with MIDI Paste When a selection is drawn around a note or rest or a chord and the C or Fretboard from the Graphics palette is not selected playing on the MIDI Keyboard will replace the selected item with the information coming from the keyboard The Drawing Tools The remaining tools on the Graphics palette can draw lines rectangles ellipses and other graphic objects in the score Select the desired tool with the
62. decays with a velocity of 12 General MIDI Patch Map 1 Acoustic grand piano 33 Acoustic bass 65 Soprano sax 97 ce rain 2 Bright acoustic piano 34 Electric bass fingered 66 Alto sax 98 Soundtrack 3 Electric grand piano 35 Electric bass picked 67 Tenor sax 99 Crystal 4 Honky tonk piano 36 Fretless bass 68 Baritone sax 100 Atmosphere 5 Rhodes piano 37 Slap bass 1 69 Oboe 101 Brightness 6 Chorused piano 38 Slap bass 2 70 English horn 102 Goblin 7 Harpsichord 39 Synth bass 1 71 Bassoon 103 Echo drops 8 Clavinet 40 Synth bass 2 72 Clarinet 104 Star theme 9 Celesta 41 Violin 73 Piccolo 105 Sitar 10 Glockenspiel 42 Viola 74 Flute 106 Banjo 11 Music box 43 Cello 75 Recorder 107 Shamisen 12 Vibraphone 44 Contrabass 76 Pan flute 108 Koto 13 Marimba 45 Tremolo strings TT Bottle blow 109 Kalimba 14 Xylophone 46 Pizzicatto strings 78 Shakuhachi 110 Bag pipe 15 Tubular bells 47 Orchestral harp 79 Whistle 111 Fiddle 16 Dulcimer 48 Timpani 80 Ocarina 112 Shanai 17 Hammond organ 49 String ensemble 1 81 Square wave lead 113 Tinkle bell 18 Percussive organ 50 String ensemble 2 82 Sawtooth wave lead 114 Agogo 19 Rock organ 51 Synth strings 1 83 Caliope lead 115 Steel drums 20 Church organ 52 Synth strings 2 84 Chiff lead 116 Woodblock 2 Reed organ 53 Choir aahs 85 Charang 117 Taiko drum 22 Accordion 54 Voice oohs 86 Solo synth voice 118 Melodic tom 23 Harmonica 55 Synth
63. deselected The appoggiatura option automatically plays the notes on the beat location at which they are located A full discussion of the term appoggiatura cannot be covered us f race Notas in this manual and there are disagreements concerning the exact interpretation and use of the appoggiatura anyway In MusicTime Deluxe the selection will create a grace note that is played on the beat and the note s type will be preserved Standard Note s C Cue Note s ei Grace Note s that 1s a half note will look like a small half note a quarter ee 25 will look like a small quarter note etc Appoggiaturas differ from cue notes in that they are played on the beat but will not Play on the beat H4 affect the beat locations of other notes in the measure M No slash appoggiatura Cue Cancel This option shrinks all notes beams and marks to 70 of normal size Cue notes are muted by default If you would prefer to hear the cue notes you can select them and use the Note Attributes dialog to unmute them Standard Note This removes any grace or cue changes made to the selected notes and restores full performance and duration values Revert to Raw Raw data in MusicTime Deluxe appears as note heads with accidental and tie information only Revert to Raw removes all stems flags beams and marks from notes and leaves only this information and the MIDI data associated with each note Graphic information such
64. doesn t count If a note appears stem down the far left side 1s the stem and the same rule applies select just the stem and the note is still selected Select anything but the stem and the selection will not be recognized Rests The same concept concerning note selection remains true for rests If the left side of a rest is highlighted the rest 1s selected Other Graphics Dynamics marks and chord symbols both text chords and guitar indications all have a control point in the approximate center As soon as a selection includes the center for one of these items the graphic is selected 48 Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe Clefs Clefs cannot be selected Clefs that have been added after the beginning of a system can be erased with the eraser tool The one operation in MusicTime Deluxe that will move a clef within the measure is the stretch function For more on this special function see the ApvaNcED Topics appendix to this manual Shift Selecting Notes MusicTime Deluxe provides a special method for selecting individual notes and rests even when they are part of dense chords or passages This technique 1s called shift selecting When a note is shift selected the note head is enclosed in a small selection rectangle to indicate the note has been added to the selection Shift selecting notes is very fast and efficient once you understand what to do Hold down shift and click directly on a note s
65. f Font measure as well Refer to the section on Time First Bar is Pickup Bar Signature for more information l _ Enclose Numbers in Box If the first measure is already configured as a pickup bar the measure range in dialogs will be affected A pickup measure will be Number Offset represented with a dash in the From field of a measure range Place 0 space s above staff If you would like the measure numbers to C below staff appear in a box click Enclose Numbers in a Box The starting number can be offset by either a positive or negative number of measures using the Number Offset box An example on how to use this would be in the case of a 4 measure introduc tion where you would like measure 1 to be after the introduction Place 4 in the box and measure 5 becomes measure 1 MusicTime Deluxe allows you to indicate whether you want your measure numbers to appear above or below the measures The default is zero spaces above the measure Any number from 1 15 can be used Compressed Rests The Compressed Rests dialog is used to indicate multiple measures of rest with the standard graphic The Menus consisting of a thick horizontal bar and a number for the measures included Compressed Rests You must select the measure or measures you Make compressed rest of 3 measures want to compress To expand the multiple e e xpand compressed FESE Cancel rest indication for a measure ba
66. file This information 1s not necessary for most people and certainly isn t required to use MusicTime Deluxe The basic value for most sequencers is the clock tick and the common reference for describing a sequencer s clock resolution is to describe a quarter note in clock ticks MusicTime Deluxe and GVOX s Master Tracks Pro use 240 clock ticks per quarter note MIDI Files are designed to allow each program to freely convert a quarter note to their own clock duration Thus a quarter note of 240 clicks in MusicTime Deluxe may be translated into greater or fewer clock ticks in other sequencers Consult the documentation for the sequencer you are using if you are unsure of the clock resolution The dotted values for MIDI notes in MusicTime Deluxe can be calculated by multiplying the duration by either 1 5 for a single augmentation dot or 1 75 for the double dot The relationship of the tuplet duration to MIDI clock ticks is more complicated but can be calculated by applying the following formula Qx R L applied tuplet duration Where Q Note duration in clock ticks L Left side of Tuplet indication R Right side of Tuplet indication Thus while an eighth note is 120 clock ticks an eighth note triplet 3 2 is the total of 120 times 2 or 240 divided by 3 240 divided by 3 So an eighth note triplet is 80 clock ticks in MusicTime Deluxe For playback MusicTime Deluxe rounds off inserted
67. first measure in the measure range The The Menus right barline type will be applied to the right side of last measure in the measure range Play Repeats If Play Repeats is checked the repeat barline type will affect playback Repeat barlines combined with measure endings will determine how repeat bars are interpreted during playback Used without an ending or coda phrase see Endings and Coda Phrases the next measure played after a right repeat bar will be the previous measure which has a left repeat bar If no left repeat bar can be found playback will begin at Barline Types measure one again After a repeat bar has been played once in a song Apply to Range of Measures without stopping the repeat will be ignored the next time that bar is Ese Bes played Apply to Each Measure in Range When repeats are used with the Endings and Coda Phrases settings the Left Right next measure played will depend on the settings selected from within E those dialogs Barline Types will also affect the automatic Compress Rests function B Play Repeats when extracting parts See Compress Rests and Extract Parts for more Cancel e information Endings The Endings dialog enters measure endings within the score Measure endings can be interpreted during playback and MusicTime Deluxe will support up to six endings for playback Additional endings can be defined using text boxes but will not be used during playback Endi
68. grace or cue attributes MusicTime Deluxe does not count grace notes when calculating the number of beats in each measure and their playback can be set to play in advance of the next note if the grace note can borrow time from a preceding note or rest Cue notes have their full beat value counted in the measure and are muted by default If cue notes are to be used to indicate alternate or secondary lines add all of the cue notes in a separate voice Grace Before MusicTime Deluxe can create grace notes you must first enter the duration used for the grace as a regular note Note When a phrase of two or more beamed notes are converted to grace notes the original duration of the note is retained in the beamed configuration Single grace notes however are always converted to the standard eighth note grace character When notes added to a measure are intended to be grace notes you will need to turn OFF Auto Space and Auto Guess Beam With Auto Space ON you will be prevented from entering more than the full beat count for the measure Since grace notes are standard notes before you convert them to grace notes you have to be able to add them to the measure The percentage amount entered for Scale duration by determines how long the grace note will be played This value is applied to the current duration of the note before it is changed to a grace note That is changing a half note to a grace note will indicate the grace as an eighth note
69. indent on the first system just control win option mac drag the second system If you drag the left or right end of a system horizontally the placement of objects within the system will be scaled proportionally 1 Click and hold on the left edge of the first system 2 Drag the staff to the right until its left end is over the center of Measure 3 3 Release the mouse button The first system is compressed AII three of the measures in the system are scaled to occupy less horizontal space Dragging Barlines You re almost finished with the layout The systems are evenly spaced on the page the spaces between staves are consistent and you ve indented the first system The only thing left to do is adjust the width of the measures in the first system 1 Click and hold on the barline between the pickup bar and Bar 1 2 Drag the barline left 3 Release the mouse button The measure is resized Auto ALIGN SPAcING automatically adjusts the notes in the measures on either side of the barline At this point your edited file should look pretty close to the file jonnypno enc You might want to compare the two files to check your work so far You could even print them out if you d like Adding a Staff The next part of this tutorial will show you how to add a vocal staff Then you ll enter the melody using MIDI step entry and real time recording and finally add some lyrics Tutorial Choose App Starr from the Score menu
70. left of the name to go in reverse order You can also open multiple palettes by choosing them individually from the Palette sub menu under the Windows menu or by selecting Show All Palettes under the Windows menu The pallets will appear then you can drag them to a convenient on screen location MusicTime Deluxe will record the location of the palettes so that they reappear in the same locations the next time you use the program 2 Click the eighth note icon The pencil button in the Toolbar is automatically selected When you move the mouse pointer over the Score window it will look like an eighth note 3 Place the Note pointer on the D above middle C in the pickup bar and click once A D with the duration of an eighth note appears in the score You should hear the note play when you place it in the score MusicTime Deluxe s Auro Space feature Setup menu is on by default so the note will be placed where it belongs in the measure There will be more about Auro Space later in the tutorial If you make a mistake while entering the note select Unpo App Irem from the Edit menu press command z ctrl z delete backspace or select the eraser tool and click directly on the note to remove it Re select the pencil when you are done and return to the start of this section Now you need to place a rest in the bass staff The eighth note should still be selected in the Notes palette Entering a Rest Press the R
71. length between 0 and f BE 63 Each number represents 1 72 of an inch i Note Adjusting a beam in any manner after the half beam length has been altered will revert the half J beams to their default length Rests MusicTime Deluxe lets you change the look of your rests from standard rest notation default to slashes or vice versa Set Rest Type Select the rests you want to change and then choose Rests to open the Change Rest Attribute dialog Windows or Set Rest Attribute Mac Take your pick Note See Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe for more information Cancel Te ee es Set to Voice A complete discussion of voices and voicing in MusicTime Deluxe is provided in Chapter 8 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe The voice sub menu shows MusicTime Deluxe s eight voices Changing the voice assignment for a selection can be done using this menu You may find it easier to use the control command key and number shortcuts provided To view by voice The Menus Press V dash for all voices V 1 for voice one V 2 for voice two etc To change the voice of a selection control command 1 for voice one control command 2 for voice two etc Changing voice for a beamed group of notes will unbeam the notes in the process Accidentals This feature permits you to change the accidentals that occur in a selection Although MusicTime Deluxe attempts to use the correct accidentals for the cu
72. lyric Space within lyric Reposition all lyric lines in score QWERTY Note Entry QWERTY Mode On Off Rest Dot Double Dot Tuplet Tie notes Note Selection Select note Select note to the L R of cursor Add L R note to Selection Select L R Measure s notes Adds L R measure s notes to selec tion Set corners of Selection Region Mac T Opt Close Ctr Drag Ctrl drag Opt drag Opt 2 _ Space Bar 9 Space Bar Tab 8 Tab Ctr Space Bar Opt while dragging arrow Q L el Kaf i Kata IG Click 36 L R Arrow 36 H L R Arrow 3 Opt L R Arrow Click Windows 1 Ctrl Drag w Right Click Ctrl drag Ctrl 8 Space Bar or Space Bar Tab 8 Tab Ctr Space Bar Ctrl while dragging arrow Q D 8 Kaka Click Shortcuts Tools Draw 3 Point Slur Right Thumb Bracket Place Mark Below Place Mark Above Flip Hairpin Chord Dialog Major Minor Aug Dim 7th Maj 7th 9th 11th 9 6 Root Bass root Sharp root Flat root Sharp bass root Flat bass root Miscellaneous Move Cursor to first measure Move Cursor to last measure Scroll by page Move to Previous Page Move to Next Page Move Cursor directionally Move directionally in MIDI Delete note to left of Cursor or selection Re
73. m fr DOE slaves Linear View HY Hide Floating Windows TEK Tutorial If you don t like the appearance of the ties you can edit them 1 From the View menu choose Show Control Points When you return to the score small rectangular handles have appeared in the middle of each of the ties These are the control points Ties text slurs and several other graphic elements that appear on your score have control points associated with them The control points let you grab to make various types of adjustments For example you can use the arrow pointer to pull ties up or down tweak the appearance of slurs or resize text boxes Tip Control points can be turned on and off by pressing control command apostrophe Note The control points do not need to be showing in order to adjust the graphics It s just easier if you can see them Aligning Playback The notation you see in the Score window and the MIDI data that MusicTime Deluxe plays back are closely linked but they are two separate entities Whenever you make changes to the durations of notes or make other edits to your score you should align the MIDI playback to the on screen notation In certain instances MusicTime Deluxe might not let you enter more notes or rests into an edited measure until you have aligned the playback 1 Select measure 4 Double click in any blank space in Measure 4 2 Choose ALIGN PLAvBACK from the Measures menu 3 Click anywhere
74. mark Note It may sometimes be necessary to adjust the ending indication slightly for MIDI playback to resume the desired pitch at the correct location MIDI Tools The MIDI tools feature allows you to enter both MIDI program changes and controller data into your score Inserted MIDI events will be shown by default in your score but can be hidden using the Show Hide dialog To add a MIDI Event select the MIDI Item from the Tools palette with the pencil tool and click in the score at the location where you want to insert the event The MIDI Graphic Item dialog box opens and you can select either a program change or controller type and value to be inserted MEN Using the Palettes MIDI Graphic Item Font Style Geneva H Bold italic Size 9 ES Underline Controller 10 64 Expression HH Number Value Common Controllers Program Piano 1 C Pitch Bend Ch Channel Pressure 64 Value C Aftertouch 64 64 Key Pressure Pan Ctl 10 64 Cancel E 0 5D When you add a MIDI item to the score an arrow at the beginning of the item name will point either up or down to indicate the affected staff If the arrow indicates the wrong staff drag the indication closer to the staff you wish to affect MIDI controller messages and program changes added to a score remain in effect until encountering another message of the same type Adding another message for the same controller or another p
75. measure range can also be entered from within the dialog When measures are selected that have endings already defined the ending type for the first measure selected will be indicated in the dialog For endings to be interpreted during playback the Play Repeats checkbox must be enabled The font button at the top of the Measure Endings dialog determines the font size and style for the numbers in the ending indications If Custom text box is selected the font selection will also be used for the text box Text boxes created within the Measure Endings dialog are standard text boxes and can be edited further after exiting the dialog Font selections for measure numbers apply to all endings but can be changed at any time Open the Measure Endings dialog and select a new font without selecting an ending to change the current font Click OK when you re through The ending indication selected determines both what number or numbers are used for the ending and how playback will interpret the ending As each ending selection is checked the field next to Custom text box updates to show you what characters are to be entered by default for the ending First Fourth Custom Text Box 41 When Custom text box is enabled the measure ending will display only the entered text Playback of measures with custom text boxes will still use the endings selected above the custom text box to determine how Lock Ending Play Them Measure
76. more information Click Setup Click Setup configures the choices and methods used to generate a metronome click The actual number of clicks to be played for each measure is determined by the time signature for each measure and the Click value set for those measures MusicTime Deluxe allows you to specify the device to playback the click The settings for pitch are determined by the MIDI note number in the field Count In Pre roll When recording in real time the Bar Click plays for the number of beats indicated by the time signature in the measure in which recording is to start MIDI Click Use MIDI to generate the metronome click with your synthesizer or drum machine Drum machines are a common choice for a MIDI click but you can choose any sound or patch you like The Pitch field in the Click Setup dialog responds to MIDI Input If your synthesizer can send note data to MusicTime Deluxe you can set the choice for the Bar and Beat clicks by playing the note You can use any keyboard or controller to send notes Thru to your click 3 Click Setup Device Chan Pitch Vel Dur msec Bar click Built In Synth 1 3 10 34 100 5 Beat click Built In Synth 1 44 10 33 70 2 Only Use Click When Recording Pre roll Playback Click L d choice First before you open the Click Setup dialog be sure Thru is turned on and set to the same channel and device as your choice for click In the Click Setup dia
77. move through the score from note to note adding the desired words and syllables First you ll need to select the lyric tool which 1s found in the Graphics palette 1 Click on the lyric tool the L in the Graphics palette 2 Click the arrow tool on the head of the first note in the vocal part A blinking text cursor appears below the first note You should also see an arrow appear directly to the left of the cursor in the margin 3 Type the first word When and press the spacebar The first word appears centered below the first note When you press the spacebar the cursor moves to the next note 4 Type John and then press the hyphen key For breaks between syllables use the hyphen key This will move the cursor to the next note and place a hyphen between the two syllables 5 Type in the second syllable If you look at the example you will also notice that there are some melismas in the vocal part The first one occurs in Measure 3 To enter a melisma 1 Type in the word or syllable 2 Hold the shift key and press the spacebar The cursor moves to the tied notes 3 Continue to hold shift and press the hyphen underscore A single underscore will appear there The melisma will not actually be drawn until you exit lyric mode If you click on the arrow tool the melisma will be drawn Editing Lyrics You can use the lyric tool to edit text and correct typos The back s
78. notes using the pencil or MIDI keyboard step entry to 90 of their exact clock tick value With this in mind if you enter an eighth note triplet 80 clock ticks with the pencil and then export the file to Master Tracks Pro the note duration would equal 72 clock ticks The MIDI playback duration that is the number of clock ticks can be altered using the CHANGE Duration dialog Notes menu for any selection The choice is represented as a percentage of the full duration ALIGN PLAYBACK does not affect note durations only their start times MIDI and MusicTime Deluxe zd dle TT BU EGO Lely Te BELT Deluxe Chapter Eleven Ithough computers are wonderful tools for creating music the printed page is still easier to share witvh the rest of the world Maybe some day this will change but for now the final step for a score will usually be printing the score and parts out to paper Printing and page layout should be considered from the moment you begin to create a new score The choice of paper size and reduction or enlargement factor will all affect the page layout and appearance of your score Although each score will generate its own requirements there are some general guidelines that seem to apply to many scores A reduction factor of 80 with staff size 3 is ideal for most piano vocal arrangements The reduction percentage can be designated in the Pace Serur dialog Larger scores can sometimes require additional reduction amounts
79. of names When the focus is set to the program name matrix you can use the arrow keys to select different programs Assigning Different Programs for Each Voice The Voice text box in the upper right corner of the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog lets you choose which voice the current program selection will affect When Voice is selected changing the program selection changes all other voices to the same selection To make individual selections for each of the eight voices select the voice from the voice menu and then make your selection MusicTime Deluxe allows you to use a different MIDI Channel and program for each of the eight voices Normal use of the voices will not require unique sounds for each voice When writing for two instruments on a single staff you can assign a different program name for each voice used Note To use different program names you must also use different MIDI channels for each voice assigned a different sound For example if you used voice 1 for a trumpet and voice 2 for a trombone you would need to assign voice 1 to one MIDI channel and voice 2 to a different MIDI channel If the other voices were unused they should be assigned to none to avoid interfering with other selections on different staves Staff Selection The Menus The Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog allows you to make your device choice for one multiple or all When All Staves is enabled changing
80. or chords in the process If you need to change the order of notes in a measure it is better to erase notes that are out of order and reenter them Inserting a Measure When Johnny Comes Marching Home has at least 4 verses MusicTime Deluxe not only allows you to add repeats it also gives you the option of playing them via MIDI as notated But before you can add the repeats you ve got to Fe a new measure to use for the repeat Add I icem before NS S 16 ending On all staves Only on staff 1 s 1 Click in Measure 16 to place the insertion cursor 2 From the Measures menu choose ADD MEASURE The App Measure dialog box appears 3 Choose Add 1 measure before Measure 16 4 Click OK Measure 16 is now a new empty measure What was previously Measure 16 is now Measure 17 Tutorial Copying a Measure 3 4 Next you re going to copy Measure 17 and paste it into Measure 16 Double click between the staves of Measure 17 to select the entire measure From the Edit menu choose Copy Place the insertion cursor in the treble staff of Measure 16 From the Edit menu choose PASTE The notation from measure 17 appears in Measure 16 Before continuing some additional changes are needed in Measure 16 The end of Measure 16 will be used to lead into the second and third verses in our example and the note created in the pickup bar needs to be placed at the end of Measure 16 When you copied
81. pencil tool and then click and drag to draw the object in the score Use the arrow tool to drag the object to another location You can also stretch or resize any of these objects by dragging on one of its control points with the arrow tool The box at the bottom of the Graphics palette allows you to select the line style and thickness for the drawn object You choices include a thin dotted line and solid lines of varying thicknesses A small arrow head at each end of the selection indicates the current choice The Tools Palette The Tools palette contains a variety of tools for adding everything from slurs to ottava indications You can add all of the items with the pencil tool An exception is slurs which can be also be generated using a command in the Notes menu See Slur Notes under the Notes menu for more information Anything entered from the Tools palette can be deleted with the eraser Selecting the item with the arrow tool and using either the back space delete key or Cut or Clear from the Edit menu will also remove graphics When using the eraser you should click on a control point if one exists for the item some of the items in the Tools palette affect MIDI playback By MIDI playback we simply mean the playback of the score within MusicTime Deluxe or the MIDI export of the file Some of the tools such as hairpins and tempo indications allow you to choose whether or not they will affect playback Others such as o
82. pitches without the clef that the pitch locations should be referenced to the current clef Select and use the spacing function for the measure Next use the stretch function to drag notes in the middle of the measure either left or right until you have enough room to accommodate the new clef Advanced Topics When stretching within the measure the stretch function will both expand and compress the data on either side compressing the data in the direction you are dragging and expanding the data in the other Because the relationship between notes will be scaled from the beginning and end of the measure a gradual opening can be created without losing the vertical spacing relationship established with the spacing function Fermatas A fermata indicates a note or rest is to be held longer than notated MusicTime Deluxe will not automatically change tempo or duration when fermatas are attached to a note or rest It can be very effective however to manually change the tempo to create the effect of a fermata during playback Select the measure in which the fermata occurs Open the Tempo dialog The current tempo used for the measure will be indicated in the SET ALL TEMPOS To field Unless the fermata applies to the entire measure consider using the CHANGE SMOOTHLY option in the Tempo dialog The first tempo should be the current tempo and the second tempo should be the tempo change needed for the fermata Finding the correct tempo v
83. point for the record process by clicking in the top staff of the two staves to be used when recording the split The split point can be anything from C2 to G8 but is usually somewhere near middle C C3 MusicTime Deluxe defaults to C3 The split point responds to MIDI input so you can experiment with your keyboard or controller if you are unsure what might be appropriate Notes below the selected pitch will be placed in the lower staff Unless you are recording into a specific voice notes in the bass clef of a standard Piano staff will be set to voice 5 The Record Items choice is used for both real time input and also when opening importing a MIDI or Master Tracks Pro file Each checkbox acts as a filter allowing the selected MIDI Data type to be recorded or imported with a file Note The record settings do not affect the Thru function This means that turning off pitch bend will not prevent pitch bend messages from being sent over the Thru channel and device Warning If you uncheck the item Notes you will only see rests when recording or importing files To prevent accidentally recording over your previous work MusicTime Deluxe has an option to Enable Enter Key to Start Stop Recording Transcription Settings The Transcription Settings item is used to select the shortest duration value to be used when The Menus Lace KE Ai Apu NS us am J LR i KE GAN T S 5 y mari SC ef big E E guessin
84. points or handles define the four corners of the text box Click anywhere within this area to move text boxes It is not necessary to click on actual text characters Because the entire area used for the text box is recognized with each mouse click it is generally a good idea to size each text box to the same size or a little larger than the text entered This minimizes problems with text boxes that overlap other graphics Moving Lyrics Lyrics can be adjusted horizontally by clicking and dragging on the lyric entry with the arrow pointer The vertical height for lyrics in each system uses an adjustment arrow that appears while working in lyric mode For more information refer to the section on the Lyric tool in the Grapnics palette Moving Chord Symbols Chords both text and guitar indications are adjusted horizontally in the same fashion as lyrics by clicking and dragging on the chord indication Adjust the vertical height for the chords by using the vertical alignment arrow that appears to the left of the system in chord mode This adjustment is identical to the way lyrics are adjusted vertically Sometimes when an ending or text is in the way chords will require different vertical heights for the same system By using different voices for entering each chord symbol eight possible vertical positions exist for each system A different vertical position is used for each of the voices with each voice beyond voice on
85. ra E Em tr m Vibraphone CieanGt Contrabass MutedTrumpet Marimba Muted Gt Tremolo Str Eresch Horns ylophon PizzicatoStr Brass 1 Tubular bell Distortion Harp ynth Brass antur impani Synth Brass Ocarina Sweep Pad Shana Gunshot MIDI Channel 1 H EP i i Dg K i Gain Pan Reverb Level Glockenspiel Cancel ok about Bank control messages Select which voice in this staff will use this set up MusicTime Deluxe defaults to All Voices Click on the grid to select the instrument patch on the playback device you want to use for the selected staff voice A test note will be played Hitting a key on the computer keyboard will play another test note Select the MIDI channel It is best to assign each staff to its own MIDI channel If staves or voices share MIDI channels then you must be careful to ensure that they use the same settings otherwise unpredictable conflicts may occur Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings Honky tonk Pian lactric Piano 1 lectric Piana 2 Harpsichord Clavi Celesta Church Organ SynthStrings 2 Chiff Lead Korg M1 ck stati i MSE Lag Generic Playback Device USB Keystatio Bank 1 0 d General MIDI Gen MIDI Drums Kawai K1 Acoustic Grand PiDrawbar Organ Acoustic Bass String Ensmble 1 Square Wave Kurzweil K1000 ill right Acoustic P Elecric Bass Fini String Ensmble 2 Sawtooth Proteus 1 lectr
86. second note release the first and play a third and so on Even the smallest hands can enter huge chords this way 4 Press 3 on your computer s keyboard and enter the fifth note You can continue to enter the vocal line in this fashion using the MIDI instrument to enter pitches and the number keys to choose durations If you make a mistake use the backspace key to move back one event and reenter it To enter a rest press R and play a note A rest with the current duration will be entered Press R again to toggle back to note entry Note MIDI step entry determines not only the pitch of the entered notes but also the MIDI velocity value assigned to each note or chord Real Time Entry Real time note entry 1s the fastest and most entertaining method of getting notes into MusicTime Deluxe Let s set up MusicTime Deluxe for recording i i Record Setup Record Items 1 From the MusicTime Deluxe Preferences menu choose Notes A Channel Pressure Record TRANSCRIPTION SETUP M Program Change Controllers IV Pitch Bend M Modulation The Record TRANSCRIPTION SETUP dialog box appears Split notes below C3 on to bottom staff 2 Click the eighth note choice When MusicTime Deluxe guesses the duration of notes it subdivides each measure based upon the value you choose in Transcription Settings the TRANSCRIPTION SETuP dialog MusicTime Deluxe tries to make the notes you play fit within those subdivi
87. second number is a value If you are unfamiliar with controllers you should refer to your synthesizer documentation first MIDI MIDI Playback Settings Dynamics Velocity Ranges 7 Play Pedal W PPP V Play Hairpi SPP Lpp 9 Ramp to E Gg Lr um 3 Always Ch EJ g al m Play Marks FA Accents k EE 103 Ade AM P Eis Adc BA 127 Articulations M Send Volume Control Pm L a 14 Change Note Velocities Play WM Humanize Play Synthesizers usually have a MIDI Implementation chart indicating which controller numbers they support For more about MIDI and how controllers are used refer to the chapter concerning MIDI Controller messages are voice specific When you enter a controller item the MIDI Information will be sent on the same MIDI Channel as the voice currently selected When Voice is selected all voices the default voice and channel are used Dynamics Palette The Dynamics palette contains 13 symbols indicating the gradations of loudness and softness with which music is performed Dynamic symbols are frequently used in conjunction with hairpins Some of the dynamic symbols can optionally affect MIDI playback by scaling the velocity information for all notes following a dynamic indication Double click on any of the first eight dynamic symbols in the palette to open the MIDI PLAYBACK SETTINGS dialog box The top eight dynamic symbols can scale
88. signatures for the measure range specified The new key signature will be a continuation of any Na double barline key signature used before the first measure of the affected measure range or the key signature will default to the key of C Just this staff Just delete the current Kev Signature d Ignore Instrument Transposition keys Note When Just Delete The Current Key Signature is used the selected key signature is ignored Move notes Up Down Move Endings and Symbols Just this staff By default the Transpose Key Signature dialog The Menus will change the key signature for all staves If you wish to change the key signature for only one staff select that staff before opening the Transpose Key Signature dialog If more than one staff is selected a check mark placed in the Just this staff box will only change the key signature for the lowest staff in the selection Move Notes If you want to transpose the pitch for notes as well as change the key signature place a check mark in the Move Notes checkbox and choose the direction the transpose operation should move the notes Move Notes will also transpose Chord symbols and Guitar Fret symbols Move Endings and Symbols Normally when you Move Notes symbols and endings are unaffected and will remain at the same vertical location in your score Checking Move Endings and Symbols adjusts these items up or down along with the notes Changing the Key Signatur
89. staff and splits both the staff and notes giving you two staves MIDI files with piano parts on a single track can be changed to a Piano Staff within MusicTime Deluxe for further editing with this feature Another use would be to separate two instruments notated on one staff into two separate staves for each instrument The Menus Split This Staff requires you to select the staff you wish to split The staff must be a single staff Piano staves cannot be split Move these notes to a new staff Two methods exist for determining what notes are moved to the new staff If the pitch selection is specified then anything below the Notes below Bb2 entered pitch will be placed onto the new staff The second method C Notes from voices uses the voicing capabilities within MusicTime Deluxe to separate Saree l g3 g4 notes For this to work correctly the voice selected should fill each Os O6 O7 Q8 measure with the correct number of beats Mowe these notes to a new staff LJ Set the clef to Bass FH Note If you revoice a section just so you can split a few notes to W Create a Piano Staff a new staff remember that changing the voice may require adding rests for all affected voices It is best to fully align playback after Cancel woruwoow E revoicing and adding any needed rests Set the Clef to Four checkboxes are available for selecting the clef to be used on the new staff Hybrid clefs or additional
90. standard time signatures C is used for 4 4 and is the same as 2 4 Since the click value can be altered the metronome could effectively give the impression of 8 8 or 4 4 time as well However the tempo applied to the meter will be based always upon a quarter note See the section on Tempo for more information Note The click amount must always divide evenly into the number of beats upper or left portion of time signature Other When the standard selections do not include the time signature desired you can define one yourself using Other MusicTime Deluxe allows up to sixteen beats per measure upper or left portion of time signature and units of 1 whole note 2 half note 4 quarter note 8 eighth note 16 sixteenth note and 32 thirty second note When defining the choice for Other the number Kier of clicks to be used will be updated to a common selection If you wish to base the click on From measure another value you can enter the number after s 3 you have finished defining the time signature W C The click however must divide evenly into the number of beats Se cher 4 Hide Meter el Click times per measure Hide Meter will simply hide the time signature Hide Meter Pickup Bar The Menus defined The time signature is still used however when calculating the correct tempo and number of beats to be applied Hide Meter can be used to create a pickup within the score
91. stems up and control command D for stems down Select the notes you want to change and apply either the shortcut keys or menu item Changing stem direction for chords will also change the tie direction See the section on Tie Notes for more information about tie directions and flipping ties control command T toggles the ties up and down Voice 1 Stem Directions Stem directions for notes in voice 1 will follow standard notation practice and be placed up or down depending on their pitch location in reference to the clef The Menus Voice 2 8 Stem Directions Voices other than voice one default to stems down except when using a combined staff such as the piano staff In a piano staff the notes in the bass clef will default to voice 5 These notes will also follow standard notation practice and set the stem direction according to the clef in use When two or more voices are used in the same measure you may need to flip the stems for one voice Most commonly some or all of the notes in voice one will have stem down directions and will need to be changed to stems up Set the voice selector to the voice you wish to affect and it will be easier to select only those notes and change their stem direction without affecting the other voices Normalize Normalize sets stems back to the default directions Tie Notes Tie Notes allows you to tie two or more notes of the same pitch together for the purpose of indicating the note is pla
92. that contains the offending triplets and re guess that section The Ignore Triplets checkbox defaults to the unchecked disabled state The setting of the Ignore Triplets checkbox is saved with preferences For more information on how Transcription Settings will affect the Guess Durations operation refer to the section on Guess Durations Notes Menu MusicTime Deluxe includes an Auto Align Playback After Transcribing check box If checked MusicTime Deluxe will align MIDI playback information to the transcribed guessed notes notated in the score If you want to keep the original MIDI data intact do not select Auto Align Playback After Transcribing Refer to the Align Playback section for more information Transcription Setup Click Setu H Create no notes Click Setup configures the choices and methods used to shorter than generate a metronome click The actual number of clicks to be played for each measure is determined by the time d J signature for each measure and the Click value set for those measures A i Ji MusicTime Deluxe allows you to specify the device to C Ignore Triplets playback the click 4uto 4lign Playback After Transcribing The settings for pitch are determined by the MIDI note number in the field Count In Pre roll When recording in real time the Bar Click plays for the number of beats indicated by the time signature in the measure in which recording is to start MIDI Click Use MIDI to
93. that some pretty amazing things are possible in MusicTime Deluxe Advanced Topics MIDI Tricks Using the MIDI tool in the Tools palette you can control many of the parameters of your synthesiz ers to tailor the sounds to a score s specific needs As an example a guitar part may consist of mostly strummed chords up to the solo When the solo is played however the same sound used when strumming may sound too thin Using a program change to select a better program for the solo just before the solo begins and then another program to return to the original guitar sound after the solo takes just a few steps For the final printing stage the text indicating the MIDI program change can be hidden using the Suow Hipz dialog and either replaced with a text box or omitted completely Controllers can add everything from subtle changes in volume to reverb effects and modulation There are options for display and printing of MIDI objects in the Suow Hipz dialog left of the staff with the MIDI playback of the trill This selects the staff throughout the score Use the Hut STAVEs item in the View menu to hide the staff Make any adjustments to layout that are needed and you re done Once you become familiar with this concept it can be used throughout your score whenever needed To add additional MIDI playback effects to other locations use SHow Staves for the section you are working on and the hide the staff again when you are through Remember
94. the Revert to Saved function explained above Tempo The tempo can be adjusted for the entire score or just a section within the score If you select the area you wish to change before opening the Tempo dialog your selection will be The Menus entered into the dialog s measure range Change Tempo If no selection has been made the measure range will default tof Duration the current location or measure 1 From to H Note All measures between the first and last measure indicated l i Val will be included in the operation S Set all Tempos to ffr The Tempo dialog defaults to changing by a percentage After Change to EE EE using the dialog once however your selections are sticky Fisco 100 les and your last operation choice will remain selected C Add In to all values Finding the Current Tempo for a Measure rep When the Tempo dialog is first opened the tempo indicated in the Set all Tempos to field 1s for the From measure in the selection range Tempo changes after this may exist but are not indicated If the measure range 1s altered within the dialog the tempo for the new range is not indicated Set all Tempos to This option changes all tempos in the selected area to the one tempo entered here If the selected measures contain different time signatures 1 e 4 4 and 6 8 each time signature will apply the new value to the beat value used Note The beat is the lower portion
95. the beaming instead of creating additional beams If this happens you can just do it again and MusicTime Deluxe will reapply the beam operation to the same selection Sub Group is applied after a group has been beamed together Sub Group will frequently require a Beam Group operation before it can be used Beam Group Beam Group is a manual operation used when you require different beaming combinations than are provided with Auto Guess Beam or Beat On Beat This can occur when using time signatures other than a simple 4 4 or when using complex groups of shorter durations Beam Group is also used when brackets are needed above tuplet groups such as half note or quarter note triplets and when beams are desired across barlines Beam Group will work only if the selected area does not contain any notes previously beamed together Beam Group only affects notes in the same voice Beam Group creates additional brackets along with beams if the selected group includes quarter half or whole notes Beam Group can include rests either within or at the end of a beamed group Using Beam Group Select the group of notes you want to beam together Previously beamed notes require you to The Menus use the Beam Group command twice The first time will unbeam anything already beamed and the second operation will beam all of the selected items together Beaming Notes Over a Barline If you make a selection that includes notes in two measures the
96. the second section can be numbered starting with page 34 Copyright Notice Copyright information is centered at the bottom of the score Six lines are provided for copyright Each line can use a different font selection Font changes are made independently from other lines Text Elements Header 1 Header 2 Footer 1 Footer 2 Title Instructions Composer Copyright Notice Font Style Times New Raman HH Bold Italic Size LO ES f Underline 2007 Gvox AED 1 Cancel i Kg Lagere MIDI Device Instrument Settings The Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog provides access to all instrument settings You may assign instruments MIDI channels to any staff to any voice from any device or bank as well as adjusting the Gain Pan and Reverb Level MusicTime Deluxe has the capabilities to use two copies of the built in synthesizer thereby doubling the number in individual MIDI channels This enables you to hear a score with full instrumentation without using multiple MIDI devices Use the staff selection to indicate which staff you would like to assign the device instrument with the The Menus staff name drop down menu Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings All Staves 4 Staff 1 j Playback Device Built In Synth 1 All Voices HH Piano Organ Acoustic Bs Strings soprano Sax Square Wave Saw Wave iano 3 Syn Calliope Fretless Bs hiffer Lead Charang Bank Appl
97. their order in the Staff Sheet window before using Extract Part For more about the Staff Sheet see the section on the Windows menu To the Top staff Auta Compress Rests O To the Botton Guto Generate File Names Text E Auto Compress Rests All Lyrics When Auto compress Rests is checked all empty measures in the score that do not include special barlines coda phrases text boxes or graphics will be compressed automatically for you The font selection for compressed rests will be the same as that specified in the Compressed Rests dialog See Compressed Rests in the Measures Menu section for more information about compressed rests within MusicTime Deluxe The extracted part is given a default name using the score name the part was extracted from and the name of the top staff selected when extracting the part Combined staves used for piano and organ notation are always extracted fully and include both or all staves for the instrument Extracting Text and Lyrics If you choose All Text Boxes in the Extract Part dialog every text box on every page will be added to the new score You may select where you would like the text boxes to appear above or below the staff of the extracted part When creating a full score or scoring parts for a section it is not unusual for various text instruc tions to be placed above the top staff only If you enable the Text from Top Staff Windows or Text from Staff 1 Mac checkbox text fro
98. this fashion only the last system in the score is affected Rather than continuing to add them to last system however MusicTime Deluxe will create new systems and pages when needed New systems are created when the number of measures in the last system equals the number of measures in the previous system That is if the last system in your score has only one measure and the system before that has three measures you can flow two measures forward before MusicTime Deluxe will generate a new system New pages are created when creating a new system would create more systems than the previous page This prevents a situation where the last page has numerous systems because you were moving measures around somewhere earlier in the score Systems per Page Systems Per Page changes how many systems appear on either the current page or the current page and all remaining pages Changing the number of systems per page will frequently change the number of pages but will not affect the number of measures in each system Set systems on page 1 to s If the number of systems for a page will not fit on a printed page the extra coc ees systems are moved onto tiles below the bottom margin of the normal D rare ive ages size page See Printing in MusicTime Deluxe for more information Cancel ok Text Elements Text Elements defines score titles headers footers page numbers dates times and copyright notices in your score Each item c
99. to Marks then click Add e Under Apply Marks select an option to determine the position of the marks 4 Under Mark to apply click the mark you want Remove To remove marks from a group of notes 1 Select the notes 2 On the Notes menu point to Marks then click Remove 3 Under Remove Marks From select an option to determine which marks to remove 4 Under Mark to apply click the mark you want 2 Do one of the following To remove all types of marks click Remove AII Marks To remove one particular mark click that mark button under Mark Types to Remove Tie Notes Tie Notes allows you to tie two or more notes of the same pitch together for the purpose of indicating the note is played only once but held for the full value of all the combined notes Tie Notes requires that you first select the notes to be tied All notes to be tied must be within the same selection If notes to be tied exist across system breaks or page breaks you can either change the number of measures in the system or select the notes you wish to tie using the shift select method of clicking on the note head See Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe for more information Notes to be tied must be the same pitch If a tie occurs over a barline accidentals will be removed from the note in the following measure after the tie has been performed but both notes must be notated the same before the tie will be allowed If you wish to apply a courtesy accidental to a tied n
100. to Saved The Revert to Saved function allows you to disregard all the edits made to a score since the last Save operation Revert to Saved is frequently used as the ultimate undo Most edits in MusicTime Deluxe can be undone using Undo in the Edit menu but only the last edit operation can be undone If you decide against a series of edits you can use Revert to Saved to discard all of your edits and start again without closing and reopening the file Of course if you choose Close before saving changes you are always asked if you want to save changes at that time If you tell MusicTime Deluxe not to save those changes you will be duplicating the Revert to Saved function The only difference is the file will remain open if you choose Revert to saved Export Since MusicTime Deluxe can also open MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files any file that can be opened in MusicTime Deluxe can be exported as any other file type available to MusicTime Deluxe This means that MusicTime Deluxe files can be exported as MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files If you would like a score to serve as the default template the blank score that opens when MusicTime Deluxe is launched you may export the desired file as Current Score Settings to Default Score Template A template file is useful for saving information such as MIDI Channel choices and program assignments for each voice and for several staves You can also customize the layout have the copyright infor
101. to check both the MIDI channels used and to mute the play state for anything you replace In some cases you may need to mute only one or two notes instead of replacing the entire measure Broken Beams Beam Group can also be used to create a beaming situation that is essentially a broken primary beam This may be needed when space considerations affect the note ranges to be indicated This unusual situation can be handled within MusicTime Deluxe if care is taken when making adjustments to beams connected to a common object In some cases it may not be possible to notate exactly what you want using Beam Group Where you want to employ more avant garde beams use the graphic tools for drawing lines Example of a broken primary beam Select and use Beam Group Adjust beam angles The order in which you adjust shared Adjust beam angles _ beams is important Select and use Beam Group again Advanced Topics MIDI Setup Mac Chapter Nine MI sire Deluxe will work immediately after installation without any special MIDI set up Both Windows and Mac contain built in software synthesizers that MusicTime Deluxe finds and connects to as a playback default However for MIDI input and more advanced uses of MIDI and MIDI devices you will need to make sure your hardware drivers are installed and operating as per the hardware s documentation MIDI Drivers and MusicTime Deluxe MusicTime Deluxe requires a MIDI driver in order t
102. to the same voice Entering the notes in all voices view will use different voices by default for each so when creating a cross staff beam you must select a specific voice before entering the notes You can find a section on cross staff beaming in Chapter 8 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Placement Add Above and Add Below determine where in relationship to the current staff the new staves will appear If you need to change the order of staves after they are added you can do so using the Staff Sheet See the section on the Staff Sheet Windows menu for more information Type Note Rhythm Tab Percussion The drop down menu for the type selection will be available only when you are adding regular staves Piano staves are standard note staves only Rhythm Staff A rhythm staff is a single line staff without key signature clef or barline indications Notes added to the rhythm staff use slashed note heads and are always placed directly on the single line indication Although a rhythm staff will play over MIDI the intended purpose for the staff is to indicate the rhythm so we recommend that you mute the staff within the Staff Sheet to avoid confusion Notes copied and pasted to a rhythm staff will still use their original pitch but will appear at the same vertical position on the rhythm staff A common use for a rhythm staff will require the staff only for the beginning of the score or for new sections You can hide the rhythm s
103. voices being edited Voicing a Real Time Recording The example above shows what our earlier example looks like when recorded in real time To change this into two voices a second voice needs to be created for the appropriate notes the missing rest added to fill the timing gap that results from the new voicing and the playback aligned First the tied notes are selected and changed to voice 2 At this point both measures are selected and ALIGN PLAYBACK is used Actually only the first measure would require alignment in this example but it is a good idea to align all of the measures involved in the edit When there are notes tied between measures both measures can be affected by the voicing operation Voices in MusicTime Deluxe As you can see voicing even simple recordings involves clearly identifying the voices within each measure and then isolating the voices After identifying the voices and selecting and changing notes that should use a different voice care must be taken to replace notes that were removed with rests and to change note durations in each voice to correct timing This can require several steps Whenever possible consider recording or importing only a single voice and then adding the second voice afterward This usually requires fewer steps than separating voices Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Advanced Topics Chapter Eight MIDI Paste IDI Paste allows you to replace a selected note re
104. within a score to their proper key when playing back For instance you could write a band arrangement with each instrument in its notated key and by setting the playback transposition of each instrument be able to playback the score at sounding pitch Another example concerns writing guitar transcriptions Since the guitar sounds an octave lower than written you need to set the playback key to Octave Lower C to hear your transcription playback in the right octave MIDI Channel Chnl When a cell in the Channel column is clicked the MIDI Device Instrument dialog will appear See MIDI Device Instrument Settings for more information earlier in this chapter Program Name The Program Name field selects a patch setting for your synthesizer The selected program or patch is one of the 128 numbers used in the MIDI protocol and the selection is sent to the synthesizer whenever playback begins from the start of the score The Program Name field has two display settings Change these settings by clicking on the Program Name or Prg at the top of the Staff Sheet The width of the column used for the program name will expand and collapse when toggling between the two display settings The Menus When expanded the Program Name column uses a text description for the currently selected program number and MIDI device The collapsed view uses only the MIDI number reference In either view the indication will be for the first voice onl
105. zero in the From field of a measure range and can be entered into the range by typing the zero key For the pickup selection to work correctly you must select only the one measure to become the pickup bar Creating A Pickup Bar Here is an example for creating a pickup measure of a one eighth note pickup leading into a score in 4 4 time Before you open the time signature dialog make sure the first measure contains the pickup note or notes that you want and is not the measure after the pickup bar If the pickup measure needs to be created use Add Measure and add one measure before measure one Select the first measure and change the time signature to be the number of beats needed for the pickup Since our example is going to use one eighth note the time signature e will require entering 1 8 in the other portion of the El dialog Put a check mark in the box next to Pickup Bar and click a OK Click 1 times per measure Set Time Signature f Hide Meter M Pickup Bar If you check both Hide Meter and Pickup Bar the time signature in both the first and second measures selected fanaa Cox The Menus will be hidden Measure numbers are only changed for the first measure in the score If the pickup bar option is removed from a measure the Hide Meter setting for the following measure will also be removed Key Signature Key signatures can be defined for either a portion of the score or for the whol
106. 54z enc above and adds a single staff with a treble clef Exit above the piano staff Single Staves The Single staves format is used for any arrangement greater than the above A maximum of 16 staves can be created Measures Per System Systems Per Page A system is a group of instruments In MusicTime Deluxe the number of instruments that appear in the Staff Sheet is one system The number of systems per page times the number of staves per system cannot be greater than 16 Note It may seem obvious but the staves will either have to be very small or the page extremely large to fit 16 staves on one page MusicTime Deluxe can accommodate any size page as defined by your page set up If you decide to only use standard paper sizes a single page in MusicTime Deluxe can consist of several tiles Refer to the section on Tiles under Printing for more information The Menus Layout Starting Template e a c E Staves create then open Wizard Windows Systems per page Voice Piana 3 part Measures per system A Chamber Orchestra Hel Choir 2 Stave SATB with Keyboard P Make a C Score Choir 2 Stave SATB Choir SATB with Organ i Concert Band _ Use Handwritten Style E Jazz Combo z Horns Jazz Combo 3 horns Jazz Combo 4 Horns DI Ducl dx vie kb e kb Brass Quintet Starting Template MusicTime Deluxe comes with over 30 templates from which you can choose MusicTime
107. Cut or copy operation is performed and replaces it Copy Undo Add Item Z Copy places a duplicate of whatever you select onto the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard You can then paste the copied notation to another area in either the Cut de X same score or another score using the Paste command Copy do C Paste ds V Clear Paste Select A SA Paste places the contents of the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard into the score Paste will not work when an area is selected To paste copied or cut data choose the Nudge Left 6 starting location for the paste operation with the arrow tool You should have a Nudge Right CH flashing insert cursor in a measure before using Paste Nudge Up 1r 88 Nudge Down 73 Autospace On While Pasting If Auto Space Preferences is on pasted notation is automatically aligned following each paste If the paste operation does not replace all of the notes in a measure non pasted notes in the same measure will also be aligned Autospace Off While Pasting If Auto Space is off MusicTime Deluxe will not use Align Spacing for the pasted area and the original spacing will be maintained If the measure width of copied data is different than the measure s into which the data is pasted the data is scaled to fit the new area This works best when complete measures are copied but will also affect paste operations for notes that do not fill the measure Note Paste operations will paste notes text lyrics and all graphic indications
108. E 78 Seiller eel UESTRE 78 Changing a Slur s Shape ccccccccseccaseecaseccececoecccsaecaeeeceeesouseseeseesesseeseeeees 78 Moving Ez E 78 So le LEE germans tent e iene er eee eee eee remem nan eee ee een ee eer eee eee eae 78 EE T N E E AAE A E E 78 LEMPO TIC GC iiio d NEED RET 78 RW o E E A A E E 19 Tempo VAIS E 19 TAINS Ol ee NE E T T 19 PNO VAN ccs T 80 Hairpins in Conductor Scores and Extracted KE CC 80 Trill and Arpeggio huele Le In CN 80 Adding a Trill Arpeggio or Wavy me 80 Adjusting Trills and Arpeggios lines eere 81 FORCING SIS TOO E 81 Vruca BEBONGE EE 81 xo A m 81 Additional Pedal Indicators ccc cc ccceeceeeeececseeeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeteees 82 Java ANODA SSO cc acest indere HDI USURIS 02 Ottava end EIERE 82 MIDI Lee CC 82 A Word About Controllers 83 Dynamics Palette eer UU EDS 84 The Marks Palettes 0 0 0 0 ccc cccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 e el EE tegt Ee 53 seacceancexesenetencaecsnencecetenccansascveesdeese see EE EE OTOES 85 Eugene MAKS EET TETTE TE TTD 86 ACCON ana MID e S 86 PAFUICUIETIONS e WWW 86 The Symbols Palette cccccccscccsceseeceeeceeeceeceeeseeeceeseeeseeeseeeaes 87 winners Nae iA Intercom T 87 COLO E 87 AGANG GOOR sser
109. ESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE YOUR LICENSE WILL THEREBY TERMINATE AUTOMATICALLY TERM The license is effective until terminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Program and related documentation together with all copies thereof This license will also terminate immediately if you fail to comply with any term or condition contained herein Upon such termination you agree to return to Lyrrus Incorporated at your own expense the Program and related documentation together with all copies and merged portions of the Program or related documentation in any form EXPORT You acknowledge that the laws and regulations of the United States may restrict the export and reexport of the Program You agree that you will not export or reexport the Program or related documentation in any form without prior written consent of Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox and appropriate United States and foreign government approval b Table of Contents No part of this manual may be copied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without the written consent of Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox Lyrrus Incor porated dba Gvox makes no warranties either express or implied with respect to this manual or with respect to the software described in this manual its quality performance merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox reserves the right to make improvements o
110. Endings From Measure I3 Fa I5 33 GK MOTE Font applies to all endings Cancel Help Second Fifth Third sixth open C2 closed The Menus many times to play each ending and what measure is played next Lock Ending Open Closed Near the bottom of the dialog are three choices which affect how the ending is displayed in the last measure Open refers to a measure ending without a line drawn on the right side of the ending Closed will draw a vertical line in the last measure enclosing the measure ending If there is an ending in the selected area already the current setting is displayed If a new ending is being defined the choice will be based upon the barline type Measures with a repeat or thick double bar on the right will be closed If the right barline is not a repeat or double bar the ending will be open Although MusicTime Deluxe will initially select either open or closed for you the selection can be changed The Lock Ending option prevents the selection of open or closed from being changed later if the barline type is changed Changing the Vertical Position of Endings The default position for endings can be changed after the ending is created A control point in the upper left corner of each ending adjusts the height of the ending The control point at the lower left sets the distance between the top staff line and where the vertical line for the ending begins Click and drag at eithe
111. FC CIS EE 158 SIemis COIN SCHON esea a E E 158 Kleige IZO E 158 dE In oe eee sore ei Gee cere eee eee essen eee 159 PR EN 159 Kine 159 LCE 159 Tie CNS arctic DT TR 160 Adjusting Ties Using the Mouse 160 Tie Defaults sssssssssssssssesseee eme e I Imm emen nene et reme etre temetsrrereme prese erro 160 Se BIS Te 160 Using the Slur Notes command E 160 Beam NOES ERR 161 Su BE dee MR 161 Beam on E 162 ele GE e e E 162 Flaten En MNT 163 E e Ee ue nee 163 E le ER den MER 164 Set Note DUPANOIMS TTC T 164 SOLIS DUIO geed 164 Changing Play Duration for Step Entered Notes 164 Changing Play Duration for Real Time and Imported Notes 164 E ale E eier EE 165 Make Chord NEE 166 Ee Ee EEN 166 EE e 166 Klee ees elle EE 167 e 167 Te E l ie Mr Tei gt RR RR 167 Make Ke EE 167 SUNSET TK 168 Revert Iohaw em ememememetemememememeremeretertreri riri rt rre enis 169 Guess Duratons mI meme nemen meme reset e rere 169 Transcribing MENON G Ec 170 Move et 170 Measures Menu 170 Add MeaSure EE 170 Delete Measure mI IIR ememetemetetetiter rtr r trees 171 Eu 171 m Table of Contents Finding the Current Tempo for a Measure n nnannannnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnennnnnnnnenrennene 172 Set all Tempos to 172 Changing by Percentage
112. Graphic information such as slurs and dynamics are unaffected by Revert to Raw and will remain in the score Use Revert to Raw when you want to undo all the changes to a section of music and start over Select a transcription value after reverting to raw data and use Guess Durations to convert the raw data into notation Guess Durations Guess Durations applies the duration value selected in Transcription Setup to the MIDI data and converts the MIDI duration and timing information into notation The accuracy of Guess Durations The Menus depends on both the recorded data and the transcription value selected Transcription Setup Guess Durations requires a selection and uses the settings in Transcrip Create no notes tion Setup shorter than MusicTime Deluxe biases the Guess Durations function to avoid J J creating unnecessary rests and notes of awkward duration values Ordinary playing usually consists of varying durations and pauses j j a between notes A literal transcription of such playing would consist of an unreadable profusion of rests double dots and needlessly complex C Ignore Triplets tied note combinations To avoid such a transcription the Guess eb e ies enema Durations function rounds off the interpreted note and rest values to within the duration amount specified in Transcription Setup The default transcription value is sixteenth notes The transcription value set in the Transcription Setup dialog can be save
113. Hoose INSTRUMENT dialog box If you click different program names the corresponding MIDI program change numbers will be transmitted in real time and you can audition different instrument sounds on your synthesizer before you click OK Changing the MIDI Volume 1 Click on the Vol heading in the Staff Sheet while the score is playing Tutorial STAFF MIDI DEvICE AND INSTRUMENT SETTINGS dialog box appears 2 Drag the volume fader to adjust the staff s volume When you have a score with multiple staves you can set individual volumes for each staff provided that the staves are assigned to different MIDI channels Please note Not all MIDI synthesizers or instrument selections respond to MIDI volume messages Consult your instrument s manual if you re not sure The Staff Sheet uses Controller 7 messages to change volume Adding Measure Numbers amp Enable Measure Numbers When you played back the score you may have heard Font tor em some measures that didn t sound correct The first of _Times B C Bold NW Italic these in measure 8 was caused by an intentionally Size 10 t Underline misplayed note in the MIDI file Before fixing it it would be a good idea to show some measure numbers Add Numbers Every 1 measure s in the score to help you locate the correct measure Each system Start with First Bar 1 Choose MEASURE NUMBERS from the Measures menu Bl First Bar is a Pickup The MEASURE NUMBERS dial
114. If a measure of 4 4 is instead defined as two measures one 7 8 and the other only 1 8 the time signatures in both measures can be hidden and the result can be an eighth note pickup into the next section Note Measure numbers are unaffected by Hide Meter operations Time Signature Reminders When the next system begins with a new time signature the previous measure will have a reminder added by default This optional reminder can be hidden from within the Show Hide dialog If the next measure s time signature 1s hidden a reminder is never used Pickup Bar The Pickup Bar checkbox performs several functions at once A pickup bar displays the time signature of the following measure instead of the selected time signature In addition the time signature in the next measure is automatically hidden and measure numbers are adjusted for the pickup indication Note First Bar is Pickup in the Measure Numbers dialog and the Pickup Bar option in the Set Time Signature dialog are connected Changing the selection in one dialog will change the option in both dialogs Special Note If the first measure is configured as a pickup bar the measure range in dialogs will be affected as well Be sure to take the pickup measure into account when calculating measure numbers A pickup measure is represented by a zero in the From field of a measure range and can be entered into the range by typing the zero key For the pickup selection to work corre
115. MIDI velocity values for notes that occur after the indication The default values are listed below but you can change those settings The optimum EN Using the Palettes settings for your synthesizer and music may vary from score to score The settings in the MIDI PLAYBACK SETTINGS dialog are therefore saved both in preferences and for each score When Send Volume Control and Change Note Velocities are selected in the MIDI PLAYBACK SETTINGS dialog all notes after the dynamic marking will be scaled to the velocity range for that mark until the next dynamic marking occurs in the score Note Only when playback starts from a point before a dynamic will the dynamic settings affect playback If playback begins in a measure after the dynamic notes will not be affected until the next dynamic in the score To add a dynamic indication select the desired mark from the palette with the pencil tool and click at the location in the score where you want the dynamic to occur You can move dynamic symbols by clicking and holding on the dynamic symbol and then dragging it to the new location using the arrow tool To delete a dynamic symbol use the eraser tool You can also select the mark with the arrow tool and use either Cut or Clear from the Edit menu or press the back space key Copy dynamics by holding the control key while dragging the graphic to a new location Note Dynamics can be edited only while working in all voices Voice or
116. Measure Zoom In Zoom Out Magnify Zoom In Go to Page Go to Page without scrolling to top Notes Palette Double whole note Whole note Half note Quarter note Eighth note Sixteenth note 32nd note 64th note 128th note Change note value without MIDI change Rest Sharp Double sharp Flat Double flat Natural Courtesy Accidental Cautionary Accidental Dot Double dot ATAT iM V n A or P Toggle or Esc LE P or A Toggle Enter Gf option is enabled Space Bar Space Bar M Z 2 Z Click Page Number Icon Click Page Number Icon 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 f n R S 8 S F 8 F N 8 N Opt while adding D 8 D MAr MA V n A or P Toggle or Esc E P or A Toggle Enter Gf option is enabled Space Bar Space Bar M Z Click Z 8 Z Click Click Page Number Icon 8 2 Click Page Number Icon 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S f n R S 8 S F 8 F N Ctrl while adding D D Shortcuts Tuplet Close All Other Palettes Layout Flow measures out of system Flow measures into system Stretch notes in a measure Adjust position of all subsequent staves systems Move all Endings Lyric Entry Hyphen between notes Hyphen within lyric word Melisma Move to next note Move to tied note Select next lyric Select previous
117. Measure 17 into Measure 16 you copied the ending quarter note rest in Measure 17 as well That rest needs to be changed to an eighth note rest and an eighth note D added to the end of the measure in the top staff Select the quarter note rest at the end of Measure 16 and use the number 4 key on your computer keyboard to change the duration to an eighth note rest Next remove the selection by clicking in any empty space in Measure 16 Select the pencil tool and an eighth note from the note palette Add an extra D note at the end of Measure 16 after the eighth note rest ALIGN PLAYBACK for that measure Beaming Notes When you open a MIDI or Master Tracks Pro file or enter notes into a Ze new blank measure the appropriate notes will be beamed automatically Auro GuEss BEAM can be turned off in the Setup menu Beamed notes are grouped according to where they fall relative to the beat You can use the BEAM Group command in the Notes menu to select and then beam the notes of your choice regardless of where they fall relative to the beat Sometimes in the course of editing a file you will need to beam notes whose durations have been changed A case in point is the group consisting of an eighth note chord an eighth note rest and an eighth note in the new Measure 16 1 Using the arrow pointer draw a selection rectangle around the group to be beamed Zi From the Beam Notes sub menu in the Notes menu choose BEAM GROUP Tuto
118. Piano default Piano vocal Single staves Piano Staff A Piano staff in MusicTime Deluxe is a special combined staff that appears as only one item in the Staff Sheet A piano staff 1s the only staff type that allows cross staff beaming Piano Vocal Staff A Piano Vocal score uses the Piano staff described above and adds a New e 32 N single staff with a treble clef above the piano staff Mew Default Score N Open ob Single Staves Open Recent The Single staves format is used for any arrangement greater than the Close 3g W above A maximum of 128 staves can be created 2 Save db Save As 1t 365 Measures Per System Systems Per Page Revert op A system is a group of instruments In MusicTime Deluxe the Export p number of instruments that appear in the Staff Sheet is one system The number of systems per page times the number of staves per Extract Part system cannot be greater than 128 DOTT Me TH Note It may seem obvious but the staves will either have to be very Page Setup 432p small or the page extremely large to fit 128 staves on one page Print gpp MusicTime Deluxe can accommodate any size page as defined by your page set up If you decide to only use standard paper sizes a single page in MusicTime Deluxe can consist of several tiles Refer to the section on Tiles under Printing for more information Starting Template MusicTime Deluxe comes with over 30 templates from which you c
119. R e 65 h ls Ve co 66 Changing Durations For Notes PAG OGY TIT E 66 Real Time MIDI Note Durations ccc ccc ccc ccc eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeseseeeeess 66 eeler EE 66 Courtesy FCCIGSIMIANS E 67 TheCerealete ne 67 The Graphics Palette eeeeseeseenne 68 J 2buco 68 USIN iNe LV VIG WOO TC 69 PAORO KR 69 Advancing to the next note NN 69 Tied Notes and IGS EN 69 Adding the Space Character to a we 69 Creating Hyphens Between Words 70 Adding VIC NG IVA EE 70 Adding Additional Lyric Lines ccccccccceccceeeceeec cece eeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeeeaees 70 FCIAC S EE 70 Moving Through the Lyric Une 70 Changing Lyric FONIS RITE TREE 70 Lyre Enty WS NETT 71 usu Moo E 11 creating a Tox e 71 Changing Fonts Within a Text Box 72 WTS TEE MON 72 MOVNO Gt OX BOX spoar erran nng Ene EE EEA EOE TEN A eteostare 2 Table of Contents ROSIZING Text IOXOS ccn eade seb xta ae IR AMO ESL E Tan AL Anaceastauieateaadsancuseeeeeten 12 Text Boxes and EE L Te Lee e Le E 72 Adding a Ch rd 5 i110 EE 73 M ving Chord Eros 121010 E 73 FONE AN SMV NN RE TE OE 14 Using Chord Parsing EE 14 Tae PIU TEE Tf The Tools Halette cc ccccccccecceceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegeeeegeeneeeeeeeeees Tf o E E are pr ae cesta ce ecg vines ot T Ri are iei D TNNT T UU
120. Staf LING esseere t iosavd dict E ipe meu dist constetgecteoua demesne 194 Left Barline Single Giaves 194 Viller 194 on E Tei E E 195 ING SIC ACUI RR MR 195 S0 195 Ricci NN 195 Show Control Points NET o TT TT 195 Use Handwritten Music EE eege eege 195 SO ACING DES cee seeece m Umm 196 Cnange Score 8 C10 o iM PN EE 196 EE IT 197 Sie ee rc E 197 mile AVES NETT TT 197 v Table of Contents Linear View 197 Hide Fioating lte e 197 Windows Menu WE 198 Wis NT TS 198 Open EE 198 CIOSBAILTPSIell eS ood ordo RET PUN DRE Ee 198 eji MEE TQ UU UMS 198 dr eT E P O 198 vo 199 Pup HOC 199 wl 199 me 199 MIDI Channel CANI N 199 Program NS reiten ertet ge ene sumed nannan Eu IUe sun rad DIE 199 Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings esses 200 IJeVICe un 200 Assigning Different Programs for Each Voice 200 ee UON WE 201 The Choose Program alogge 201 belles IRIS CNET 201 enean MERE 201 Changing the Staff Sheet Order 201 sy isieriromiuiero 202 Playing the Keyboard MORTE Tm 202 GS
121. The Easy Way to Write Play and Print Music User Manual Version 4 for Mac and Windows Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox PROGRAM LIMITED USE LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE INSTALLING THE INCLUDED SOFTWARE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THEM YOU SHOULD PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE UN INSTALLED AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED LICENSE Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox has developed and provides the computer software program contained on this CD ROM the Program and licenses its use You assume responsibility for the selection of the Program to achieve your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Program a Permissible Uses i Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox hereby grants you a personal non transferable and non exclusive right and license to use the Program under the terms stated in this Agreement Title and ownership of the Program and the related documentation remain in LyrrusIncorporated ii You may use the Program only on computers that you exclusively use iii You may not transfer or assign the Program or this license to any other person without the prior written consent of Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox iv You acknowledge that you are receiving only a LIMITED LICENSE to use the Program and related documentation and that Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox
122. The MIDI program and channel settings are made in the Staff Sheet To play the graphic keyboard from your computer s keyboard you must first enable QWERTY note entry mode Click the checkbox labeled QWERTY Keyboard Note Entry in the lower left corner of the Keyboard window The lights on the little keyboard icon turn green and QWERTY note entry mode is enabled The illustration shows the QWERTY keys you can play and their corresponding notes Input notes in step time or real time just as you would with a MIDI keyboard You can even use the QWERTY keyboard to parse chords See Chord Parsing in the chapter Using the Palettes Note When recording in real time from the QWERTY keyboard turn Follow Playback off in the Setup menu for the best results Chords As you may already have noticed you can t enter chords with your mouse You can play chords on your QWERTY keyboard but the number of notes may be limited with certain key combina tions There is however a simple method for step entering chords Hold the shift key and click on the notes that make up the chord When you release the shift key the notes will be scored as a chord You can also use the shift key to enter chords from your QWERTY keyboard Changing the Octave You can click any of the keys in the Keyboard window with your mouse but if you re using the QWERTY keyboard your range is limited to an octave and a fourth from C to the F in the
123. Toolbar Setup Open Scores At the bottom of the Windows menu is a list of all new and currently open songs in MusicTime Deluxe A check mark will appear next to the active song MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files before they are saved as MusicTime Deluxe files have the words MIDI File or MTPro File added to the end of their file name This indicates that the notation information has not been saved in an MusicTime Deluxe file Setup Menu Click On Off To hear a metronome click you can toggle the state on or off from the menu or use the shortcut combination of control command F The Menus For more about the click function refer to the previous section Follow Playback When Follow Playback is selected an arrow head appears above the measure currently playing back The score scrolls as it plays In page view the playback arrow centers the page while scrolling keeping the current staff andmeasure in view Before starting playback place the arrow pointer in the measure and staff where you want playback to begin You can use the Fit Width item in the Zoom Tool menu to avoid horizontal scrolling during playback The Follow Playback status is saved in preferences The Auto Space function will beep if you attempt to add a note or rest to a measure that is full Auto Space defaults to on If you don t want MusicTime Deluxe to automatically space the notation choose Auto Space again to remove the check mark A
124. Transpose dialog can raise or lower pitches three octaves in either direction If you need a transposition greater than this use the Change Pitch Transpose function a second time The transpose amount is indicated with the transpose direction the interval name and quality the number of half steps is calculated for you Use the pop up menus to the desired interval and select the choice by highlighting the name Click OK Change Pitch Transpose changes the key signature if desired If you would also like to change key signatures to the transposed amount check the Transpose Key Signature box Change Pitch Transpose removes courtesy accidentals and enharmonics and can apply standard defaults or Simplified Accidentals see Simplified Enharmonics for the new pitches Change Pitch Transpose also transposes any chord symbols when Transpose Chord Symbols is checked The Menus To change the playback of notes without changing their display use the Key function Change Pitch Transpose in the Staff Sheet See the section on the Staff Direction factnm Cary Sheet Windows menu for more information Raise Within an Octave 2nd Major Perfect 2 half steps M Transpose Key Signatures Change Duration W Transpose Chord Symbols Simplify Accidentals The Change Durations dialog can alter the gt ok display and playback of notation in your score l Change Durations requires a selection Set Note D
125. accidentals for the current key signature there are instances where your music may require changing the accidentals In the key of C for instance the correct accidental depends on several factors which MusicTime Deluxe cannot know about The Menus Notes which do not have an accidental attached will not be affected when changing to flats or sharps Enharmonics The term enharmonic describes two pitches that are notated differently but are still played and sounded the same In practice this is not always true since some instruments can generate slightly different tunings for a pitch depending upon how the pitch is created but in general and always for MIDI the enharmonic spelling for a pitch is just another way to describe the same pitch An example would be F flat and E Every note has an enharmonic equivalent The actual spelling for the enharmonic depends on the key signature Most commonly the enharmonic function helps avoid crowded chord clusters with excessive or confusing accidental indications To change a single note in a chord we recommend that you select the note using the shift click select method see Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe Simplify Accidentals Simplifying accidentals changes the accidentals to best fit the key while removing double sharps and double flats Stems direction Although a menu item has been provided for changing stem direction we recommend that you learn the shortcut eq
126. ace ON you will be prevented from entering more than the full beat count for the measure Since grace notes are standard notes before you convert them to grace notes you have to be able to add them to the measure The percentage amount entered for Scale duration by determines how long the grace note will be played This value is applied to the current duration of the note before it is changed to a grace The Menus note That is changing a half note to a grace note will indicate the grace as an eighth note but if the duration is scaled to play at 50 the note will be played for the duration of a quarter note When Play before the beat has been selected the original note duration combined with the scaled amount will also determine at what time in the measure the note is to be played As an example place two eighth notes into the beginning of a measure Select the second eighth note convert it to a grace note with a duration of 25 and set it to play before the beat When this combination is played the grace note s duration will be played as a thirty second 25 of an eighth note and the note will start playing starting a thirty second sooner than where it occurs in the measure If the play duration was set to 50 for this example the note would play for the duration of a sixteenth half of the original duration and also start playing a sixteenth before its beat location Note Grace notes cannot borrow time from notes or rests that do
127. ack Repeat barlines combined with measure endings will determine how repeat bars are interpreted during playback Used without an ending or coda phrase see Endings and Coda Phrases the next measure played after a right repeat bar will be the previous measure which has a left repeat bar If no left repeat The Menus Custom Text Box bar can be found playback will begin at measure one again After a repeat bar has been played once in a song without stopping the repeat will be ignored the next time that bar is played When repeats are used with the Endings and Coda Phrases settings the next measure played will depend on the settings selected from within those dialogs Barline Types will also affect the automatic Compress Rests function when extracting parts See Compress Rests and Extract Parts for more information Endings The Endings dialog enters measure endings within the score Measure endings can be interpreted during playback and MusicTime Deluxe will support up to six endings for playback Additional endings can be defined using text boxes but will not be used during playback Barline Types Selection Apply to Range of Measures From Measure I to M ES Apply to Each Measure in Range CO Apply to Selected Measures Play Repeats Left Style EEE Right Style aag Endings are easiest to define if the measures are pre selected before opening the Measure Endings dialog but the
128. acted part is given a default name using the f Cancel score name the part was extracted from and the name of the top staff selected when extracting the part Combined staves used for piano and organ notation are always extracted fully and include both or all staves for the instrument Extracting Text and Lyrics If you choose All Text Boxes in the Extract Part dialog every text box on every page will be added to the new score You may select where you would like the text boxes to appear above or below the staff of the extracted part When creating a full score or scoring parts for a section it is not unusual for various text instruc tions to be placed above the top staff only Ifyou Page Setup enable the Text from Top Staff Windows or Text D is T from Staff 1 Mac checkbox text from the Top Settings Page Attributes 27 Staff will be copied to the extracted part Format for Any Printer ES Print and Print Selection Paper Size US Letter 8 50 by 11 00 inches The File Menu will normally display the standard Print option but MusicTime Deluxe will change the wording Orientation if a selection has been made use the arrow tool to highlight an area on a page When an area has been selected the File menu will say Print Selection Scale Page Setup _ Settings Page Attributes J Page Setup Format for Any Printer TR After selecting Page Setup from the File menu you will For more on
129. added In general when entering two voices it is easiest to first enter all the notes needed for voice one Next select the measure and use control command U or select Stems Up from the Notes Menu to flip all of the voice one notes to stems up Then set the voice selector to voice 2 and proceed with entering the next voice Changing the Voice Selector to View Separate Voices Using the voice selector to select first voice one and then voice two allows the notes assigned to each voice to be clearly seen This is how our example appears when the voice selector is set for voice one only What Happens If Don t Use Different Voices The previous example cannot be properly created in MusicTime Deluxe without using two voices An attempt to add a whole note in voice one after adding the quarter notes and rest would not achieve the same result If you try to add a whole note with Auro SPACE on it would either be ignored or added to the closest note forming a chord When a note joins another note the duration will change to the duration used for the note previously entered Even if Auro Srace is disabled you might succeed in adding a whole note in voice one after adding the quarter notes and rest in voice one but Voices in MusicTime Deluxe the playback would be incorrect For MusicTime Deluxe to perform and align a measure with more than one voice each voice must be properly entered Each voice should comple
130. alues may require several attempts In addition the measures following the change will probably need to be selected and the correct tempo entered If you want to create an isolated and dramatic change in tempo for a single note within or at the end of a measure consider isolating the note within its own measure To create the illusion that the note belongs to the same measure as other notes the barlines can be hidden Time signatures must also be defined to account for the measure changes but these can also be hidden The only drawback to such a solution is that the measure numbers will be incorrect Here is the same example shown two different ways The one on the left has the time signatures and barline hidden The example on the right shows you how the measures look when the time signatures and barline are shown With the half note isolated within its own measure changing the duration for the fermata becomes a simple matter of changing the tempo for only that measure Hiding barlines also can be used for difficult notation examples such as the one below Here is the same example with barlines and time signatures showing Examples such as this require patience to create and are not always possible Fortunately the same example can also be created without all of the hidden barlines and time signatures if you are willing to hand space the notation and sacrifice MIDI Playback In any event these examples are provided only to show you
131. ame voice for notes in both staves For instance to beam an eighth note on the treble staff to another eighth on the bass clef you must enter or change both notes to the same voice Entering the notes in all voices view will use different voices by default for each so when creating a cross staff beam you must select a specific voice before entering the notes You can find a section on cross staff beaming in Chapter 8 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Placement Add Above and Add Below determine where in relationship to the current staff the new staves will appear If you need to change the order of staves after they are added you can do so using the Staff Sheet See the section on the Staff Sheet Windows menu for more information Delete Staff When a staff is no longer needed for the entire score you can use Delete Staff to completely remove the staff Delete Staff requires a selection All selected staves will be removed Caution Delete Staff is NOT UNDOABLE All notation on the staves is deleted along with the staff or staves themselves If you are working on a score with several instruments and you wish to hide instruments for a section when they are not playing use Hide Staves and not Delete Staff The Hide Staves command does not remove the staff from the score but simply hides it for the selected system Delete Staff completely removes the staff from the entire score Split This Staff Split This Staff takes an existing
132. an choose MusicTime The Menus Deluxe also lets you create your own personalized templates to put in the Starting Template window To add your personal templates simply create a score with the information you know want in it composer name copyright MIDI settings etc and Export it as a Score Template Alternately you may save the file to user gt library gt applicationsupport gt GVOX gt Templates and they will appear in the Starting Template window Conversely if you would like to remove any templates from the Starting Template window remove those templates from the same location as stated above Piano Voice Piano Brass Quintet Choir 2 Stave SATB with Keyboard Choir 2 Stave SATB Choir SATB with Organ Jazz Combo 2 Horns Jazz Combo 3 horns Jazz Combo 4 Horns Jazz Piano Quintet Jazz Piano Trio Jazz Quartet Lead Sheet R amp B Band Rock Band with Horns Rock Group Salsa Band String Orchestra with Piano String Orchestra String Quartet 7 Make a C Score MusicTime Deluxe saves the templates as transposed scores with all key transpositions and playback adjustments ready to go However if you would rather work with a C score check this box and all playback transpositions will be removed so that every instrument will sound as written Create then open using Wizard Windows MusicTime Deluxe will take you through all the windows needed to completely set up a score These windows inclu
133. an use a different font and items that contain several lines such as the Title can have different fonts defined for each line Score Titles Three lines are provided for score titles Text is automatically centered and appears only on the first page The title section can use a different font selection for each of the three available lines but the first line is special Font changes applied to the first line automatically apply the same font selection to the second and third lines whenever the first line is changed This provides a shortcut to change the title section quickly Instructions The Menus Text Elements el itle Instructions Composer Header 1 Header 2 Footer 1 Footer 2 Score Title Center Font Style Times New Roman HH W Bold italic Size 36 E f Underline Instructions appear on the left side and are left justified for the longest line but center justified in re lationship to each other Three lines are provided and each line can have its own font selection Font selections act independently of other lines Instructions appear on the first page only The instructions section can be used for indicating a tempo or style additional composer information or anything desired Text Elements Title Instructions Composer Headerl Header 2 Footer 1 Footer Instructions Left Title Font Style Times New Roman HH f Bold W Italic Size 10 HH f Underline Instructions
134. and use the mouse Chord Parsing should not be confused with analyzing what you have played and creating a chord guess for you As yet MusicTime Deluxe does not have such a function Chord Parsing requires using the arrow tool to select notes or chords before playing the desired chord symbol spelling The actual notes to play for each chord possibility are included in an MusicTime Deluxe file called Chord Parsing The examples are all in the same key but can be transposed to different keys for all possibilities Using Chord Parsing The basic steps to enter the chord symbols requires first selecting either the C or Fretboard selection in the Graphics palette This will determine whether text or both text and guitar frets are entered After selecting the chord type select the arrow tool and click once in the beginning of the measure where you would like to begin adding chords The insertion cursor appears where you clicked Press the gt key Windows or command c amp Mac The note or rest immediately to the right of the insertion cursor will be selected At this point playing one of the Chord Parsing examples on a MIDI Keyboard connected to MusicTime Deluxe will enter the chord spelling indicated in the parsing examples For example playing a middle C along with the Bb above it would yield a C7 chord symbol as would playing the full C7 chord If the selected note is not at the horizontal position desired for the chord
135. angle of Arpeggios after you add them to a score Click and drag either control point to adjust an arpeggio or wavy line indication To move a trill or arpeggio indication without adjusting the length or angle click on the graphic at any location other than a control point and drag to the new location All graphic items can be copied while dragging if you hold the control option key before dragging the object Parenthesis Tool lim The parenthesis tool has no specific function Use it to enclose text a tempo indication a musical phrase or for whatever you want Many musicians use parenthesis to indicate a section that has been made tacet for them Select the parenthesis and move the pointer to the left of the item you want to surround Click hold and drag from upper left to lower right Vertical Bracket The vertical bracket is frequently used to indicate that notes in a chord spanning more than an octave are still played with the same hand Enter vertical brackets with a click and drag operation Adjust their length by dragging a control point Vertical brackets can be moved by dragging anywhere on the indication except a control point Hold down the shift key to create a right facing bracket MIDI Playback Settings Dynamics Ivi Play Pedal Markings E Play Slurs Velocity Ranges 31 P e d a PPP E Play Hairpins T PP es 9 Ramp to Ending Dynamic The most commonly indicates that the damper or j re
136. argest EE These numbers correspond to 4 different point sizes Cancel Co Staff Size Point Size l 16 2 20 3 24 4 36 3 Move the slider for staff size 2 4 Click OK The on screen display changes to reflect the newly chosen font size Before you proceed set the staff size back to 3 In the next section you ll explore another option for getting more music on a page Reducing the Music There is another way to make optimum use of the page you can print at a reduction This has two distinct advantages It gives you more room to work with and the size of the music does not change on the screen 1 From the File menu choose Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box appears 2 Enter the number 80 in the text box labeled Enlarge or Reduce Score By Windows or Scale Mac In general a reduction value of 75 to 80 percent works well with the staff size set to 3 3 Click OK The notes and other objects in the Score window remain the same size but the apparent size of the Tutorial page increases Moving Staves When you initially created the piano staff you probably noticed that the spacing between staves was more than you might want In fact there is much more space than there needs to be between most of the staves One of the great things about MusicTime Deluxe 1s that it allows you to drag just about any object you can get your mouse on including staves The spacing in the first system looks pretty goo
137. as slurs and dynamics are unaffected by Revert to Raw and will remain in the score Use Revert to Raw when you want to undo all the changes to a section of music and start over Select a transcription value after reverting to raw data and use Guess Durations to convert the raw data into notation Guess Durations The Menus Guess Durations applies the duration value selected in Transcription Setup to the MIDI data and converts the MIDI duration and timing information into notation The accuracy of Guess Durations depends on both the recorded data and the transcription value selected Guess Durations requires a selection and uses the settings in Transcription Setup MusicTime Deluxe biases the Guess Durations function to avoid creating unnecessary rests and notes of awkward duration values Ordinary playing usually consists of varying durations and pauses between notes A literal transcription of such playing would consist of an unreadable profusion of rests double dots and needlessly complex tied note combinations To avoid such a transcription the Guess Durations function rounds off the interpreted note and rest values to within the duration amount specified in Transcription Setup The default transcription value is sixteenth notes The tran scription value set in the Transcription Setup dialog can be saved in preferences If Auto Guess Beam is enabled in the Setup menu the Guess Durations operation and the current transcription option wil
138. asure Changing the Time Signature 1 Select the first measure So far you ve seen how to select a staff in a system click to the left of the staff and how to select a staff throughout an entire piece double click to the left of the staff To select an entire measure double click in a blank space in the measure that is an area with no notes or rests The measure Tutorial will become highlighted to show the measure is selected Set Time Signature 2 With the curser in the first measure choose Time E US I to 1 SIGNATURE from the Measures menu The Ser TIME SIGNATURE dialog box appears The f lected from M E mum une A iHe EH the dialog Click 1 times per measure 3 Click the radio button labeled OTHER Several commonly used time signatures are Hide Meter _ Pickup Bar displayed as buttons in the SET TIME SIGNATURE dialog box OTHER allows you to create additional time signatures 4 Enter the number 1 in the upper text box and an 8 in the lower text box next to OTHER This will set the time signature of the first measure to 1 8 exactly enough for the pickup bar and no more 5 Click OK You will now have a Time Signature in the first measure of 1 8 and a Time Signature in the second measure of 6 8 This is not precisely what you need but we had you click OK to better demonstrate how the option for Pickup Bar affects a Time Signature change in MusicTime Deluxe Assigning a Measure to be a P
139. asures if you saved the score while the deleted measures were complete and you discard all recent edits Revert to Saved will retrieve the last saved version of your file If you select the measures you wish to delete before opening the Delete Measure dialog the range of measures selected will automatically appear in the dialog The range to be deleted can be redefined by changing any of the numbers within the dialog If no selection was in effect the dialog will default to one measure Caution MusicTime Deluxe does not allow REVERS you to delete discontinuous measures That is if you select only measures 1 and 5 the PENES NIE to 2 ES measure range will be 1 through 5 and Delete ts Measure will also delete measures 2 3 and 4 which totals measures Note If you want to delete all the measures Fram all staves from the From measure to the last measure C Only from Staff of your piece click on the arrow located to the right of the To box The last measure NOT LINDOABLE in the score appears in the To box Indicate whether you want to delete measures from all staves or just the currently displayed staff by clicking the applicable radio button If you want to change the currently displayed staff number to another staff number click twice in the box to highlight it and then type the desired staff number Remember Delete Measure is not undoable Once deleted measures are gone unless you can use
140. ates not only the selected symbol but also that you are in pencil entry mode 3 Move the bass clef pointer over the treble clef in the first measure of Johnny mid and click The clef will change throughout the score and notes will be changed new staff positions to match the change in clef You can change the clef at any point within your score by clicking at the location where you want to indicate the change Revert To Saved Before continuing with the tutorial we need to restore the original clef and return our score to how it looked after you first opened it You could click the treble clef icon in the Notes palette and change the clef in the first measure back to the original treble clef but if you experimented with the clef tool and did this you ll need to erase those clefs as well The simple way to discard all of the changes made since opening the file is to select REvERT To SAVED from the File Menu 1 Select Revert To Savep from the file menu Tutorial MusicTime Deluxe will ask you if you wish to Discard all changes to the current score Click the Yes button MusicTime Deluxe will open guess and beam Johnny mid again Many operations in MusicTime Deluxe have an undo option but Revert To Saven allows you to discard many edit operations and restart with the last saved version Save your scores after making significant changes and use Revert To Saven to restore your file to those saved versi
141. aves in a score EE f From all staves Delete Measure is NOT UNDOABLE If you delete measures you meant F Only from staf 1 to keep you can only regain those measures if you saved the score while the e Y Ee deleted measures were complete and you discard all recent edits Revert to 000 Saved will retrieve the last saved version of your file If you select the measures you wish to delete before opening the Delete Measure dialog the range of measures selected will automatically appear in the dialog The range to be deleted can be redefined by changing any of the numbers within the dialog If no selection was in effect the dialog will default to one measure Caution MusicTime Deluxe does not allow you to delete discontinuous measures That is if you select only measures 1 and 5 the measure range will be 1 through 5 and Delete Measure will also delete measures 2 3 and 4 Add 1 l measure s before B measure 16 f On all staves C5 Only on staff 1 Note If you want to delete all the measures from the From measure to the last measure of your piece click on the arrow located to the right of the To box The last measure in the score appears in the ER To box Vd Indicate whether you want to delete measures from all staves or just the currently displayed staff by clicking the applicable radio button If you want to change the currently displayed staff number to another staff number click t
142. ber is optional and hidden by default Enable Start with First Bar if you want a number over the first Case 7 measure When the first measure of your score is a pickup measure click the First Bar is a Pickup checkbox The first measure will not have a number and the second measure in the score will be called measure one Note The First Bar is a Pickup selection will affect the time signature settings for the first measure as well Refer to the section on Time Signature for more information If the first measure is already configured as a pickup bar the measure range in dialogs will be affected A pickup measure will be represented with a dash in the From field of a measure range If you would like the measure numbers to appear in a box click Enclose Numbers in a Box The starting number can be offset by either a positive or negative number of measures using the Number Offset box An example on how to use this would be in the case of a 4 measure introduc tion where you would like measure 1 to be after the introduction Place 4 in the box and measure 5 becomes measure 1 MusicTime Deluxe allows you to indicate whether you want your measure numbers to appear above or below the measures The default is zero spaces above the measure Any number from 1 15 can be used Align Playback Align Playback changes the MIDI start times for notes within the selected area to exactly match the screen representation Align Playback can be
143. c indications and marks The hairpin tool always enters the hairpins along the horizontal If you need to add a vertical hairpin or wedge you should construct the graphic using the line tool in the Graphics palette Vertical graphically drawn hairpins do not affect playback Hairpins in Conductor Scores and Extracted Parts It is not uncommon for a single hairpin to indicate a crescendo or decrescendo intended for an entire group of instruments In a conductor s version of a score one hairpin at the top of the string section would most likely imply the entire string section should begin changing volume Like all graphics in MusicTime Deluxe hairpins are associated with a single measure and staff While one hairpin in a conductor s score can be sufficient for the conductor take care to copy the hairpin to each part before using the ExrRAcT PART command Copy the hairpin graphic by holding control option while dragging the hairpin to each staff Then save a new version of the file for use it when extracting parts and the original conductor s score can be printed without the added graphics dne 3 When using Hairpins to change MIDI playback the same rule applies and only the staff the hairpin 1s attached to will receive the change in MIDI Velocities Again you can either copy the hairpin to all other staves requiring the change or you could use the CHANGE VELociry dialog to select the data and manually change the note velocities w
144. c line To begin entering lyrics select the lyric tool and click on the head of the note to receive the first lyric A flashing insert point appears under the selected note If the insert point needs to be adjusted vertically to avoid colliding with that note or others in the same system drag the vertical adjustment arrow on the left as needed While adjusting the vertical placement arrow a horizontal reference line appears All lyric lines created for the current system are adjusted together After adjusting the vertical placement for the line you will need to reselect the starting note for your lyric Advancing to the next note Once you have chosen the starting note and the flashing insert point appears below the selected note you can add your first lyric To advance to the next note in the measure press the space bar The insert cursor will advance to the next note event Tied Notes and lyrics Tied Notes will be skipped If you wish to advance to a tied note hold the shift key while typing a space Note MusicTime Deluxe treats chords as single events but if two voices are used in a measure the cursor advances to the next note in the second voice and may not appear to move forward This only happens when adding lyrics for measures containing multiple voices To skip a note press the space bar again Adding the Space Character to a Lyric Since the space bar normally advances to the next note MusicTime Deluxe pr
145. can be moved and adjusted Drag the upper left corner to adjust the height Drag the lower left end to adjust the length of the sides If the control points are showing the control point on the right end looks like a small arrow head Click on it to open and close the bracket You can also drag the text You can adjust any of these parameters for two or more endings on a page simultaneously Simply hold the control win option mac key and adjust one of the endings The other endings will be adjusted accordingly This comes In handy if you have adjusted the height of one bracket and are having trouble getting the other brackets lined up Hold the control win option mac key and drag one of the brackets to the desired position The other brackets will automatically align with it Laying Out The Music You have now entered and edited a complete albeit one page piano score Everything that anyone would need to play this piece is there in the Score window All that remains to do is to make it presentable so that you can print it out The first thing that you need to do is determine the printable area of the page If the page margins are not already showing in the Score window open the Suow Hipsz dialog box View menu and click the PAGE Marains checkbox to display them The width of the margins is set in the Page Setup dialog File menu The PniNTER DEFAULT setting should work for most printers but you might want to specify an e
146. ces added by default but these can be removed if you desire Connect Staves Bracket The Bracket or Accolade is commonly used to connect chamber or choral music or to connect instruments in the same family for orchestral arrangements To add either brace or bracket or to break barlines for selected L Cancel staves check the appropriate box To remove one of these indications click in the box again to clear the check mark The Connect Staves dialog will display any existing braces brackets or a broken barline state for your selection by checking the appropriate box Center Staves Center Staves moves all the staves regardless of the vertical spacing within each system to equidistant positions on the page If the number of staves does not fit all extra staves are moved to additional tiles Caution Center Staves is NOT UNDOABLE Center Staves is a quick and easy method to redefine the page layout After adding or deleting staves in your score or when changing the page reduction amount you can use Center Staves to establish a basic layout that can be further edited as needed See Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe for more information about adjusting the page layout for staves and systems Center Systems Center Systems is similar to Center Staves but adjusts only the distance between each system Within each system the spacing between staves 1s maintained Caution Center Systems is NOT UNDOABLE Center Systems
147. change and then selecting the new font size or style to be applied The Text Menu The Text menu provides access to the Font dialog to select a font size and style for the text The Text menu also contains three choices for text alignment Left Middle and Right A check mark appears next to the current choice Moving a Text Box You can drag Text boxes to new locations by clicking and dragging with the arrow tool on any area within a text box To avoid moving text boxes inadvertently we recommend that the text box be no larger than the size needed oe ES box with _ control Resizing Text Boxes points showing To resize a previously created text box make sure that control points are showing Turn on control points from within the SHow Hibe dialog View menu Control points for text boxes exist at each of the four corners of the text box Drag any of the four control points with the arrow tool to adjust the height and or width of the text box Text within the box automatically adjusts to fit the new box size Text that isn t showing in a text box will not be printed Text Boxes and Measures When measure widths are changed in MusicTime Deluxe text boxes also change in width and may need adjustment Text boxes might need to be adjusted if you apply a page reduction or enlargement to the score The Chord Tools The letter C and the Fretboard graphic in the Graphics palette let you enter chord spellings using
148. changes are unaffected The Menus MusicTime Deluxe allows a maximum tempo value of 400 beats per minute The minimum is 1 Time Signature Time signatures are used to indicate how many beats are in each measure and what note value is used for each beat MusicTime Deluxe can define one time signature per measure as often as needed Measures and pages added to the score use the last time signature defined The time signature determines how many notes MusicTime Deluxe will play for each measure but it is possible to both hide the time signature and enter more notes than can be played if Auto Space is off If you select the area you wish to change before opening the Time Signature dialog your selection will be entered into the dialog s measure range If no selection has been made the measure range will default to the current location or Measure 1 Note All measures between the first and last measure indicated will be included in the operation When the Time Signature dialog is first opened the time signature indicated is for the measure number that appears in the From box of the measure range If the measure range is altered within the dialog the time signature for the new range is not indicated Click the arrow to the right of the measure range to enter the last measure in your score in the to box You can use this to select to the end without knowing how many measures currently exist MusicTime Deluxe includes two
149. city The default velocity for mouse entered notation 1s 64 Step Entry uses the velocity sent from your MIDI instrument for each note as does real time recording The velocity ranges from 0 to 127 Higher values will be interpreted by the synthesizer increasing the volume for a note but the actual response depends upon the synthesizer and the current sound or program selection Assuming velocity is affecting volume entering a number close to the maximum will make almost all accented notes play as loud as possible A lower value will retain more of the original dynamics and add only a slight emphasis when applied Note To really control the effect of Marks you should also learn how to use the Change Velocity option under the Notes menu or hold down Shift and Command and click on the note head to change the velocity of that note A better understanding of how the various levels of velocity are going to be interpreted by your synthesizer will give you greater control over your score s MIDI playback Articulations and MIDI The staccato and legato articulations use a percentage value to change a note s duration This percentage is applied to the note s duration as it appears in your score and not to the duration with which it is currently being played The duration of the underlying MIDI data could be slightly MEN Using the Palettes different than what is displayed if you recorded in real time and guessed the durations or even
150. ck into standard F P cancel measures select only the measure with the Settings a indication l Compressed Rest Fills B E of measure Note Both options in the Compressed Rests Play Them dialog compress and expand will be grayed out if your selection contains either notes or more than one measure with a compressed rest The section being compressed is for ALL staves If there are notes on any staves even hidden staves the compressed rest function cannot be used MOTE settings apply to ALL compressed rests When measures that can be compressed or expanded are properly selected the Compressed Rests dialog will automatically select the appropriate option and tell you how many measures the operation affects The Horizontal line drawn within the measure defaults to filling 80 of the measure Enter any percentage between and 100 to change the appearance 100 will draw the line from the left barline to the right barline and completely fill the measure Font choices affect all compressed rests within the score Measure numbers always update for compressed rests If Play Them is checked the full number of measures represented by each compressed rest will be played Think carefully about using this option as you may not care to hear several measures of nothing unless you are rehearsing Note When compressed rests are created with the Compressed Rests dialog barline types text boxes and other symbols within the selection
151. ck on the button to the right of the number range arrow to double barline No double barline Just delete the current Key Signature C C CJ Just this staff Move Notes Up E Move Endings and Symbols D UO 3 Click on the Bb g button The Key Signature dialog is set up in the Circle of Fifths l e Starting from the top and going clockwise each button adds a sharp Going counter clockwise each button adds a flat The key signature will be displayed in the center of the circle This dialog provides you with several other options including the ability to transpose the notes in accord with the key change In this instance you know the pitches are correct so you just want to set the key For this tutorial change only the key signature Additional information about the Key Signature dialog can be found in The Menus chapter of this manual Tutorial 4 Click OK The piano staff is now displayed in the key of G minor Creating a Pickup Bar Anacrusis If you ve scanned the score you may have noticed that something important is missing the first note The first note was left out intentionally to demonstrate how to create a pickup bar The word when in When Johnny Comes Marching Home begins the song but is placed into a measure of its own with a single beat This measure is commonly called a pickup bar and requires some extra
152. click method whenever possible and use the drag selection technique when selecting only some of the notes within a measure Selecting Additional Measures When using the double click method to select measures you can select additional measures by holding down shift before double clicking each additional measure Selecting Staves There are two special methods for selecting staves The selection techniques are similar but the results are different Series 16 Mo 139 Single Click Selection To select all the measures in a staff a single click on the hot spot to the left of the staff will highlight the entire staff on that system This eliminates the need to select each individual measure Double Click Selection When a double click 1s used to select a staff the staff 1s selected to the end of the score This selection occurs from wherever the double click is performed to the end of the entire score Selecting Additional Staves Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe To select additional staves hold down shift and click or double click to the left of each additional staff you wish to add to the selection Selecting an Entire Page Double click on a page icon in the Toolbar to select an entire page Page selections fa fs d Gate performed in this fashion are for single pages only Additional pages cannot be added ks to the selection using shift Using the Computer s Keyboard You can also select notes an
153. command will respond to key repeat messages The delay before repeats occur can be set in the Keyboard Control Panel Nudge Up and Down MusicTime Deluxe allows you to use Nudge Up and Nudge Down commands on objects To change the pitch of a note up or down use Move Notes in the Notes menu Notes Menu Attributes The Attributes menu is a hierarchical menu with a sub menu for Notes Beams and Rests Each of these sub menu items opens a dialog for that item and allows you to change how MusicTime Deluxe displays and prints the related information The Attributes menu requires that you first select the notes or rests to be altered Notes set Stem Height The stem height can be any number from 1 through 63 Each number represents half the distance between two staff lines The default length is 7 As in common notation practice MusicTime Deluxe adjusts stems to touch the middle staff line when the notes are in the ledger lines Enter the desired length in the highlighted box Change Note Attribute _ Set Stem Height When changing the stem height of beamed notes please check the Apply Height to Beamed Notes check box gt 7 Spaces Note If you flip stem direction transpose or change Apply height to beamed notes pitch the stem length will revert to MusicTime Deluxe S defaults To change these defaults see O Shift Accidental Left To 2 View gt Spacing Defaults Set Play State Mute 7 Sh
154. course if you choose Close before saving changes you are always asked if you want to save changes at that time If you tell MusicTime Deluxe not to save those changes you will be duplicating the Revert to Saved function The only difference is the file will remain open if you choose Revert to saved Export Since MusicTime Deluxe can also open MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files any file that can be opened in MusicTime Deluxe can be exported as any other file type available to MusicTime Deluxe This means that MusicTime Deluxe files can be exported as MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files If you would like a score to serve as a SEN the default template the blank score New Default Score gt SEN that opens when MusicTime Deluxe is Open 380 launched you may export the desired Open Recent b file as Current Score Settings to Close W Default Score Template A template save 985 file is useful for saving information such as MIDI Channel choices and program assignments for each voice and for several staves You can also customize the layout have the Print Selection copyright information already entered ncs etg nam Current Score Settings To Default Score Template 2 Leen e Ed or even go so far as to include some Print 36 P music or initial notation Basically anything that you can save as an MusicTime Deluxe file can be saved as the default Template To add additional templates to the new score window export to Scor
155. ctly you must select only the one measure to become the pickup bar Creating A Pickup Bar Set lime Signature Here is an example for creating a pickup measure of a one eighth note pickup leading From measure 1 t 1 into a score in 4 4 time Before you open m S 73 Lo the time signature dialog make sure the first Ges Cancel measure contains the pickup note or notes ME D that you want and is not the measure after 9 Other the pickup b j 2 pickup bar If the pickup measure needs to be created use Add Measure and add one measure before measure one Click times per measure Hide Meter Pickup Bar Select the first measure and change the time signature to be the number of beats needed for the pickup Since our example is going to use one eighth note the time signature will require entering 1 8 in the other portion of the dialog Put a check mark in the box next to Pickup Bar and click OK If you check both Hide Meter and Pickup Bar the time signature in both the first and second The Menus measures selected will be hidden Measure numbers are only changed for the first measure in the score If the pickup bar option is removed from a measure the Hide Meter setting for the following measure will also be removed Key Signature Key signatures can be defined for either a portion of the score or for the whole score When key signatures are changed accidentals for notes within the section are
156. custom text box to determine how many times to play each ending and what measure is played next The Menus Lock Ending Open Closed Near the bottom of the dialog are three choices which affect how the ending is displayed in the last measure Open refers to a measure ending without a line drawn on the right side of the ending Closed will draw a vertical line in the last measure enclosing the measure ending If there is an ending in the selected area already the current setting is displayed If a new ending is being defined the choice will be based upon the barline type Measures with a repeat or thick double bar on the right will be closed If the right barline is not a repeat or double bar the ending will be open Although MusicTime Deluxe will initially select either open or closed for you the selection can be changed The Lock Ending option prevents the selection of open or closed from being changed later if the barline type is changed Changing the Vertical Position of Endings Measure Endings Set Ending From Measure 16 to 16 Mi First M Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth S Custom Text Box Lock Ending open closed vi Play them Font EL Lucida Grande HJ vi Bold Italic Size 12 Hd f Underline Note Font applies to all end ngs E i K quum L Cancel The default position for endings can be changed after the ending is created A control point in the upper left corner of each ending adjusts the
157. d a graphic pattern When Background is not selected the background is solid gray Page Margin The Page Margin indicates the area of graphic information that will be printed Staves and systems cannot be placed outside this area and graphics and text should remain inside the page margin When Page Margins have been enabled a broken line will indicate the page margin within your Score window Print Rhythm Staff Line A rhythm staff is a single line staff without key signature clef or barline indications Notes added to the rhythm staff use slashed note heads and are always placed directly on the single line indication When Print Rhythm Staff Line is selected the rhythm staff and any notes or rests it contains prints just as it appears onscreen When this option is not selected the notes and rests print but the line itself does not Left Barline Single Staves This option has an effect only when your systems consist of a single staff When selected the left edge of each staff has a bar line it is closed When not selected there is no bar line the left edge of each staff is open MIDI Items MIDI Items refers specifically to the text indication added to the score when controller or program changes are added using the Tools palette Even when MIDI items are hidden they continue to affect the MIDI playback of the staff they are attached to By hiding MIDI items you can enter more appropriate text strings for th
158. d so concentrate on the second system for now 1 Using the arrow pointer click and hold on the point where the left barline and the top staff line of the bass staff meet 2 Drag the staff up 3 Release the mouse button This method is fine for tweaking the spacing on individual systems but it would be pretty tedious if you had to go through an entire score and change the spacing between the staves in each system Fortunately you don t have to do that 1 Press and hold the control win option mac key 2 Repeat the previous procedure but this time adjust the spacing between the staves in the first system 3 Release the control win option mac key Moving a staff while the control win option mac key is down causes that staff to be moved to the same position in all subsequent systems In other words if you adjusted the spacing in the second system while the control win option mac key was held the first system would not have been affected Use this technique to get a consistent and comfortable amount of space between the staves Moving Systems Now that you ve reduced the music and adjusted the spacing between staves you should have more than enough room to fit all the music on one page In fact you ve probably got quite a bit of blank space at the bottom of the page Now you can space the systems to make the page a little less cluttered First you ll move everything on the page down a bit 1 Usin
159. d and isolated from one another for proper interpretation MIDI uses channels to specify which notes and controllers are intended for which sound in your synthesizer Just as channels on a TV keep stations separate channels in MIDI keep notes and controllers properly routed Notes played on channel 1 only respond to volume messages also on channel 1 Notes played on channel 2 only change volume if the volume message is sent on channel 2 Each MIDI device has 16 channels If you need more than 16 different instrumental sounds simul taneously you must use more than one device Keeping track of all the different MIDI channels and MIDI and MusicTime Deluxe making sure the volumes go out on the correct channels could be bewildering if MusicTime Deluxe didn t do most of it for you Each instrument used in your score requires a different MIDI channel or device to keep note and volume information from affecting other instruments Perhaps the most confusing aspect of each staff 1s that the channel choices can be different for each voice in each staff very useful when two different instruments such as a trumpet and a trombone share the same staff By using two different voices and two different MIDI channels a single staff can play up to eight instruments at a time Such notation is unlikely however and most staves are written for a single instrument Even when an instrument such as a piano requires using two or more voices it is usually i
160. d in preferences If Auto Guess Beam is enabled in the Setup menu the Guess Durations operation and the current transcription option will be applied to all recorded data and imported MIDI or Master Tracks Pro files If an imported or real time recording is guessed incorrectly you can change the transcription value and use Guess Durations again on all or part of the score Transcribing Triplets When using Guess Durations on triplets the result will depend on how accurately the triplets were entered Step entered triplets can be accurately guessed by MusicTime Deluxe down to a sixteenth note triplet but only if the duration 1s repeatedly used When triplet values are combined with other durations or alternate with rests the guess function will be less able to account for them and the result will vary according to the note s position When recording data into MusicTime Deluxe in real time it is important to play with great emphasis on maintaining the timing 1f you want the transcription to be as accurate as possible If a sequencing program such as Master Tracks Pro is available you can often improve the tran scription within MusicTime Deluxe even further by first opening the file in the sequencer program and quantizing it before you open it in MusicTime Deluxe Move Notes Move Notes section of the menu lets you easily change the pitch of the selected notes up or down by a half step or by an octave Simp
161. d rests with your computer s keyboard Use the command the arrow keys on a Mac or the left and right angle bracket keys on Windows Since you don t have to use shift it would be more accurate to refer to them as the comma and period keys But calling them the left and right angle bracket keys helps convey a sense of direction Open a score or enter some notes for several measures in a new score Using the arrow tool click in a measure to define the starting location of the selection Press gt on Windows or command gt on a Mac The note or rest immediately to the right of the insertion cursor becomes selected Do it again and the selection moves to the next note or rest to the right Using the key moves the selection through the score in the opposite direction If shift is held down while selecting in this fashion each new note will be added to the selection Releasing shift and selecting again will clear the selections made If control on Windows or command option on a Mac is held down while using the angle bracket arrow keys entire measures will be selected If shift is also held down you can add measures to the selection Combining Techniques Once you master the basic selection techniques each technique can be combined with others For instance to select from the second half of one measure that occurs in the middle of a system to the end of your score you could first use the arrow poi
162. d symbols to each measure you may need to make some final tweaks to the spacing We recommend using Nudge and not Align Spacing See the section on Nudge under the Edit menu for more information Save often save well and save copies of your work as you progress Score Menu Add Page The Add Page item allows you to enter any number of blank pages either before or after the currently The Menus displayed page All new pages created will use the page layout of the current page If you add pages after the current page the last measure of the current page will be used to set the time signature and key signature for all measures in the new pages When adding pages before the current page the first measure of the current page will be used to determine the time signature and key signature for all measures in the new pages Insert Page Note Be careful when adding pages before the first page in your score If you have created a pickup measure the time 2 signature of that pickup measure will be used for all measures SE Ee in the inserted section Before page 1 Cancel After page 1 Add Page does not have an undo option for the operation If Hel you wish to remove the pages added use the Delete Page function Delete Page Delete Page removes pages from your score Data in those pages gets removed with the pages Warning Delete Page is NOT UNDOABLE If you delete pages with notation the notation is lost Y
163. ddle or beginning of a measure If an Align Spacing operation moves notes to the EH e MADI OE wrong locations undo the operation and then check for missing rests Use ALIGN EE PLAYBACK before using ALIGN SPACING staff s channel MusicTime Deluxe does its best to align notes added to the middle of a measure or notes moved out of order within a measure Such operations are better avoided since more consistent and reliable playback will occur when you enter everything from left to right in the proper order If a later portion of a measure requires extensive editing it 1s better to erase the portion than to continually edit the existing material Moving Rests Rests behave in the same fashion as notes and will move either horizontally or vertically depending on which movement is applied first When moving vertically the rests are adjusted to the nearest staff line Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Drag Copying notes and rests If you hold down the control option key while moving a note or rest the note or rest will be copied to the new location When notes and rests are copied in this fashion the normal rules regarding the Auto Space and Auto Beam functions are ignored Note We strongly recommend that you use Align Playback after copying notes or rests using the control option key If you want MusicTime Deluxe to automati cally correct the measure spacing for the newly copied data use Align Spacing as
164. de Key Signature Time Signature Text Elements Staff Sheet Create Create will skip the Wizard and let you get right to your score to start writing New Default Score The item will create a new default score The default score is a piano score in C and in 4 4 You may set the default score to whatever set up you would like to use Please refer to the Export menu item for information on saving a default score Open The standard File Open dialog is used for the Open command and all four file types usable in Encore MusicTime Deluxe and MusicTime files Master Tracks Pro and MIDI files can be opened After opening MIDI or Master Tracks Pro files will be guessed and beamed unless the Auto Guess Beam item in the Setup menu is disabled a check mark next to the Auto Guess Beam selection in the Setup menu indicates the choice is enabled Until a score is saved as an MusicTime Deluxe file you are making changes only to the raw MIDI data and any graphic information you change is temporary Starting with version 3 0 MusicTime Deluxe for Windows can open files created with MusicTime Deluxe for the Macintosh Save the files with the appropriate name and extension enc on the Macintosh To open Windows files in MusicTime Deluxe for the Macintosh simply move them onto your Mac and select Open from the File menu Open Recent The drop down menu displays the most recent scores you have saved opened or created Close Cho
165. default beaming combination The Auto Guess Beam function uses Beam On Beat Sub Group will break the secondary beams under the primary beam of a beamed group into smaller groups without changing the duration information This leaves only the primary beam connecting the entire group Flatten Beams changes angled beams so that they run in a straight horizontal line All notes must be in the same voice for Beam Group and Beam On Beat to work Notes in different voices will be beamed according to the logic or selection applied to each separate voice Beam Group and Beam On Beat require an unbeamed selection to function properly If any of the selected areas were previously beamed these two beaming operations will undo the beaming instead of creating additional beams If this happens you can just do it again and MusicTime Deluxe will reapply the beam operation to the same selection Sub Group is applied after a group has been beamed together Sub Group will frequently require a Beam Group operation before it can be used Beam Group Beam Group is a manual operation used when you require different beaming combinations than are provided with Auto Guess Beam or Beat On Beat This can occur when using time signatures other than a simple 4 4 or when using complex groups of shorter durations Beam Group is also The Menus used when brackets are needed above tuplet groups such as half note or quarter note triplets and when beams are desired
166. ding to MusicTime Deluxe s best judgment If you flip stem directions for a tied group the tie direction will also change To alter the tie directions without changing the stem direction shift select the tied notes that need the tie flipped and use control command T Adjusting Ties Using the Mouse Ties can be adjusted manually by dragging the tie s control point Control points for ties occur in the middle of the tie and can be adjusted either up or down provided the tie 1s not indicating a The Menus tie from or to a note in another system or page If a tie occurs over a system or page you will need to change flow the number of measures to bring both notes being tied onto the same system Note The Tie Notes function ties only notes that are in the same voice Tie Defaults The Spacing Defaults dialog from the View menu contains the default settings for tie offsets The default horizontal offset is 0 placing the tie s ends at the edge of the notes being tied Using a higher number moves the ties farther away from the note heads The default vertical offset 1s 3 and places the tie ends slightly above or below the note heads being tied Using 0 will start the tie ends from the middle of the note s head Entering higher values moves the ties higher or lower than the notes A maximum of 8 can be used to define the tie offsets Each number represents a quarter of the distance between two staff lines Slur
167. disabling other staves to allow a single instrument or instruments to be heard Click in the solo field for the staff you wish to solo A solid diamond indicates a soloed staff Staves which are not soloed will reflect their temporary mute status by changing the play indication the solid triangle to gray As many staves as desired can be soloed and the solo function can be enabled and disabled while playing Name The Name field is used within the score when Show Names is enabled in the Show Hide dialog The name is always placed to the left of the staff and will be centered between the staves of a piano staff Click in the Name field to open the Staff Name dialog and enter a name for the staff You can also use this dialog to set the font and style for the name as it appears on the score Staff names are always right justified against the staff If you want to change this enter spaces after the name to offset the staff name Line returns can be used as well Size MusicTime Deluxe provides four sizes for staves Click the Size field to open the Set Staff Size dialog Staff sizes can be set independently for each staff Use the provided checkbox for changing all staves at the same time Move the slider from to 4 to set the staff size Key The Key field in the Staff Sheet transposes only the playback of the staff Clicking in the Key field opens a dropdown menu with a list of all known instrument transpositions The Key funct
168. drastically different if you used the Change Durations command The previous duration is preserved eMe but superseded by the addition of the articulation If you remove the articulation or uncheck Play Marks in the MIDI PLAYBACK SETTINGS dialog the note will return to the original duration of the MIDI note The Symbols Palette The Symbols palette contains both additional marks which can be attached to notes or used by themselves and some common score indications All of the symbols above the double line in the Symbols palette can be thought of as marks and attached to notes Adding them and adjusting the vertical position for these marks uses the same technique described for the two Marks palettes in the previous section The symbols below the line starting with the Dal Segno are always added to the score without attaching them to a note All of the symbols in the palette can be added as graphics and located wherever needed The Symbols Palette items do not affect MIDI playback Note MusicTime Deluxe includes graphic symbols for Dal Segno and Coda in the Symbols palette but these symbols by themselves will not affect MIDI playback For Dal Segno Coda and other similar instructions to affect playback use the Coda Phrases item in the Measures menu Symbols for Cymbals The Symbols palette contains several symbols designed specifically for drum and percussion notation These symbols can be attached to notes or they ca
169. e Contrabass utedTrumpet i Marimba Muted Gt Tremolo Str PizzicatoStr Brass 1 Synth Brass1 Whistle Halo Pad Fiddle Applause Santur jGtHarmonies Timpani MIDI Chanel 1 el S77 nw ee MM Gain Pan Reverb Level Rm 1 Select MIDI DEviICE INSTRUMENT SETTINGS from the Score menu in MusicTime Deluxe 2 Set your MIDI output devices and channels See MIDI DEviCE INSTRUMENT SETTINGS in the SCORE section of the manual for more information Note An unlimited number of devices are available on Macintosh Thus if you are using a six device interface all six devices would be available The MIDI Setup Dialog You will choose your Record Sync and Thru settings in the MIDI Setup dialog To open the MIDI Setup dialog box choose MIDI SETUP from MusicTime Deluxe s Setup menu The Record from menu specifies what devices MusicTime MIDI Setup Deluxe will listen to for MIDI input In general keep this setting to All Also note that if Enable Virtual Ports is enabled other applications will be able to connect to MusicTime Deluxe to send MIDI data When you have finished choosing your record sync and thru settings click OK to exit the MIDI Setup dialog Using MIDI It would be impossible to describe each possible combination of MIDI instruments and interfaces here but a few general assumptions can be made Three very basic MIDI systems are described in this section System One The mo
170. e color assigned to them in the Score window Only single events one note or chord in a single staff can be displayed at one time You can hold control command and press the left or right arrow repeatedly to step through the score A Setup Milli lid Willi TW Tempo Window The Tempo window provides a quick and easy way to globally alter the tempo of a score Changes made with the Tempo window will scale the tempo for the whole score even when tempo changes within the score Changing the Tempo The Tempo window displays the current tempo in beats per minute bpm The displayed tempo is for the measure that contains the insertion cursor There are two ways to change the tempo D Drag the tempo control up or down to choose a new tempo You can even do this during playback to continuously vary the tempo D Use the and buttons to slowly and accurately increment and decrement the tempo Resetting to the Saved Tempo The Menus The Reset button causes the score to revert to the saved tempo This can be very helpful if you simply want to make temporary changes for example to record a particularly difficult passage in real time If however you save the score after changing the tempo with the Tempo window the 100 tempo will be permanently altered 220 db ace 224 132 The Tempo Window and Tempo Changes Ia If you use the Tempo window to alter a piece that contains tempo chang
171. e printers is to select a set width for the page margin After selecting a printer paper size and entering a reduction or enlargement factor for your score you will need to check the page margins to see how the page layout appears Open the Suow Hips dialog and put a check mark in the box for PAGE Marains The page margin is displayed as a broken line surrounding the score The actual size within the margin is determined by the paper size selected Left Right Top and Bottom Page Margins Systems are set to the current page width by default You can indent systems on either side but Printing with MusicTime Deluxe MusicTime Deluxe will not allow you to move a system outside the left or right margins Top and bottom margins do not limit system placement The bottom page margin in particular is important when considering page layout The bottom margin can extend into extra tiles used to print additional sections of a score When MusicTime Deluxe cannot fit the number of staves or systems within the current page margin additional tiles are created automatically Print and Print Selection MusicTime Deluxe offers two printing choices in the File menu Print Selection Selections should be made using the arrow tool Click and drag around the area you wish to print Only one area should be selected Print The standard PRINT menu item is used for printing an entire page or several pages If there are tiled sections for an
172. e 78 F 4 Mute Cuica 55 G2 Splash Cymbal 79 G4 Open Cuica 56 G 2 Cow Bell 80 G 4 Mute Triangle 57 A2 Crash Cymbal 2 81 A4 Open Triangle 58 A 2 Vibra slap Volume Velocity And Graphics Controlling volume becomes one of the biggest problems when creating and sharing scores Both MusicTime Deluxe and MIDI offer several ways to control MIDI volume This can lead to the sending of two different volume messages which can either complement or contradict one another The basic methods for changing volume use controller 7 volume messages and or note velocity information The gain faders in the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings use controller 7 messages The dynamic markings and hairpins can use controller 7 and or note velocity to adjust volume Accent marks can be set to adjust note velocities as well See the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Setting section in the manual for more details How you choose to use these methods depends on what the playback device supports Fully understanding what is being sent and how it is going to be interpreted requires learning a little more about how MIDI works MIDI and MusicTime Deluxe Note that Garritan Orchestra Libraries uses Controller 2 Modwheel for volume control information MusicTime Deluxe automatically looks for devices with Garritan in the name and uses Controller 2 instead of 7 for those devices Every note in your score contains two velocity messag
173. e General MIDI DLS EPiano2 Accordion Fr SlapBass2 VoieeOohs Solo Vox Goblin Mele Tom 1 Harmonica Synth Bass 1 Syn ox th Saw Wave Clav Synth Bass 2 OrchestraHit 55 amp Lead Violin Fantasia t FretNoise rambane rm Pad Banjo Breath Noise MusicBox iesst Cello Shamisen utedTrumpet Pan Flute Space Voice Bowed Glass PizzicatoStr etal Pad antur GtHarmenies Timpani SynthBrass2 Ocarina Sweep Pad Shanai Gun Shot MIDI Channel 1 B G i i ue Ki Pan Gain Reverb Level Cancel Select the Playback Device This can be the Built in Synths a MIDI device plugged into your computer another MIDI enabled application or one of the IAC busses Set the Playback Device s Bank If you are using the built in synth the default bank is Apple s General MIDI DLS but you can use any DLS or SoundFont file you wish To do so simply place the DLS or SoundFont file into your Library Audio Sounds Banks folder The next time you launch Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings stati P Playback Device Built In Synth 1 All Voices H4 Acoustic Bs Strings Soprano Sax Square Wave es Rain Tinkle Bell Pano2 Organ2 Fingered Bs _ Siow Strings Ahto Sax Organi Picked Bs SynStringsl Tea Sax 5yn Calliope e Bank Apple General MIDI DLS fang 3 Fretless Bs Syn Strings2 Baritone Sax Slap Bass 1 Choir Aahs Oboe Slap Bass 2 Voice Oohs English Horn Solo Vox Goblin Melo
174. e Note Operations that require selections or measure ranges will not use Auto Space Record Setup Record items Record Setup Record Items is used for determining both a split point Be Cae Eee when recording in real time and for selecting what types ee OK of MIDI data are to be either recorded or imported into MusicTime Deluxe Selecting Record Transcription Setup Program Change cancel opens a window to the recording options Pitch Bend Channel Pressure Controllers Modulation Help The Split function lets you split incoming notes at a specific pitch location when recording in real time For Split to work properly you should have two staves or a piano staff showing in your score Set the starting point for the record process by clicking in the top staff of the two staves to be used when Split notes at on piano staves recording the split The split point can be anything from C2 to G8 but is usually somewhere near middle C C3 MusicTime Deluxe defaults to C3 The split point responds to MIDI input so you can experiment with your keyboard or controller if you are unsure what might be appropriate Notes below the selected pitch will be placed in the lower staff Unless you are recording into a specific voice notes in the bass clef of a standard Piano staff will be set to voice 5 Enable Enter Kev to StarkStop Recording The Record Items choice is used for both real time input and also when opening importing a
175. e Only 1 independently Control Points M Reminder Time Signatures Ivi Page Margin Mi Reminder Key Signatures Ivi Initial Clef amp Time Cancellation Key Signatures Rulers Ivi MIDI Items Left Barline on Single Staves Rulers are useful in page view when aligning When Printing EE several objects at different locations You can C Rhythm Staff Line l Mi M2 Ms Ma select either inches or centimeters Ruler status M Color on or off is saved with a score only but the MIDI Items Ms Me M7 Me selection of inches or centimeters is saved in preferences The inches or centimeter selection applies to all open scores Rulers are not available on Mac Staff Name Staff names can be displayed on the first page or on every page in the score When displaying the staff name on each page the names are displayed for the top system only Staff names are designated in the Staff Sheet Control Points Control points are the small squares at the end or corners of many graphic objects that are used to define the shape and or length of the graphic Cancellation Keys Key signature changes that occur at the beginning of a system can be displayed at the end of the previous system This indication is called a reminder key signature When cancellation keys are hidden this reminder is removed from the end of systems MusicTime Deluxe will always display the cancellation of accidentals for key signatures that occur within a system
176. e Template and follow the prompts to name it Save As M k Score Template act Parts MIDI Master Tracks Pro Extract Part The part extraction function allows you to quickly create a new score containing one or more staves of a multi staff score Most often this function will be used to create individual parts for each player from a larger composition Select the staff or staves you want extracted All the staves between your top and bottom selections will be specified as the staff range for the new score You can specify the staff range within the Extract Part dialog as well If you want to extract several instruments to the same score but they appear at different vertical positions in your system you can rearrange their order in the Staff Sheet window before using Extract Part For more about the Staff Sheet see the section on the Windows menu Auto Compress Rests When Auto compress Rests is checked all empty measures in the score that do not include special Extract Part From Staff 1 lli barlines coda phrases text boxes or graphics will be Auto compress rests compressed automatically for you The font selection M for compressed rests will be the same as that specified exact in the Compressed Rests dialog See Compressed W All Text Boxes to the Top Staff H Rests in the Measures Menu section for more Wl All Lyrics information about compressed rests within MusicTime fA Text from Staff 1 Deluxe The extr
177. e dynamic range to one extreme or the other Change smoothly will replace the velocity values for the selected notes with new values obtained from the value range entered The first value will be applied to the first note and the second value applied to the last note in your selection Notes between the beginning and end selections will be altered according to their placement in time This means the changes in velocity level for short durations will be more gradual than changes between notes with longer durations The Menus The fixed value range will accept values between 127 and 127 If any operation would result in a value less than 0 or greater than 127 the value assigned is either 0 or 127 depending on which limit was encountered To change just the ON velocity click on the note while holding the Shift Command keys A pop up menu with velocities will open Make Chord Make Chord combines two or more notes of the same duration into a chord Both MIDI Playback and screen display are changed Make Chord can be used to change imported or real time recorded data containing arpeggiated chords into an actual chord to which an arpeggio symbol can be added To use Make Chord select the notes that you wish to use in the chord and then use Make Chord Make Chord will work only when notes are of the same duration If notes have been guessed to be different durations first change all of the notes to the same duration Unle
178. e event For example you may use a different program on your synthesizer when a change in tonality 1s needed but the The Menus basic instrument could remain the same By hiding the MIDI item and adding a text box instead you can indicate the performance change using more suitable terminology MusicTime Deluxe also has the option to print the MIDI items on the score by checking the Print MIDI Items box Time Signature Time signature changes that occur at the beginning of a system can be indicated at the end of the previous system This is called a reminder time signature When time signature reminders are hidden the time signature will only be indicated in the measure where it begins Key Signature Key signature changes that occur at the beginning of a system can be indicated at the end of the previous system This is called a reminder key signature When key signature reminders are hidden the key signature will be indicated only in the measure where it begins Color MusicTime Deluxe gives you the ability to display and print your music in color This can be useful for showing different parts or for differentiating between voices on a single staff Situations may arise however where it is necessary to hide If your printer is capable of printing color or grayscale images and you want a color score to print in black and white deselect the In Printout checkbox and the score will print in black and white
179. e for Playback If you wish to change the key used for an instrument when playing the score use the Key function in the Staff Sheet This transposes the notes on the staff to a new key for playback only and does not affect the display Reminder Key Signatures When the next system in a score changes to a new key signature the change 1s indicated at the end of the previous measure by default This reminder can be removed by using the Show Hide dialog MusicTime Deluxe always indicates key signature cancellations and changes within a system Barline Types Each measure in your score has both a left and a right barline type The default barline type is a single line drawn between each measure The default ending barline is a standard double bar The barline type used to indicate repeats can optionally affect playback Left and right barline selections affect the first and last measures of the selection range only Adding repeats to the beginning and ending measures of a section can be performed in one operation If measures are selected before opening the Barline Types dialog the measure range and barline types indicated are the current settings for the selection The left barline type will be applied to the left side of the first measure in the measure range The right barline type will be applied to the right side of last measure in the measure range Play Repeats If Play Repeats is checked the repeat barline type will affect playb
180. e getting placed slightly higher For more information about chords refer to the chord section in the Graphics palette Note Text boxes lyrics and chords can all be copied while dragging by holding down the control option key before moving the item Lyrics copied in this way remain in the same lyric line but are not associated with any note Moving Slurs Slurs differ from all other graphics and require the use of the shift key when moved You can use any of the three control points to move a slur Hold down shift and click on a control point with the arrow pointer Drag the slur to the new location For more information concerning slurs refer to the discussion of Slurs in the Toots Palette section Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Moving Other Graphics Move graphics in MusicTime Deluxe by clicking on the graphic image and dragging To move symbols such as dynamics and marks when not attached to the note head click anywhere on the image and drag Some of the graphics in the Tools palette such as the hairpins and parenthesis indications are similar to text boxes and have four control points These graphics are moved by clicking anywhere within the area defined by the four control points Moving Barlines Barlines may be adjusted by clicking anywhere on the barline and dragging When barlines are adjusted all data within the measures on either side is adjusted To bypass this adjustment hold d
181. e number 7D is used to display the current date in the format mm dd yy T is used to display the time Date and time indications will update as you work on the score These indications are saved as Text Elements Title Instructions Composer Header 1 Header 2 Footer 1 Footer 2 Header 1 Font Style Times New Roman Bold Italic Size 10 E Underline P vi Flip on even odd pages Page P Right H4 Start on page 1 Date D Page offset is 0 Time T h Cancel OK The Menus special instructions and not as the actual date or time when the score is saved Every time you open the score these settings will reflect the currently displayed time and date for your computer as defined in Windows Date Time Control Panel or Mac s System Preferences Start on Page Start on Page indicates which page begins showing numbering options using the P option For example if you type a 3 in this box you won t see page numbers for pages 1 and 2 and page numbers will start on page 3 Note This feature only hides page numbers It does not re paginate Use Page Offset to re paginate Page Offset Using an offset allows two different scores intended to be first and second sections for the same score to be printed with a consistent page reference For example if your first section ended on page 33 you can continue the page numbering for the second file by entering the number 33 into the page offset Now
182. e score When key signatures are changed accidentals for notes within the section are changed but the pitches can either be transposed or left alone Selecting a measure range before opening the Set Key Signature dialog will enter the selected area into the measure range portion of the Set Key Signature dialog The key signature change will be applied to all measures between the first and last measure indicated Enter a new measure range if desired Use the Circle of 5ths buttons to select a key To easily understand the circle the sharp keys move clockwise and the flat keys move counter clockwise each progression adding another sharp or flat C at top center has neither sharps or flats No Double Barline Place a check mark in this box if you do not wish to have double barlines inserted into the score at the place of the key signature change Just Delete the Current Key Signature When a key signature needs to be removed the option to Just delete the current Key Signature should be selected This removes all key signatures for the measure range specified The new key signature will be a continuation of any key signature used before the first measure of the affected measure range or the key signature will default to the key of C Note When Just Delete The Current Key Signature is used the selected key signature is ignored Just this staff By default the Transpose Key Signature dialog will change the key signature for al
183. each note s duration and the need to more clearly show the contents of the measure without overlapping notes or accidentals Mathematically Perfect When Mathematically Perfect is selected notes are placed in the measure according to their indicated duration Accidentals are not considered and may overlap as a result of mathematical spacing Adjust Measure Widths If the measure range is defined for entire systems either one or several the option to change measure widths will be available This selection tells MusicTime Deluxe to change measure widths within the selected area according to whatever will best accommodate the notation within each measure Align Spacing From Measure 4 to 4 Adjust Measures Per System 9 Engraver s Spacing C Mathematically Perfect When the measure range is only for entire systems you SSC Adjust Measure Widths can optionally let MusicTime Deluxe adjust how many Adjust Measures per System measures are used in each system This adjustment will V Adjust for Lyrics be performed on a system by system basis and will use V All Staves the note density for each system to decide if the number of measures can be increased or decreased Cancel ok The Menus Adjust for Lyrics This option checked by default will consider lyrics connected to notes within the measure when making spacing changes and try to avoid overlapping lyrics when altering note locations All Stave
184. eady open will have a check mark next to them Palettes are closed by clicking the palette s Close box Open palettes and their locations are saved with preferences and recalled the next time you run MusicTime Deluxe In addition to opening each palette you can also switch any open palette to one of the unopened palettes Click to the left or right side of the palette s name to change the palette to the next unopened palette in the list The right side selects the next palette below the current palette name in the list and the left side selects from above You can continue using this method to access unopened palettes until you reach the desired palette Staff Sheet The Staff Sheet configures each staff for playback and for the name displayed for the staff O Staff Sheet Name Play Solo Size Key Chn Program ome me Mi 1 Al Ol 3 cC 1 Built in Play To the right of the staff number is a field in the Staff Sheet that represents the play status for each track By default each track will be play enabled and represented with a solid triangle To mute a track click directly on the triangle This turns the center of the triangle white and all MIDI playback for that track will cease Staves can be muted at any time and as many staves as desired can be muted The mute status is saved with the file Solo The solo field provides an easy method for temporarily disabling other staves to allow a single The Menus in
185. eat barline Playback then will jump to the left repeat barline play through to the end of the score and stop 5 Click OK Repeat Endings simple repeats like the one you just added are fine for some applications In this case however we want the main body of the song to play through 3 times and then jump to a different ending on the fourth repeat 1 Select Measure 16 Double click in the treble staff 2 From the Measures menu choose ENDINGs The Measure Enpincs dialog box appears 3 Click the checkboxes labeled First SECOND and Tuin A check appears in each box 4 Make sure a check appears in the PLay THEM checkbox 5 Click OK The ending bracket appears over Measure 16 complete with text indicating this ending should be Tutorial played through the first 3 times Measure Endings Select Measure 17 Set Ending From Measure 16 to 16 From the Measures menu choose ENDINGS W First M Second Third Fourth Fifth C Sixth Click the checkbox labeled Fourru Custom Text Box Click OK Lock Ending open closed If you play the score from the beginning it ES will start with the pickup bar and then play num Measures 1 through 16 three times On the Font Style fourth repeat it will skip Measure 16 play Pr dus em Cucida Grande H Saa Citali Size 12 B Underline Like any other on screen objects the inp peg brackets and text associated with endings Cancel
186. ed value Set Note Durations For passages intended to be played legato you can nm 9 Normal increase the percentage to 10096 An overlap can C Dotted be achieved depending on articulation settings and TI Double Dotted MIDI OFF velocities of the particular synthesizer FX Tuplet 3 gt used See MIDI Playback Settings Decreasing the percentage will result in a more Set play duration to 90 of face value staccato interpretation Cancel Ki si The Menus Note Even at full duration what is actually heard will depend on the synthesizer and the sound selection Reducing the playback percentage for sounds with slow attack times can result in some notes not being heard at all See the appendix on MIDI for more information The Set Play Duration settings will be lost if a note s duration is changed again See also the Notes palette Changing Displayed Notation without Affecting MIDI Playback Change Velocity Change Velocity combined with dynamics marks hairpins and your synthesizer settings can give you complete control over the interpretation of your score s dynamics by your MIDI synthesizer MIDI Playback Settings and Staff Sheet settings can change the velocity or perceived volume Velocity is a MIDI parameter in every note The value for velocity ranges between 0 and 127 but the value of 0 is special and not used in MusicTime Deluxe a zero velocity essentially means don t play this no
187. eft and the order in which Fert Mudge Right they appear Font Size Time Signature Nudge Up Key Signature Select All Choose TOOLBAR ted Meseure Undo SETUP to open the 2 l 3 Notes Menu Toolbar Setup dialog i Page Accidentals to Enharmonic There are 90 possible Add Staff Accidentals to Flats items that you can place in the Toolbar Most of these items correspond to menu commands The Toolbar will expand to accommodate and can be resized by dragging the bottom right corner To add icons to the Toolbar add or remove the item in the order you wish them to appear Accidenkals to Sharps Add Marks Beam Attributes Beam On Beat Beam Sub Group hee Coo ski Es The Toolbar is a floating window that can be activated or deactivated through the Windows menu Help Menu Topics This will open this manual Current Topic This will open this manual The Menus Gvox Home Page This will open a browser and direct it to the Gvox Customer Support Center About MusicTime Deluxe This is where the version copyright and registration information is When you first install MusicTime Deluxe the program will run in Demo mode To unlock and fully install the program simply enter your serial number when asked The Menus Voices In MusicTime Deluxe Chapter Eight Mim Deluxe uses Voices to notate two or more melodic or rhythmic concepts on the same staff or for several sta
188. either device and on any channel About Thru Most MIDI controllers are also sound generating instruments like synthesizers or samplers If you are using only one synthesizer you may not need to use Thru If you have more than one synthesizer however Thru can let you play one synthesizer with another Unless you want to hear both synthesizers playing together you should either turn the master control ler s Local Control off or mute the synthesizer being used to send the note messages Turning Local Control off essentially splits an instrument into a master controller and a sound module For example if you turn off Local Control on your keyboard synthesizer performance data note ons note offs modulation et cetera will be transmitted via the instrument s MIDI out device as usual But the instrument s internal sound generating hardware will not respond to your playing unless that data is somehow routed to the instrument s MIDI in device MIDI Thru is turned on or off by clicking on the Thru button in any Score window The Thru button is located in the Toolbar between the Zoom tool and the measure indicator MIDI Thru can be configured to always use the same device and channel or you can have the Thru channel and device choices follow the device and channel of the current selected staff in your score File Menu New When you create a new score you have three basic Staff Formats from which to choose e
189. enor Treble zm Treble Bass 8 Each clef is a character in the Anastasia or handwritten fonts Clefs reference one staff line to a pitch P and this relationship determines the pitches for that staff MusicTime Deluxe always uses clefs but the choice can be changed at any time and clefs can be inserted within the score at any location When importing MIDI or Pro files MusicTime Deluxe considers the pitch range for each track and chooses the initial clef for you Hi To change the beginning clef for a staff select the pencil tool and then click on the desired clef in the F em Clefs palette The pointer will change to your clef selection Position the new clef choice on top of the current clef in measure one and click to change the clef To remove a clef use the eraser tool and click directly on the clef Please Note Clefs can be cut but are not pasted when either copied or cut along with note data Clefs are special symbols in MusicTime Deluxe and require some pre planning and consideration when a change in clef is required in the middle or end of a measure MEN Using the Palettes The Clefs Their relationship to pitch and each other Treble Clef or G Clef G3 196 00 Hz MIDI Note 67 Bass Clef or F Clef e F2 SS EIS MIDI Note 53 Q Alto Clef or C Clef O C3 z we 130 81 Hz MIDI Note GO Middle C o Alto Clef or C Clef O C3 z we 130 81 Hz e
190. enter the page number for the last page Use this when you want to delete pages to the end of the score Caution MusicTime Deluxe does not allow you to delete discontinuous pages The page range includes all pages between the first and last page specified Add Staff The Add Staff dialog creates additional blank staves in MusicTime Deluxe Add Staff is NOT UNDOABLE To remove an added staff use the Delete Staff item Add Staff does not require a selection but the current staff where the cursor is located is used to determine both where the staff is added and what operations are available within the Add Staff dialog Note Add Staff is only available in Page View Add _ Regular Staves As many as 16 staves can be used in MusicTime Deluxe but the total number of staves you can add within this dialog may depend on the number of systems each page currently displays The total number of staves appearing on any one page including tiles can be no more than 16 If the Add Staff dialog does not allow you to add the needed number of staves exit cancel from the dialog and change the number of systems per page to a number that will not exceed the 16 per page limit Add a Piano Staff A Piano Staff is a combined staff that defaults to a treble and bass clef but each staff is linked to the other staff to allow for cross staff beaming The Staff Sheet displays one instrument for a piano staff and a staff name will be centered between the two
191. es Notes Clefs Graphics Tools Dynamics Marks 1 Marks 2 Symbols Color Staff Sheet Keyboard Tempo Toolbar Tile Cascade Setup Menu Click On Off Auto Guess Beam Auto Space Mac Ctrl 2 U Ctrl U Ctrl Y Ctrl W BIS BR Ctrl H Ctrl I Ctrl L do K Opt N 36 Opt C 36 Opt L 26 Opt 2 T 36 Opt gd Opt 8 M 36 Opt 8 36 Opt S Opt 8 O 36 36 K 3 0 38 N F 8 G 8 A Windows Ctrl Alt U Ctrl Alt U Ctrl Alt Y Ctrl Alt W BE 11 Ctrl Alt H Ctrl Alt T Ctrl Alt L Ctrl H Ctrl Alt K Alt IN Alt 2 C Alt 2 L Alt T Alt 2 D Alt 2 IM Alt Alt 2 S Alt 2 O Ctrl Ctrl K Ctr1 0 Ctrl Q 8 F4 8 F5 Ctrl F Ctrl HG Ctrl A Shortcuts Score Window Toolbar Mac Windows Note For the voice commands press the V key followed immediately by the indicated letter or number do not press both keys at once The variable n represents a voice number from 1 to 8 Show all voices Show voice n Arrow Tool Eraser Tool Pencil Tool Record Play Stop Jump To
192. es all of the tempos will t i be scaled accordingly Let s say a piece starts out at 100 bpm Then after four bars the tempo eT o changes to 200 bpm If the insertion cursor is in the first four bars the Tempo window displays ot 100 bpm If you change the tempo to 50 bpm the tempo will now change to 100 bpm at measure SEH Lace 5 Both tempos are reduced by 50 Customizable Toolbar MusicTime Deluxe features a floating customizable Toolbar This Toolbar contains icons that represent commonly used MusicTime Deluxe commands All of the icons and their related functions are shown at the end of this manual on the pages entitled Toolbar Icons Rules about selection and cursor placement still apply the toolbar simply provides a convenient shortcut The Toolbar is a floating window so it is affected by the Hide Show Floating Windows command in the View menu Customizing the Toolbar The Toolbar contains a few icons by default but it is fully configurable You can choose the icons and the order in which they appear This is accomplished with the Toolbar Setup item in the preferences menu For more info see Toolbar Setup Open Scores At the bottom of the Windows menu is a list of all new and currently open songs in MusicTime Deluxe A check mark will appear next to the active song MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files before they are saved as MusicTime Deluxe files have the words MIDI File or MTPro File added to the end of their file name
193. es one sent when the note 1s played typically called the note on velocity the other sent when the note off message note off velocity Most synthesizers use the note on velocity value to control a note s volume MusicTime Deluxe makes this assumption when you use dynamic values and marks to change the velocity The note off velocity message is always sent but many synthesizers do not respond to the message Note off velocities can be edited in the CHANGE VELociTy dialog but are not used elsewhere in MusicTime Deluxe Velocity does not have to change volume for every patch or every synthesizer The response to velocity depends upon both the manufacturer and the user to decide Setting velocity values for marks dynamics and graphics will change the velocity for the affected notes but may not cause notes under fortissimo markings or with attached accents to play any louder In some cases you may even hear different instruments or effects played instead The difference between velocity and volume is that velocity is only a number attached to a note message in MIDI while volume is a concept we all pretty much agree on The reason velocity 1s used to change volume so often is because the MIDI market has been dominated by keyboards and most keyboards use velocity to change volume Now velocity 1s usually not the actual measurement of how hard a key is hit but the end result is similar enough In most cases velocity actually measure
194. es symbols and endings are unaffected and will remain at the same vertical location in your score Checking Move Endings and Symbols adjusts these items up or down along with the notes Changing the Key Signature for Playback If you wish to change the key used for an instrument when playing the score use the Key function in the Staff Sheet This transposes the notes on the staff to a new key for playback only and does not affect the display Reminder Key Signatures When the next system in a score changes to a new key signature the change 1s indicated at the end of the previous measure by default This reminder can be removed by using the Show Hide dialog MusicTime Deluxe always indicates key signature cancellations and changes within a system Barline Types Each measure in your score has both a left and a right barline type The default barline type is a single line drawn between each measure The default ending barline is a standard double bar The barline type used to indicate repeats can optionally affect playback Left and right barline selections affect the first and last measures of the selection range only Adding repeats to the beginning and ending measures of a section can be performed in one operation If measures are selected before opening the Barline Types dialog the measure range and barline types indicated are the current settings for the selection The left barline type will be applied to the left side of the
195. ess the delete key on your computer keyboard The two selected quarter note rests will be removed and the eighth note will remain at the end of the measure 3 Repeat as above for the dotted quarter rest on the bottom staff Copying a Chord Using The Control Option Key Now you have the space needed for the chord you are going to create to duplicate the tied chord in Measure 3 As before you will use the control win option mac key to copy This time you will copy both notes together and create a second chord 1 Select the arrow tool from the Score Window s toolbar 2 While holding down the control win option mac key click on either note for the chord you created in measure 4 and drag to the right If you make a mistake and drag vertically MusicTime Deluxe will think you wish to add another note to your chord If that happens select Undo Move from the Edit Menu and try again When finished you should have a copy of your first chord to the right of the first chord in the same measure The exact placement does not matter as you will use another operation later to correctly Tutorial adjust the spacing for the measure You are almost ready to tie your two chords together but you should first change the duration for the second chord to a quarter note chord By now you should be familiar with the steps Select the second chord and use the letter D key on your computer keyboard to remove the dotted indication F
196. ete discussion of voicing see Chapter 7 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe The Arrow Tool The arrow tool appears as the standard arrow pointer The arrow tool is used in the Score window for most of the editing and layout functions that involve selecting or moving objects It is also used to change the size and shape of text boxes slurs hairpins and other graphic objects Eg The Eraser Tool The ERASER TOOL erases objects that you enter in the Score window Be aware that there are certain things it will not erase Marks attached to notes will not be erased by the ERASER TOOL To remove a mark attached to a note simply click on the note head a second time with the same mark selected in the palette For more information about marks see the section on the Manxs palettes The Score Window The Pencil Tool The PENCIL tool must be selected to enter any palette object into the score even if you intend to use MIDI step entry to enter notes The sole exception to this rule is when you are recording music in real time The Record Button Click this button to begin recording music in real time If the metronome click is turned on in the Setup menu and it should be for real time note entry you will hear a one bar count in before recording begins Click the button again to stop recording For more information about CLick ON Orr and CLICK SETUP see the section on the Serur menu The Play Button Click the Pray button to
197. etlessBass Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 violin Viola Cello Contrabass Trem Strings StrEnsmbl 1 StrEnsmbl 2 Synth5tr 1 Synth5tr z Choir Ahhs Voice Gohs Synth voice rch Hit Trumpet Trombone Tuba Mute Trumpt French Horn BrassSection Device Preset Type General MIDI ae Soprano Sax Alta Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccalo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Square Wave Sawtooth Caliope Chiff Lead Charang Solosynthiys Brite Saw Brass amp Lead FantasiaPad Warm Pad alvSnEhP ad SpacevoxPad BowdGlasPad Metal Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Atmosphere Brightness Gablin Echo Drops Star Theme Sitar Banja Shamisen oko Kalimba Open VST Player Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums woodblock Taiko Drum Melodic Tom Synth Drum Rey Cymbal GuitFrethoise Breath Noise Sea Shore Bird Tweet Phone Ring Helicopter Applause Gun Shot Mylophone Tubular Bells Dulcimer Pizz Strings Orch Harp Timpani Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Halo Pad Sweep Pad Whistle Ocarina SnthBrass 1 SnthBrass 2 DistortedGuit GuitHarmonic PolvSnthPad Pam 91 MIDI Channel 1 w d A Reverb Level selections on different staves Staff Selection The Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog allows you to make your device choice for one multiple or all When All Staves is enabled changing the device type fo
198. ff or mute the synthesizer being used to send the note messages Turning Local Control off essentially splits an instrument into a master controller and a sound module For example if you turn off Local Control on your keyboard synthesizer performance data note ons note offs modulation et cetera will be transmitted via the instrument s MIDI out device as usual But the instrument s internal sound generating hardware will not respond to your playing unless that data is somehow routed to the instrument s MIDI in device MIDI Thru is turned on or off by clicking on the Thru button in any Score window The Thru button is located in the Toolbar between the Zoom tool and the measure indicator The Menus MIDI Thru can be configured to always use the same device and channel or you can have the Thru channel and device choices follow the device and channel of the current selected staff in your score Toolbar Setup MusicTime Deluxe features a floating customizable Toolbar This Toolbar contains Toolbar Setup Toolbar Available icons that represent commonly used MusicTime Deluxe File Open File Save Page Setup l Various Blank Space Gyles COP Cancel commands The Print File Menu Toolbar contains a Copy Extract Parts few icons by default Ge Revert Score but remains fully Tie Notes Edit Menu configurable You Slur Notes Se can choose the icons Note Attributes hrec j Beam Group Mudge L
199. first page or on every page in the score When displaying the staff name on each page the names are displayed for the top system only Staff names are designated in the Staff Sheet Control Points Control points are the small squares at the end or corners of many graphic objects that are used to define the shape and or length of the graphic Cancellation Keys Key signature changes that occur at the beginning of a system can be displayed at the end of the previous system This indication is called a reminder key signature When cancellation keys are hidden this reminder is removed from the end of systems The Menus MusicTime Deluxe will always display the cancellation of accidentals for key signatures that occur within a system au Serta tee Inches First page only Initial Clef amp Time Centimeters C3 All pages Show Hide Hiding the initial clef and time signature can come in handy when you want to Centrol Paints Reminder Time Signatures print blank manuscript paper Page Margin Reminder Key Signatures Initial Clef amp Time _ Cancellation Key Signatures Backg round MIDI Events Left Barline Single Staves There may be times when you have when Printing Rests in Voice resized the score window allowing a portion of the background to become Rhythm Staff Line IF Iz F s F a visible When the Background option is Color selected the program background will be MIDI Events zo ao a
200. for Real Time and Imported Notes Notes recorded in real time or imported MIDI Files initially have unique durations for each note depending on the recording Even after Guess Durations and Transcription Options have assigned a display duration value the original recording or MIDI file is maintained as much as possible When changing the duration for real time and imported scores the new play duration is the percentage of the transcribed value and not the recorded value For passages intended to be played legato you can increase the percentage to 100 An overlap The Menus can be achieved depending on articulation settings and MIDI OFF velocities of the particular synthesizer used See MIDI Playback Settings Decreasing the percentage will result in a more staccato interpretation Note Even at full duration what is actually heard will depend on the synthesizer and the sound selection Reducing the playback percentage for sounds with slow attack times can result in some notes not being heard at all See the appendix on MIDI for more information The Set Play Duration settings will be lost if a note s duration is changed again See also the Notes palette Changing Displayed Notation without Affecting MIDI Playback Change Velocity Change Velocity combined with dynamics marks hairpins and your synthesizer settings can give you complete control over the interpretation of your score s dynamics by your MIDI synthesizer MIDI P
201. functions are best used to obtain a basic page layout which can then be further customized by moving individual staves and systems Advanced Technique Parallel Systems Sometimes two systems appear parallel in a score We see this most often for codas and endings By changing the left and right indents for two systems in your score it is possible to duplicate this side by side layout However because several automatic functions do not recognize this type of layout we recommend that this procedure be applied only as the last step before printing Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe To Coda D C al Coda K E PM at d LALA oye fo EC m a es SS Prior to arranging systems side by side be sure to complete both systems and add any phrases or text To Coda d D C al Coda This is an example of two systems that could be placed side by side Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe To Coda D C al Coda l Ca ei e A LN bk ow o e 5 lb r Le A WI ZE Ol eC te M 5 A a A E D 4 La Drag the right side of the top system over to the left creating enough room to accommodate the To Coda 9 D C al Coda P measures in the lower system Note The Coda Phrases were adjusted again for this example Some repositioning for graphics will To Coda 9 D C alCoda 4 Coda be unavoidable when changing system size Drag the lower system over to the right u
202. g recorded or imported MIDI note data Note durations shorter than the selected duration will be rounded up to the selected duration Essentially this means that if you select sixteenth notes in the Transcription Settings a guess operation will never convert a note into any duration shorter than a sixteenth MusicTime Deluxe s guessing routine is designed to recognize multiple voices and to accurately transcribe triplets This may however result in unwanted triplets in some situations For this reason a checkbox in the Transcription Settings dialog forces MusicTime Deluxe to ignore triplets completely when checked You can choose to ignore triplets when guessing or re guessing the entire score or you can select the measure s that contains the offending triplets and re guess that section The Ignore Triplets checkbox defaults to the unchecked disabled state The setting of the Ignore Triplets checkbox is saved with preferences For more information on how Tran scription Settings will affect the Guess Durations operation refer to the section on Guess Durations Notes Menu The Menus MusicTime Deluxe includes an Auto Align Playback After Transcribing check box If checked MusicTime Deluxe will align MIDI playback information to the transcribed guessed notes notated in the score If you want to keep the original MIDI data intact do not select Auto Align Playback After Transcribing Refer to the Align Playback section for
203. g the arrow pointer drag the left edge of the first system down a little The spacing between the systems remains the same but all the systems on the page move down There are a number of reasons why you might want to do this Chief among these is that you might want to add a title and other text elements later 2 Release the mouse button Now you can adjust the spacing between the systems You can move systems individually just like you did with staves But for now you want to adjust the space between all systems equally 1 Press and hold the control win option mac key 2 Drag the upper left corner of the second system Adjust the spacing between the first and second systems 3 Release the mouse button and the control win option mac key The spacing between all the systems 1s the same as the spacing between the first and second systems Check the bottom of the page to make sure that the last system still falls within the bottom margin You might have to work at it a bit to get everything properly spaced So far you ve only dealt with vertical space If in the course of laying out the page systems have moved away from the left margin you can apply the same techniques to horizontal movement Remember whenever you drag a system while holding the control win option mac key that system and all subsequent systems are affected Therefore if you want to realign the systems with the left margin without affecting the
204. ge has numerous systems because you were moving measures around somewhere earlier in the score Text Elements Text Elements defines score titles headers footers page numbers dates times and copyright notices in your score Each item can use a different font and items that contain several lines such as the Title can have different fonts defined for each line score Titles Three lines are provided for score titles Text is automatically centered and appears only on the first page The title section can use a Text Elements different font selection for each of the three available lines but O Score Title Center Ok the first line is special Font CO Instructions Left Title CO Composer Right Title Cancel changes applied to the first line CO Header 1 Header 2 automatically apply the same font C Footer 1 Footer 2 Help selection to the second and third lines whenever the first line is changed This provides a shortcut to change the title section quickly Eo i Justify Flip an even add pages Page P Instructions 3 Left Instructions appear on the left start on page Date D l p 2 Center side and are left justified for the r longest line but center justified in O Right page oreste 9 relationship to each other Three lines are provided and each line can have its own font selection Font selections act independently of other lines C Copyright Notice Font Instructions appear on the first page only The
205. generate the metronome click with your synthesizer or drum machine Drum machines are a common choice for a MIDI click but you can choose any sound or patch you like The Pitch field in the Click Setup dialog responds to MIDI Input If your synthesizer can send note data to MusicTime Deluxe you can set the choice for the Bar and Beat clicks by playing the note You can use any keyboard or controller to send notes Thru to your click choice First before you open the Click Setup dialog be sure Thru is turned on and set to the same channel and device as your choice for click l In the Click Setup dialog highlight BAS the Pitch field tab will advance E rece c mp om through each field and then play spate do s Or me m ji notes into MusicTime Deluxe The erus EI Pitch field will display the pitch Beat cick A OB ao zz 15 of notes as they are entered and the sound will be sent thru on the channel and device selected for Only Use Click When Recording Pre rall Playback Click Thru The Menus When using MIDI the velocity and duration settings may have different effects for each sound The Bar Click is used at the beginning of every measure The Beat Click will sound for the number of clicks assigned to the measure in the Time Signature dialog This number will frequently be the same as the top portion of the time signature MIDI Setup The MIDI Setup dialog box is used to MIDI Setup manage Mus
206. hange the staff will be enabled This option creates only an additional staff and does not move notes onto the staff or change any of the notation for the selected staff If the staff 1s added above the new staff the new staff 1s given a treble clef Changing to a Piano Staff and choosing add below will create a new staff with a Bass clef Note If you wish to create a piano part from a single staff you should consider using the Split Staff operation Split Staff lets you move notes onto the new staff at the same time the staff 1s created Add a Staff to this Piano Staff If an existing piano staff with fewer than four staves 1s selected before opening the Add Staff dialog the option for Add a staff to this Piano Staff will be enabled Organ arrangements sometimes need more than two staves Piano parts for two players can also use the four stave system The voicing defaults when adding a third or fourth stave will use voices normally intended for the bass clef of a piano staff The Menus The third staff will use voice 7 by default and the fourth staff will use voice 8 These are the default assignments for notes entered in all voices or Voice view Cross staff beaming requires piano staves To create a beam between two staves in a Piano Staff you must use the same voice for notes in both staves For instance to beam an eighth note on the treble staff to another eighth on the bass clef you must enter or change both notes
207. he back space delete key Select All The Select All command will select all of the available data in the current score Select AII is limited by the current voice indication for the score and will only affect notes and rests for the current voice Graphics and text boxes are not assigned to voices but are placed by default into voice one An exception to this rule is lyrics and chords which use voices for determining vertical position The voice selector will affect lyrics and chords when altering selected data Nudge Although the Nudge commands exist as menu items the keyboard shortcuts are the preferred method to nudge objects The four nudge commands are Nudge Left control command open bracket Nudge Right control command close bracket Nudge Up shift control command Nudge Down shift control command The basic nudge operations move data left or right and up or down A single nudge unit left or right is one pixel Nudge requires a selection Use the arrow tool to select one or more areas using the standard selection technique Additional areas can be defined if you hold the shift key down before selecting again Isolated notes and rests selected using the shift select method will also respond to the nudge command but will only move to the right or left See the section on selecting for more information Nudge Left and Right The Nudge Left and Right commands provide a powerful method for moving selec
208. he melisma through all tied notes and connects with the previous lyric syllable Fil Lyric Line 1 E Lyric Line 2 Lyric Line 3 Lyric Line 4 Lyric Line 5 Lyric Line 6 Lyric Line Lyric Line amp Adding Additional Lyric Lines You can add a maximum of eight lyric lines to MusicTime Deluxe To add additional line use the Lyrics position indicator and click on the lyric line number under the arrow Select the lyric line Ub A FE Editing Lyrics The back space delete key will erase lyric characters starting at the current lyric position and continue backwards to the beginning of the lyric When the lyric has been completely deleted the back space delete key will back up to the previous lyric and continue the process An alternate method is to select the lyric text and use the standard cut or clear commands Moving Through the Lyric Line To advance to the next lyric and select that lyric for editing use the tab key To back up to the previous lyric use shift tab Changing Lyric Fonts To change the font information for all lyrics on one line select the lyric tool and select the lyric line on the Lyric Positioning arrow Go to the Text menu Fonts and select the desired font The font selected for line 1 will be the assigned font for the other lines unless specfied otherwise EN Using the Palettes To change a single syllable or multiple syllables select the word or syllables you wish to change W
209. he note heads if all stems of the end notes face the same direction If the stems face the opposite direction the slur will be placed on the top Holding down shift will place the slur on the other side as the default The end points of slurs attempt to stay attached to the original notes and readjust when the notes are moved except when control key is down or Auto Guess Beam is OFF The selection for creating a slur should be made by highlighting the entire group of notes the slur appears i over or under Make sure the first and last notes which define the slur are fully selected within the same rectangle Additional note groups can be selected using the shift key before defining the selections Shift selection of individual notes can also be used for creating slurs but take care A slur will be generated between every pair of shift selected notes Shift clicking on the beginning and ending note head of a phrase will slur that phrase Beam Notes The Beam Notes item has a sub menu containing the four beaming operations used within MusicTime Deluxe For more information on changing Beams see also Attributes gt Beams Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe and Spacing Defaults Beam Group creates brackets or beams over all selected notes and rests and also creates beams across barlines Beam On Beat uses the time signature and beat location for the selected notes to determine a
210. he selected notes and restores full performance and duration values Make Tab Make Tab creates tablature staff for fretted instruments and converts notation from a regular staff to the tablature staff The tablature numbers indicate the corresponding fret locations selected for the tablature staff s tuning Make Tab requires that a Tab staff be created by using the Add Staff dialog or Tablature Staff To convert standard notation into tablature select the staff or notes to be converted and then use Make Tablaute The converted notes will then appear on the new tab staff MusicTime Deluxe does its best to give you a logical fingering for the notated music It does not however know the neck position in which you want it played Make Tab lets you transcribe a selected section into The Menus tablature and set the lowest fret to be used Setup Tablature To set the fret position High String Pitches Presets ergo Mountain minor G modal e Adda new blank tablature staff with the Add Staff command or convert a standard notation staff Properties into tablature with the Tablature Staff command mb SES Is e In the standard notation staff select the notes you d like to transcribe as tablature If you ve already converted the staff select only those notes that you want to re transcribe at a different neck position e Choose Make Tab from the Notes menu The Make Tablature dialog appears MOTE Font setting applie
211. he time signature for a measure after pasting will not move notes to other measures See the section on Time Signatures for more information Measure widths and number of measures per system will need to be defined for each new area either before or after pasting New measures and pages created in MusicTime Deluxe when pasting will use the last existing system before the paste and create new systems with the same number of measures If a paste creates new pages the page layout of the last page before the paste will be copied for all the new pages created Clear Clear is similar to Cut with one very important difference the cleared data is not copied to the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard A Clear command can be undone but the cleared area is not stored for further use in the clipboard and the current clipboard contents remain Clear does not have a command key equivalent but instead uses the back space delete key Select All The Select All command will select all of the available data in the current score Select All is limited by the current voice indication for the score and will only affect notes and rests for the current voice Graphics and text boxes are not assigned to voices but are placed by default into voice one An exception to this rule is lyrics and chords which use voices for determining vertical position The voice selector will affect lyrics and chords when altering selected data Nudge Although the Nudge c
212. head A selection rectangle appears around the note s head indicating it s been selected If you continue to hold shift down you can click on additional note heads as well Far easier however is to hold the mouse button while you move the arrow pointer over additional notes and rests As the arrow passes over either notes or rests each item becomes selected If you make a mistake and select an item unintentionally you can deselect the item by holding down the shift key and clicking on the item If you release the shift key and click all selections are cleared Be careful when first beginning the shift selection process to click directly on a note head or rest If you miss and click anywhere else you will see a plus sign entered where you clicked This indicates the beginning of a shift selection for a region and is not the same as shift selecting notes See Surrr SELECTING RzGioNs earlier in this chapter Shift selecting notes is particularly useful for flipping the tie direction within a chord without changing the stem direction When MusicTime Deluxe ties notes together in chords it tries to arrive at logical solutions for the tie directions but you may need to change some for your score By shift selecting the two notes that are tied you can use control command T and the tie direction will change Shift selecting notes becomes more natural the more you use the technique Before long you ll be gliding
213. hear your score played back via MIDI Playback always starts from the beginning of the measure that contains the blinking insertion cursor To set the start point click with the arrow tool in the measure you d like to start with If you don t click on a note rest or other object the insertion cursor will appear there Playback starts at the beginning of that measure not from the insertion point The Stop Button The Stop button stops MIDI playback and returns to the measure where playback was previously started The Thru Button Ibn ie The Turu button has two functions It allows you to turn on and off MusicTime Deluxe s MIDI Thru and it shows you what the current MIDI Taru channel is When Turu is on any MIDI data received by MusicTime Deluxe is simultaneously transmitted via your computer s MIDI output on the channel and port displayed on the button In the MIDI Setup dialog you can assign a specific channel and port Always Send Out or set the THRU feature to automatically switch to the channel and port of the staff you re working on Follow Current Staff For a complete explanation of the MIDI Thru feature see MIDI Setup in the section on the Serur menu The Zoom Button C1 The Zoom tool is located between the Turu button and the MEASURE INDICATOR To use the Zoom tool Click on the Zoom tool and a zoom slider will appear Select the amount of magnification and the view will respond accordingly Setting the Zoom a
214. height of the ending The control point at the lower left sets the distance between the top staff line and where the vertical line for the ending begins Click and drag at either of these locations to adjust either part of the ending A special control point on the right side of the ending will change the measure ending to either open or closed depending on the current condition The status of the Lock Ending checkbox will not prevent this adjustment If the control option key is held down while changing an ending using any of the control points all other endings in that system will be adjusted at the same time This remains true for control points on both the left and right sides Coda Phrases The Coda Phrases dialog contains various musical phrases used to direct the player to another section in the score When Play Them is selected phrases entered with this dialog will also control plavback Note Coda and segno signs also exist in the Symbols palette If you enter a coda or segno indication using the Symbols palette the section will not be interpreted during playback Only codas and segnos entered with the Coda Phrases dialog can affect playback Also included are the words Coda Segno and Fine which can be selected and placed at the appropriate measure You can select only one phrase at a time The Style Font and Size menus determine the appearance of the phrase selected Font choices apply to all phrases Coda Phra
215. hen lyrics have been selected font changes will be applied only to the selected text To define a new font for an entire line select the lyric line you want to change using the voice indicator Select the lyric tool and then use the Text menu to change the font information for that lyric line Changes intended to affect an entire lyric line can be done either before or after entering the line Note If you need to use different fonts throughout your score for either special words or entire lines you may find it easiest to enter all the lyrics first and change the font information afterward Changing a font style in the middle of entering lyrics does not continue that font style for the rest of the lyric line but will affect only the lyric attached to the font changed note Lyric Entry Overview Use the space bar to go to the next note that can accept a lyric whether there is a lyric there or not Notes tied from the left are skipped Use shift space bar to go to tied notes Control option space bar results in a hard space embedded in the lyric data adds a hyphen between lyrics dash or minus key Control option embeds a hard hyphen within the lyric data Tab gets you to the next lyric in the piece Shift tab moves you to the previous lyric The back space delete key deletes lyric characters and moves to the previous lyric if there are no characters left to delete in the curren
216. her controller either in real or step time Or you can open and automatically transcribe a song file saved in either the Master Tracks Pro Standard MIDI or MusicXML file format The tutorial describes some of these methods but you ll begin by opening a Standard MIDI file Opening a File MusicTime Deluxe can open song files saved in any one of these formats native MusicTime Deluxe files MusicTime files Rhapsody files Master Tracks Pro files and Standard MIDI files When you open a Master Tracks or Standard MIDI sequence file MusicTime Deluxe assigns each track of the file to its own staff In addition MusicTime Deluxe will automatically guess the durations of the notes and rests and beam the appropriate notes when Auto Guess Beam in the Setup menu is on 1 Choose Open from the File menu The Open File dialog appears 2 Navigate to the folder on your hard disk where you placed the MusicTime Deluxe documenta tion and open the folder 3 Open the subfolder called Example Files Tutorial 4 Windows only In the lower left corner of the Open FILE dialog there is a selection labeled list Files of Type The default selection is Scores enc mus mto rhp Click on this selection to display additional file types The complete list will include MIDI Files mid mff MT Pro Files mts MusicXML and All Files Select MIDI Files from the drop down list and the Open Files Dialog will change to display on
217. hese symbols first select the symbol from the Tools palette and then drag with the pencil tool to insert the symbol into your score In the case of the slanting symbol the symbol height can be controlled as well as its length You can further modify the horizontal line symbol to have notches indicating that the pedal is to be briefly lifted at certain moments To add a notch click with the mouse still using the same graphic tool at the desired location along the line A notch will be added at that location Add as many notches as you desire The notches can be dragged to new locations on the line by clicking directly Zu on them with the arrow tool and then dragging Ottava alto basso The ottava indicates notes that are to be played an octave higher or lower than notated Adding an ottava indication to the score will add a broken line following the indication This broken line will continue to the end of the page and requires using the ending marker or notch to properly terminate both the broken line and the resulting effect on MIDI Playback Ottava indications always affect MIDI playbac MIDI Ottava end marker Move the crosshair to the measure where you want the ottava line to stop and click directly on the broken line When the ending indication is placed on top of the broken line the line will terminate at the ending mark and MIDI playback will resume the standard pitch reference following the ending
218. hics within the score to indicate the playing style Durations should also be considered Synthesizer patches may sound better when durations are increased and actually overlap but if the instrument you are notating can play only single melody lines such overlapping durations will not look correct in MusicTime Deluxe Change the duration times before saving the file for MusicTime Deluxe and you are likely to get dramatically different results Changing the duration for an entire piece to 80 or even 75 of the current duration can often clean up a part that might otherwise require extensive editing in MusicTime Deluxe Usually a MIDI sequencing program makes such operations simple and quick Although staves can be split in MusicTime Deluxe it may also be far easier to separate left and right hand piano parts into two different tracks in your sequence before opening the file in MusicTime MIDI and MusicTime Deluxe Deluxe If the piano part requires cross staff beaming you can still turn the top staff into a piano staff and then copy and paste the other hand into the correct staff This can be easier and faster than trying to revoice and align both hands in MusicTime Deluxe starting with a single staff MIDI Clock Ticks This information is provided for those few who wish to know more about what clock tick durations will be used for notes when saving an MusicTime Deluxe file as a MIDI or Master Tracks Pro
219. hords Hold the shift key and click on the notes that make up the chord When you release the shift key the notes will be scored as a chord You can also use the shift key to enter chords from your QWERTY keyboard Changing the Octave The Menus You can click any of the keys in the Keyboard window with your mouse but if you re using the QWERTY keyboard your range is limited to an octave and a fourth from C to the F in the next highest octave To shift the range up or down by octaves drag the little QWERTY keyboard icon in the Keyboard window You can drag the keyboard icon left or right in one octave increments Watch Staves Setup When you play back a score in MusicTime Deluxe the Keyboard window will indicate which notes are being played The Watch Staves Windows or Setup Mac button opens a dialog that allows you to choose which of the score s staves will be displayed in the Keyboard window during playback If the notes in the score have been set to a particular color the appropriate keys in the Keyboard window will light up with that color when the notes play This comes in handy while viewing different staves or voices simultaneously on the keyboard Displaying Notes on the Keyboard MusicTime Deluxe s ability to display the score s notes on the keyboard can be a useful educational tool but if you re playing the piece back at tempo it may be difficult to see the individual notes and chords If y
220. ic Grand Pig Rock Organ Elecric Bass Pici SynthStrings 1 Tenor Sax Calliope Proteus 2 ims Reed Organ Slap Bass 1 Choir Aahs Charang um Roland U 220 Tom Slap Bass 2 English Harm VoiceLead Synth Bass 1 Fifths Saw ae Fn um Tanga Accordion Synth Bass 2 Clarinet Brass amp Lead Generic 8x8 Cymbal Acoustic Nylon C New Age Pad oy IIT et Moise fal Acoustic Steel Gu Vinla Trombone Hum Warmpad SNEERNNNNIINEENENGS lectric Clean Gui Cantrabass Muted Trumpt Pan Flute Choir Pad Marimba Elacric Muted Gui Tremla Strings Bowed Pad Phone Ring Xylophone Overdriven Guita Pizzicato Strings Brass Section Shakuhachi Metallic Pad Bagpipe Bells Orchestral Harp SnthBrass 1 Halo Pad Fiddle SnthBrass 2 Sweep Pad Shanai_ Gun Shot MIDI Channel OO M MM MM Gain Pan Reverb Level SIE elle m m zim e EIC Lr n o NW Ole ni m EES o a wi a a oW Electric Jazz Guit Cello Tuba Recorder PolySnth Pad E i B Cancel ok The Menus Adjust the Gain volume by moving the slider If the slider is all the way to the left then the gain is at maximum Adjust the Pan to determine speaker balance left right or somewhere in between Adjust the Reverb Level as desired Repeat the process for each staff and voice Click OK You may make all of your instrument assignments in one use of the dialog and then hit OK There is no need to have
221. icTime Deluxe s MIDI com n munications In order to use MusicTime Deluxe you need to configure the software Port A Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth ze Transmit Sync tha wrk mopedy wih yonr 1 em cn G5 Wave sw Clann with your MIDI Interface or sound card if you are unsure about your interface connections For more info on this see Record Port Chapter 1 MIDI In BE Audio Device Receive Sync Port none The MIDI Setup dialog box contains several drop down list boxes These list boxes allow you to route the flow of MIDI data to and from MusicTime Deluxe MIDI Thru Follow Current Staff CO Always send aut L qc E ES S 2 10111213 1415 16 MIDI In Record Device The drop down list labeled Record is MusicTime Deluxe s MIDI in device MusicTime Deluxe uses this Syne Source device to receive MIDI data from your S Internal master keyboard or other MIDI master Pi MIDI Thru MIDI Thru lets you send the MIDI data coming in on the record device back out over either device and on any channel About Thru Most MIDI controllers are also sound generating instruments like synthesizers or samplers If you are using only one synthesizer you may not need to use Thru If you have more than one synthesizer however Thru can let you play one synthesizer with another Unless you want to hear both synthesizers playing together you should either turn the master controller s Local Control o
222. icks will return you to the starting location MEN Using the Palettes Note If a mark is adjusted into the area of a staff either above or below the mark may seem to disappear The mark is only covered by the other staff and you can continue to make adjustments The staff can be moved to reveal the mark If marks are added both below and above a note hold down both the shift and control option keys to adjust the vertical position for the mark below the note Removing Marks To remove or replace a mark apply the same mark or the new mark to the note Adding the same mark a second time removes the mark Adding a new mark to a note replaces the previous mark If more than one mark is called for additional marks can be added by clicking at the desired location Marks entered into the score in this manner that 1s without being attached to a note become graphics and will not affect MIDI playback Marks as graphics also behave differently when measure widths are adjusted and will move independently from notes The Marks 2 palette is used for accents and articulation and can optionally affect MIDI playback Double clicking on any of the marks in the Marks 2 palette opens the MIDI PLAvBACK SErriNGS dialog box Check the Play Marks checkbox and MusicTime Deluxe interprets accents and articulations during playback Accents and MIDI You can configure the accent marks to apply an additional fixed amount to each note s recorded velo
223. ickup Bar A pickup bar should show the time signature for the next measure even when the measure used for the pickup does not contain the same number of beats Sat Time Signatura 1 With the first measure still selected choose Time ee to 1 SIGNATURE from the Measures menu again The range of measures should still be from Measure 1 to Measure 1 and the time signature el Fe E 6 8 mm 1 indicated as 1 8 fle B 2 At the bottom of the Set Time Signature dialog Click 1 times per measure click in the box next to Pickup Bar A V should appear in the checkbox Hide Meter M Pickup Bar 3 Click OK to close the dialog with this change Now the time signature in the first measure will say 6 8 but in fact the time signature of the first measure is still 1 8 In addition the time signature in the next measure will have been removed Selecting Pickup Bar will always hide the time signature you select and display the time signature from the next measure instead Entering a Note Now that you ve created the needed pickup bar you need to enter the note missing from Johnny mid 1 Get the Notes palette up on your screen Tutorial If the Clefs palette is still showing you can just click to the left of the word Clefs to get back to the Notes palette In fact you can access any of MusicTime Deluxe s palettes this way Click to the right of the palette name to cycle through the palettes in order Click to the
224. ied in the dynamics ranges The Humanize feature uses more random attack velocities and volume velocities Play Pedal Markings activates the sustain pedal controller 64 when indicated and releases when indicated in the score Play Slurs sends MIDI legato to controller 68 This adjusts the attack and decay of the notes in the slur to make them more legato or smooth Play Hairpins contains two options The first Ramp to Ending Dynamic enables MusicTime Deluxe to scan ahead to the next dynamic marking and smoothly crescendo or decresceno The second option Always Change Dynamic By makes all hairpins perform in the same way increasing or decreasing by n velocity from the last dynamic marking before the hairpin The Menus Play Marks allows you to change velocity and duration for specific accent and articulation markings View Menu The View menu contains several methods to select both how the score is viewed and what items are to be shown within the score Show Hide Show Hide contains checkboxes to either show or hide notational elements and page layout options such as arulers and page margins To show any of the selections in the Show Hide dialog enable the checkbox next to the item that is click in the box so a 3 appears With the exception of rulers all selections in the Show Hide dialog affect Show Items only the current score and are saved for each score C Rulers in inches M Staff Names First Pag
225. ifferent parts or for differentiating between voices on a single staff Situations may arise however where it is necessary to hide If your printer is capable of printing color or grayscale images and you want a color score to print in black and white deselect the In Printout checkbox and the score will print in black and white Rests Rests for each voice in MusicTime Deluxe can be hidden The default has the rests showing for voice and 5 as these two voices are used for the treble and bass clef of the piano staff Hiding rests in MusicTime Deluxe is provided because different uses for each voice may arise If a second voice is needed for only part of a measure it may not be appropriate to use a rest in the first portion of that measure At other times perhaps for the same instrument rests may well be needed for more than one voice indication In many cases the voice being indicated may technically be considered the same in regards to the actual music indicated but the need to sometimes hide or show the rests will require using two different voices to achieve that result With eight voices provided MusicTime Deluxe gives you plenty of choices to cover even the most complex voicing situations See Chapter 8 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe for some examples using hidden rests Show Control Points Spacing Defaults This shortcut toggles between showing and not showing the control Beam Stem Length half spaces
226. ift Accidental Left C Set Note Head Type J MusicTime Deluxe automatically offsets accidentals M Cancel for chords but can also be manually adjusted if KR you desire The higher the number the more the accidental shifts to the left Note If you flip stem direction or use Change Pitch or Transpose accidental offsets will The Menus revert to MusicTime Deluxe s default placement set Play State Set Play State allows you to turn on or off selected notation or measures of notation in your score The default for standard notes is Play To turn selected notation off click the Mute radio button To turn the selected notation back on click the Play radio button Note Cue notes are set to the Mute state by default and must be play enabled before you can hear them we ange Note Attribute f Set Stem Height Set Note Head Type 7 Spaces Different note head types can be freely mixed within e Gees the score for any staff or measure without limitation Note head types remain set until altered again with Apply height to beamed notes the Change Note Attributes dialog Shift Accidental Left 0 The ten available head types are standard diamond triangle square X circle X plus slash hollow A Set Play State Mute diamond and stem only IV Set Note Head Typ the beam is first created but that default can be altered Cancel i FOK using the Beam dialog to any
227. iirut uie ardet butt taqu epos rad EDEN E 100 Print and Print Selection ME 100 Kee 100 el 100 jc 100 o O 101 v 101 asl tege EE 101 Autospace On While Pasting 00nn0annannnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnnnnrrnnrnnenerrenne 101 Autospace Off While FS WING E 101 9 102 SECTA 102 Klo Let 102 Nudge Left and Ten wc oexcicdcsxwenssctensee veccnsieceaismeasvbanstiienstinnedpalnsinnwctasesbonniveesswactoesent 102 Nudge Up and asset E E 103 h Table of Contents PMU SS Seco pas naa ba acters tie REIN NUMEN eU MM TU Been eee 103 IS RTT TK 103 gcc 104 DCEO VOICE T T m 104 EIERE 105 Sit Leier 105 elle Wee 105 SES MVS OIC CELON EE 105 Kei EN 106 TIO e 106 Tie Directions ER E E Naaa 106 Adjusting Ties Using the Mouse 106 A 4b gylcTee e 107 lUr e 107 Using the Slur Notes command au oues cnntscaveneonnteccntennctinedentlecenacedetedereinecsaneis 107 Eet NOGO ee 108 Sun BE e e MERC 108 Beam on Beal ern O Ee 109 Change Pitch nee 109 chande Nue RT 110 MCE INOS REN en seca secananseinarsenecnmtauncna Fa ptr aea
228. in the matrix of names When the focus is set to the program name matrix you can use the arrow keys to select different programs Assigning Different Programs for Each Voice The Voice text box in the upper right corner of the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog lets you choose which voice the current program selection will affect When Voice is selected changing the program selection changes all other voices to the same selection To make individual selections for each of the eight voices select the voice from the voice menu and then make your selection MusicTime Deluxe allows you to use a different MIDI Channel and program for each of the eight voices Normal use of the voices will not require unique sounds for each voice When writing for two instruments on a single staff you can assign a different program name for each voice used Note To use different program names you must also use different MIDI channels for each voice assigned a different sound For example if you used voice 1 for a trumpet and voice 2 for a trombone you would need to assign voice 1 to one MIDI channel and voice 2 to a different MIDI channel If the other voices were unused they should be assigned to none to avoid interfering with other The Menus Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings AcsteelGuit ElecJazz auit ElecCleanGuit ElecMubesuik Oyerdrivecuit Music Box Vibraphone Marimba Acou Bass ElecBassFing ElecBassPick Fr
229. in the score to deselect Measure 4 Align Spacing The next step after editing a measure and using ALIGN PLAYBACK is to correct the spacing in the measure When you first opened Johnny mid MusicTime Deluxe automatically justified the notes and rests after guessing and beaming This occurred because AutoSpace was enabled in the Preferences While editing individual measures in your score we instructed you to disable AutoSpace since the ALIGN SPACING operation should be used as a final step to ensure correct spacing for the entire system ALIGN SPACING compares all of the notes for each instrument playing during the selected measure s and then aligns the spacing for all instruments When editing measures after recording or opening MIDI files AutoSpace will continue to adjust the spacing as notes are added or removed from a measure but only an ALIGN SPACING operation will correctly space the entire system It is considered a good habit to periodically select and use ALIGN SPACING while working on a section You could use Select All and justify an entire score in one operation but it is better to use ALIGN SPACING only for a selected range of measures clearly visible on the screen This lets you see the exact changes the ALIGN SPACING operation made to those measures and also allows you to Undo those changes if you wish to keep the previous spacing Or you may decide to make some further manual changes after using ALIGN SPACING
230. ing the number of measures per system can also change the number of pages depending on your selections and the number of measures and systems on each page MusicTime Q All remaining systems Deluxe will attempt to keep the number of systems on each page the same As measures are needed to fulfill the measures per system request however unneeded systems will be removed from the end of the score Only this system You can also change the number of measures in any system without using a dialog by placing the insertion cursor in that system and then using the bracket keys and to move measures to and from the following system The left bracket key will move measures onto the next system The right bracket key will move measures onto the current system When moving measures in this fashion only the last system in the score is affected Rather than continuing to add them to last system however MusicTime Deluxe will create new systems and pages when needed The Menus New systems are created when the number of measures in the last system equals the number of measures in the previous system That is if the last system in your score has only one measure and the system before that has three measures you can flow two measures forward before MusicTime Deluxe will generate a new system New pages are created when creating a new system would create more systems than the previous page This prevents a situation where the last pa
231. instructions section can be used for indicating a tempo or style additional composer information or anything desired Composer s Name Four lines are available for the right side of the first score page Traditionally this location 1s used for the composer s name but can be used for any text desired Each line can use a different font The Menus selection and selections are independent of the other lines Headers and Footers Headers appear along the top of a page Footers appear at the bottom of a page You can create two different header items and footer items for each score Header and footer contents can combine text with automatic options for adding page numbers and time indications Justify options can place each header and footer on either side or centered Flip on even odd pages takes the page number into account when placing header and footer items on the page This is especially useful if you will ultimately be printing two sided pages and binding your score For example if you use a right justified header to print a page number on your score and check Flip on even odd pages the first page number will appear on page in the upper right corner Page 2 s number will appear in the upper left corner This placement will hold true for all subsequent odd and even numbered pages Page Date and Time P is used to indicate the current page number D is used to display the current date in the format mm dd yy T is u
232. ion can be imported along with the note data but MusicTime Deluxe will not display the data Editing controller changes or program changes recorded into a staff is not provided for in MusicTime Deluxe However if such information is added with the MIDI tool the added indication can always be removed Unless you really need extensive controller information in your file you are better off removing the information before scoring the file in MusicTime Deluxe The Record Setup dialog can be configured to ignore controller information when recording and importing MIDI files If only Notes is checked in the REconp Setup dialog other information in the MIDI file or sent from the synthesizer will be ignored Sequencing Tips For the best results when converting MIDI files in MusicTime Deluxe prepare the MIDI information ahead of time The more time spent defining note durations and timing before MusicTime Deluxe uses the file the more accurate the transcription Quantize operations greatly increase the accuracy with which MusicTime Deluxe can translate your files but may require sacrificing some timing consid erations added for better sounding playback In particular musical lines played far ahead or behind the beat are best moved onto the beat In fact many sequencers use a slide function to move notes forward or backward in time For notational purposes it is usually clearer to notate with straight durations and then use either text or grap
233. ion transposes individual instruments staves within a score to their proper key when playing back For instance you could write a band arrangement with each instrument in its notated key and by setting the playback transposition of each instrument be able to playback the score at sounding pitch Another example concerns writing guitar transcriptions Since the guitar sounds an octave lower than written you need to set the playback key to Octave Lower C to hear your transcription playback in the right octave MIDI Channel Chnl When a cell in the Channel column is clicked the MIDI Device Instrument dialog will appear See MIDI Device Instrument Settings for more information Program Name The Program Name field selects a patch setting for your synthesizer The selected program or patch is one of the 128 numbers used in the MIDI protocol and the selection is sent to the synthesizer whenever playback begins from the start of the score The Menus The Program Name field has two display settings Change these settings by clicking on the Program Name or Prg at the top of the Staff Sheet The width of the column used for the program name will expand and collapse when toggling between the two display settings When expanded the Program Name column uses a text description for the currently selected program number and MIDI device The collapsed view uses only the MIDI number reference In either view the indication will be f
234. ith MusicTime Deluxe Allow yourself sufficient time to do the tutorial You can stop at any point save your work and come back to it later Note MusicTime Deluxe operates identically on Windows and Macintosh though its dialog boxes vary slightly in appearance In this book illustrations of the MusicTime Deluxe user interface vary from chapter to chapter representing both Windows XP and Mac OS X Keystrokes are listed as Windows Mac References to a Mac OS command key indicate the key marked Running MusicTime Deluxe The first time you run MusicTime Deluxe you will see the Score window the Toolbar and the Notes palette The Score window contains a blank piano staff You ll create your scores here The Score window s Toolbar gives you access to tools arrow eraser pencil and Seel b zz provides information about the score current voice measure number and RH MIDI Thru channel It also has buttons for playing and recording music You will use many of these tools as you work through the tutorial The Notes palette lets you select notes and rests to enter in the score There are several other palettes with other tools and symbols Music gets into MusicTime Deluxe in several ways You can enter music one note at a time with your mouse in much the same way that you would write music with a pen and manuscript paper You can record music using a MIDI keyboard a MIDI application a QWERTY keyboard or ot
235. ithout using the hairpin This requires a little more time but ultimately lets you to create a conductor s version of the score that also sounds correct Trill and Arpeggio indications Several tools are provided for entering trill and arpeggio indications but these tools can also be used to construct a variety of other indications useful for many contemporary and classical notation needs The two trill indications can only be inserted horizontally but the two vertical wavy lines while normally used to notate arpeggios can be rotated to any angle and used to notate anything desired Trill and arpeggio indications do not affect MIDI Playback Adding a Trill Arpeggio or Wavy Line Using the pencil tool select the item you want to add from the Tools palette The pointer changes to a crosshair Move the crosshair to the point where you want to add the indication and click and drag with the mouse The two trill indications can be added only from left to right and the indication always remains horizontal When adding one of the wavy lines used for arpeggios and other indications you can MEN Using the Palettes enter the indication using whatever angle you like Adjusting Trills and Arpeggios lines Both trills and arpeggio lines have a control point located at either end Trills can have their length adjusted after insertion inserted by clicking and dragging the right side control point You can change C both the length and
236. just how many measures are used in each Adjust For Lyrics system This adjustment will be performed on a system by system All Staves basis and will use the note density for each system to decide if the number of measures can be increased or decreased Adjust for Lyrics This option checked by default will consider lyrics connected to notes within the measure when making spacing changes and try to avoid overlapping lyrics when altering note locations All Staves This selection is checked by default In normal practice the notes on all staves are considered when using Align Spacing In some instances you may wish to change only the selected staves without changing other staves in the system Uncheck the All Staves option if you do not want MusicTime Deluxe to align the entire system General Spacing Guidelines Although several options exist within the Align Spacing dialog the correct choice will depend on how much prior spacing has been applied to the score Generally speaking the options to alter the number or width of measures should be performed only before graphics and lyrics have been added This ensures that any prior spacing for these items will not be altered in the process After a general arrangement for your score has been decided Adjust Measure Widths and Adjust Measures Per System should not be used again or you may lose spacing considerations that Align Spacing does not calculate Finally after adding lyrics an
237. l be applied to all recorded data and imported MIDI or Master Tracks Pro files If an imported or real time recording is guessed incorrectly you can change the transcription value and use Guess Durations again on all or part of the score Transcribing Triplets Record Setup Record Items When using Guess Durations on triplets the result will depend on how accurately the triplets were entered Step M Notes W Channel Pressure vi Program Change v Controllers entered triplets can be accurately guessed by MusicTime Vi Pitch Bend W Modulation Deluxe down to a sixteenth note triplet but only if the duration is repeatedly used When triplet values are Split notes below C3 on to bottom staff combined with other durations or alternate with rests the Enable Enter Key to Start Stop Recording guess function will be less able to account for them and the result will vary according to the note s position Transcription Settings Create no notes shorter than eebe When recording data into MusicTime Deluxe in real time DEG EEN it is important to play with great emphasis on maintaining D ELS __ Ignore Triplets the timing if you want the transcription to be as accurate as Eer Playback After Greng possible If a sequencing program such as Master Tracks Pro is available you can often improve the transcription within MusicTime Deluxe even further by first opening the file in the sequencer program and q
238. l staves If you wish to change the key signature for only one staff select that staff before opening the Transpose Key Signature dialog If more than one staff is selected a check mark placed in the Just this staff box will only change the key signature for the lowest staff in the selection Ignore Instrument Transposition Keys MusicTime Deluxe will insert the appropriate key signature depending on the staff s playback transposition set via the Staff Sheet Window For example if one staff s playback transposi tion is set for a Bb instrument and one in C then inserting a key signature of G Major will result in the first staff having an A Major signature while the second will have a G Major signature Transposed Score If you select Ignore Instrument Transposition Keys all staves to have the same key signature C Score Move Notes The Menus If you want to transpose the pitch for notes as well as change From Measure 1 to 1 the key signature place a check mark in the Move Notes checkbox and choose the direction the transpose operation should move the notes Move Notes will also transpose Chord symbols and Guitar Fret symbols Set Key Signature f No double barline Just delete the current Key Signature lJust this staff _ ignore Instrument Transposition Keys Move Notes Up HH f Move Endings and Symbols L Cancel jJ Move Endings and Symbols Normally when you Move Not
239. laces Coda phrases within the O To Coda O Fine SCH selected measure at a default location and can be None adjusted Each phrase however can be adjusted only riseg MOTE Font applies to all phrases within the measure it was added to and will not move beyond that measure The Menus To move the phrase click and hold on the phrase and move it to the desired location Measure Numbers Measure numbers can be added or removed at any time Measure numbers showing in the score will also appear on printouts Font attributes for measure numbers are selected by clicking the Font button Click the Add Numbers checkbox to activate the measure numbers function Measure numbers can be shown for every measure every nth measure or at the beginning of each system If you select Each system the numbers will automatically update when the layout is changed to show the new measure number beginning each system The first measure number is optional and hidden by default Enable Start with First Bar if you want a number over the first measure When the first measure of your score 1s a pickup measure click the First Bar is a Pickup S I DICH EM checkbox The first measure will not have a number and the second measure in the score Add Numbers Every m E CK will be called measure one O Each system cancel Note The First Bar is a Pickup selection will Help affect the time signature settings for the first _ Start with First Measure
240. layback Settings and Staff Sheet settings can change the velocity or perceived volume Velocity is a MIDI parameter in every note The value for Change Velocity velocity ranges between 0 and 127 but the value of 0 is special valacir Type and not used in MusicTime Deluxe a zero velocity essentially 7 NN 9 Nate On Velocities means don t play this note CO Note OFF velocities What actually happens when different velocity values are used depends entirely upon the synthesizer responding to the MIDI messages Common practice however uses velocity to control volume For more information about velocity see the appendix on MIDI Values C3 Set all values to Change to SOF current C3 Change smoothly From to C3 Add to all values Change Velocity requires a selection The dialog for changing velocity contains both ON and OFF selections These settings can be enabled independently Note Consult the documentation for your synthesizer to determine if it responds to OF or OFF Velocity or both Most synthesizers will respond to OF Velocity but very few respond to OFF Velocity There are four choices in the Change Velocity dialog Setting all velocities to the same value will ensure that all volumes are the same Changing by percentage maintains any changes made within the selection and scales the velocity levels The values range from 1 to 999 Percentage changes close to maximum or minimum will compress th
241. lect Grand Honky Tank Rhodes Chorus Piana Harpsichord Clavinet Celesta Glockenspiel Music Box Vibraphone Marimba ey lophone Tubular Bells Dulcimer Ld Hamnd Organ Perc Organ Rack Organ Churchorgan Reed Organ Accordion Harmanica Tango Accord Achy lome suit AcSteelGuit ElecJazzGuit ElecCleanGuit ElecMubesuit Overdrive Guit DistorbedGuit GuitHarmanic MIDI Channel gt Ending Dynamic Always Change Dynamic By n Play Marks including Accents and Articulations Acou Bass ElecBassFing ElecBassPick FretlessBass Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Trem Strings Fizz Strings rch Harp Timpani StrEnsmbl 1 StrEnsmbl 2 SynthStr 1 SynthSkr 2 Choir Ahhs Voice Cohs Synth Voice rch Hit Trumpet Trombone Tuba Mute Trumpet French Horn BrassSection Snthbrass 1 nthBrass 2 Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder Fan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Mone gt Square Wavre Sawtooth Caliope Chiff Lead Charang Solosynthy Brite Saw Brass amp Lead FantasiaPad Warm Pad PolySnthPad SpacevoxPad BowdGlasPad Metal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Star Theme Sitar Banjo Shamisen Kaka Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agaga Steel Drums woodblock Taiko Drum Melodic Tom Syn
242. log highlight the Pitch field tab will advance through each field and then play notes into MusicTime Deluxe The Pitch field will display the pitch of notes as they are entered and the sound will be sent thru on the channel and device selected for Thru When using MIDI the velocity and duration settings may have different effects for each sound The Menus The Bar Click is used at the beginning of every measure The Beat Click will sound for the number of clicks assigned to the measure in the Time Signature dialog This number will frequently be the same as the top portion of the time signature MIDI Setup The MIDI Setup dialog box is used to manage MusicTime Deluxe s MIDI communications In order to use MusicTime Deluxe you need to configure the software so that it works properly with your hardware Refer to the manual that came with your MIDI Interface or sound card if you are unsure about your interface connections For more info on this see Chapter 1 The MIDI Setup dialog box contains several drop down list boxes These list boxes allow you to route the flow of MIDI data to and from MusicTime Deluxe MIDI In Record Device The drop down list labeled Record 1s MusicTime Deluxe s MIDI in device MusicTime Deluxe uses this device to receive MIDI data from your master keyboard or other MIDI master controller MIDI Thru MIDI Thru lets you send the MIDI data coming in on the record device back out over
243. log for you The measure range can be changed by entering new measure numbers The arrow button to the right of the last measure selection is a shortcut for selecting to the end of the score MusicTime Deluxe provides two different methods to calculate the spacing for notes and can also alter the layout Engraver s Spacing Engraver s spacing follows more of the rules traditional in engraving practices and tries to provide a compromise between strict placement within the measure according to each note s duration and the need to more clearly show the contents of the measure without overlapping notes or accidentals Mathematically Perfect When Mathematically Perfect is selected notes are placed in the measure according to their indicated duration Accidentals are not considered and may overlap as a result of mathematical The Menus spacing Spacing Duration Adjust Measure Widths SE If the measure range is defined for entire systems either one or SCH E 22 several the option to change measure widths will be available This selection tells MusicTime Deluxe to change measure widths within the selected area according to whatever will best accommodate the notation within each measure Style Gei Engraver s Spacing O Mathematically Perfect Applv To Adjust Measures Per System Adjust Measure Widths When the measure range is only for entire systems you can optionally Adjust Measures Per System let MusicTime Deluxe ad
244. luxe In addition to opening each palette you can also switch any open palette to one of the unopened palettes Click to the left or right side of the palette s name to change the palette to the next unopened palette in the list The right side selects the next palette below the current palette name in the list and the left side selects from above You can continue using this method to access unopened palettes until you reach the desired palette Open All Palettes To open all 11 palettes use this command The palettes will be displayed on the left side and may be relocated by dragging Close All Palettes To close all 11 palettes use this command Staff Sheet The Staff Sheet configures each staff for playback and for the name displayed for the staff IS Staff Sh Seles l ua nl neet To the right of the staff number is a field in the i E M Staff Sheet that represents the play status for ES Far See Name Size Key Chnl Prg Gain 4 i Flute 3 c laz 2 each track By default each track will be play 5 p 4 kazaa a c a o l enabled and represented with a solid triangle To mute a track click directly on the triangle This turns the center of the triangle white and all MIDI playback for that track will cease Staves can be muted at any time and as many staves as desired can be muted The mute status is saved with the file The Menus Solo The solo field provides an easy method for temporarily
245. ly MIDI Files Note The first time you use the Open Fue dialog MusicTime Deluxe will display Score files Once you change the file type display the Oren Fire dialog will keep that selection until you either change the file selection type or quit MusicTime Deluxe 5 Windows and Mac Open the file Johnny mid There is a brief pause while MusicTime Deluxe converts the file and guesses the durations Johnny mid is a simple piano arrangement of When Johnny Comes Marching Home The right and left hand parts were recorded together into a single track using a MIDI sequencer and then saved as a Standard MIDI file Opening the MIDI file in MusicTime Deluxe converted that single track into a single staff each track in a sequence file is assigned to a new staff After checking the range of notes used MusicTime Deluxe selects a clef for each staff For Johnny mid MusicTime Deluxe assigned a treble clef to the staff Although this clef was correct for this example you may need to change the initial clef for your own files in the future Changing the Starting Clef 1 Click once to the right of the word Notes in the Notes palette The Clefs palette appears 2 Click the bass clef in the Clefs palette Clicking on the bass clef in Clefs Palette automatically selects the pencil tool in the Score Window The mouse pointer also changes to a bass clef when moved over the Score window This change in cursor shape indic
246. ly select the note s before using the operation Chords in the selected area will be transposed also Add Measure Measures Menu CO before Add jl measures 2 Add Measure m xoc EM Add Measure creates new measures anywhere within the All staves PNE score for either one or all staves in the system CO Only on staff The default setting for Add Measure adds one measure after the measure in which the insert point was placed The Help The Menus range of measures can be changed and new measures can be added either before or after the specified measure The lower portion of the Add Measure dialog allows the new measures to be added to all staves or on a single staff only If you select Only on staff the initial entry will be obtained from the measure in which the insert point was placed Enter a new staff number if you wish Note Staff numbers are the same as instruments in the Staff Sheet Combined staves such as a piano staff get counted as one staff even though they technically contain two or more staves Add Measure does not have an undo option but the added measures can be easily removed with the Delete Measure function if later you decide you don t need them Delete Measure Delete Measure removes measures and all data and information related to those measures from either one or all staves in a score Delete Measure is NOT UNDOABLE If you delete measures you meant to keep you can only regain those me
247. m 1 through 63 Each number represents half the distance between two staff lines The default length is 7 As in common notation practice MusicTime Deluxe adjusts stems to touch the middle staff line when the notes are in the ledger lines Enter the desired length in the highlighted box When changing the stem height of beamed notes please check the Apply Height to Beamed Notes check box Note If you flip stem direction transpose or change pitch the stem length will revert to MusicTime Deluxe s defaults To change these defaults see View gt Spacing Defaults Shift Accidental Left MusicTime Deluxe automatically offsets accidentals for chords but can also be manually adjusted if you desire The higher the number the more the accidental shifts to the left Note If you flip stem direction or use Change Pitch or Transpose accidental offsets will revert to MusicTime Deluxe s default placement Set Play State Set Play State allows you to turn on or off selected notation or measures of notation in your The Menus score The default for standard notes is Play To turn selected notation off click the Mute radio button To turn the selected notation back on click the Play radio button Note Cue notes are set to the Mute state by default and must be play enabled before you can hear them set Note Head Type Different note head types can be freely mixed within the score for any staff or measure without li
248. m the Top Staff will be copied to the extracted part The Menus Print and Print Selection The File Menu will normally display the standard Print option but MusicTime Deluxe will change the wording if a selection has been made use the arrow tool to highlight an area on a page When an area has been selected the File menu will say Print Selection For more on Printing and information on saving a selection as an a PDF or other format please see Chapter 11 Printing With MusicTime Deluxe Edit Menu Pape Setup Page Setup After selecting Page Setup from the File menu you will see a screen like this Select your printer from the Format for pop up menu Then select the Paper Size and Orientation that you would like to use To enlarge or reduce your score enter a Paper number in the Scale box and click OK The staves will remain the same size on your screen but the size of the displayed page will change SIZE Source To create a score with specific margin Orientatian Margins inches settings you will need to create a custom Portrait Left 0 208 Right n m page set the page size and select options to access the margin settings Be sure to save Landscape Top Bottom 0 208 the settings with a specific name This way you may use this setting again with other scores Set Score Notation Size To 100 Oo Recent Scores The menu displays the most recent scores you have saved opened or created
249. mation already entered or even go so far as to include some music or initial notation Basically anything that you can save as an MusicTime Deluxe file can be saved as the default Template To add additional templates to the new score window export to Score Template and follow the prompts to name it The Menus New Ctrl M Mew Default Score CErI ShiFE M Open Chri o Clase Ctrl Save Ckrl4 5 Save As CEr ShiFE S MusicxML E MIDI Master Tracks Pro Print Selection Print Ctrl P Current Score Settings To Default Score Template Page Setup Ctrl Shift P 1 X5 _EncoreS Organ Fantasias and FugueslBWw v S62 Bw S62 Fantasia enc zA GYO DAILY Bach EncoreSyorganiFantasias and Fugoues DW 54z2 enc Exil Extract Part The part extraction function allows you to quickly create a new score containing one or more staves of a multi staff score Most often this function will be used to create individual parts for each player from a larger composition Select the staff or staves you want extracted AII Extract Parts the staves between your top and bottom selections will be specified as the staff range for the new score 2 You can specify the staff range within the Extract All Parts SS Part dialog as well If you want to extract several Q One Part From Staves to instruments to the same score but they appear at different vertical positions in your system you can EX ten Fram aier Twe rearrange
250. me Deluxe s output devices or you could connect a sound card or module directly to one and a MIDI interface to the other Whatever the case this should at least help you to get up and running with MusicTime Deluxe MIDI Setup MIDI And MusicTime Deluxe Chapter Ten he use of MIDI and notation requires both patience and understanding when problems arise The flexibility that gives MIDI its strength can also cause confusion One notation symbol can mean something very different for two different instruments composers or musicians When MIDI interpretation of a score is your goal a MIDI file exported from MusicTime Deluxe can be further edited in a program devoted to editing MIDI data Such programs are called MIDI Sequencers Unlike notation such programs use all kinds of symbols to display notes and other MIDI messages such as pitch bend which have no consistent representation in the notation world GVOX offers MasterTracks Pro available for both Windows and Macintosh a professional sequencer with several different editing views Master Tracks Pro offers an Event List for viewing the MIDI information a graphic display of controller data and extensive processing operations for creating both subtle and dramatic changes The MIDI capabilities of MusicTime Deluxe may not be as extensive as a dedicated MIDI sequencer but you ll have more than enough power to create an impressive MIDI performance This section
251. mitation Note head types remain set until altered again with the Change Note Attributes dialog The ten available head types are standard diamond triangle square X circle X plus slash hollow diamond and stem only Rests MusicTime Deluxe lets you change the look of your rests Change Rest Attribute Set Rest Type from standard rest notation default to slashes or vice versa k Select the rests you want to change and then choose Rests Cancel to open the Change Rest Attribute dialog Windows or Set Hel Rest Attribute Mac Take your pick Note See Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe for more information Set to Voice A complete discussion of voices and voicing in MusicTime Deluxe is provided in Chapter 8 Voices in MusicTime Deluxe The voice sub menu shows MusicTime Deluxe s eight voices Changing the voice assignment for a selection can be done using this menu You may find it easier to use the control command key and number shortcuts provided To view by voice Press V dash for all voices V 1 for voice one V 2 for voice two etc To change the voice of a selection control command 1 for voice one control command 2 for voice two etc Changing voice for a beamed group of notes will unbeam the notes in the process Accidentals This feature permits you to change the accidentals that occur in a selection Although MusicTime Deluxe attempts to use the correct
252. move the staff from the score but simply hides it for the selected system Delete Staff completely removes the staff from the entire score Split This Staff Spot tats Split This Staff takes an existing staff and splits both the staff and notes giving you two staves MIDI files with piano parts on a single track can be changed to a Piano Staff within MusicTime Deluxe for further editing with this feature Another use would be to separate two instruments notated on one staff into two separate staves for each set the Clef to instrument O Trebe alto Bass Tenor Place the Following On a Mew Staff Notes below C2 Notes from voice F juu zs ES e we le oa af Keep notes in a Piano Staff Split This Staff requires you to select the staff you wish to split The staff must be a single staff Piano staves cannot NOT UN DOABLE Move these notes to a new staff Two methods exist for determining what notes are moved to the new staff If the pitch selection is specified then anything below the entered pitch will be placed onto the new staff The second method uses the voicing capabilities within MusicTime Deluxe to separate notes For this to work correctly the voice selected should fill each measure with the correct number of beats Note If you revoice a section just so you can split a few notes to a new staff remember that changing the voice may require adding rests for all affected voices It is best to fully
253. move to If you no want to jump to the end of your score simply click the L Cancel arrow to the right of the text box Click OK Note If your score includes a pickup bar measure numbering begins with the first full measure The pickup bar is represented by a dash rather than a number The Page Icons The page icons represent the pages of your score Click on the page you d like to view If you are working on a long piece and there are more pages than can easily be displayed in the Toolbar use the arrows to the left and right of the page icons to scroll to the desired page number Tip Double click on a page icon to select an entire page The Score Window Using the Palettes Using The Palettes Chapter Six Mim Deluxe contains nine palettes from which you can enter notation graphics Tip text symbols and marks Notes Clefs Graphics Tools Dynamics Marks 1 Marks 2 Symbols and Color palettes The default preferences for MusicTime Deluxe opens the Notes palette to the left of an untitled Score window You can open additional palettes from the sub menu called Palette under the Windows menu Also under the Windows menu is the option to display All Palettes By choosing this option MusicTime Deluxe will display all eleven palettes Tip cascading from the top left of the screen A mouse click on the right or left MusicTime Deluxe
254. n The Change Pitch Transpose dialog can raise or lower pitches three octaves in either direction If you need a transposition greater than this use the Change Pitch Transpose function a second time The transpose amount is indicated with the transpose direction the interval name and quality the number of half steps is calculated for you Use the pop up menus to the desired interval and select the choice by highlighting the name Click OK Change Pitch Transpose changes the key signature if desired If you would also like to change key signatures to the transposed amount check the Transpose Key Signature box Change Pitch Change Pitch Transpose Transpose Direction Octave Interval Quality removes ER Raise Within an Octave Unison Diminished i i courtesy Lower Within an Octave ab Minor accidentals Raise 1 Ockave 3rd Major Perfect cancel ancel and Lower 1 Qckaye 4th Augmented Cancel Raise 2 Ockaves 5th Lower 2 Octayest eth Raise 3 Ocbaves4 7th Lower 3 QcbavesT 2 half steps Transpose Key Signatures Transpose Chord Symbols Simplify Accidentals The Menus enharmonics and can apply standard defaults or Simplified Accidentals see Simplified Enharmonics for the new pitches Change Pitch Transpose also transposes any chord symbols when Transpose Chord Symbols is checked To change the playback of notes without changing their display
255. n t exist and cannot be set to a play duration greater than the value of the note or rest before the grace note Remember that the duration amount is for the original duration of the note you are converting to a grace note If you need to start a section or piece with a grace note you will need to uncheck Play before the beat as there will not be a note to borrow time from No Slash appoggiatura When No slash appoggiatura is selected the option to Play before the beat is automatically deselected The appoggiatura option automatically plays the notes on the beat location at which they are located A full discussion of the term appoggiatura cannot be covered in this manual and there are disagreements concerning the exact interpretation and use of the appoggiatura anyway In MusicTime Deluxe the selection will create a grace note that 1s played on the beat and the note s type will be preserved that is a half note will look like a small half note a quarter will look like a small quarter note etc Appoggiaturas differ from cue notes in that they are played on the beat but will not affect the beat locations of other notes in the measure Cue This option shrinks all notes beams and marks to 70 of normal size Cue notes are muted by default If you would prefer to hear the cue notes you can select them and use the Note Attributes dialog to unmute them Standard Note This removes any grace or cue changes made to t
256. n Stati staves appearing on any one page including tiles can be Type no more than 128 If the Add Staff dialog does not allow Add Regular Staves you to add the needed number of staves exit cancel from the dialog and change the number of systems per page to a number that will not exceed the 128 per page limit Change this to a Piano Staff C Add a Piana Staff Add a Staff to this Piano Staff Add a Piano Staff A Piano Staff is a combined staff that defaults to a treble and bass clef but each staff is linked to the other staff to aee allow for cross staff beaming The Staff Sheet displays add Above one instrument for a piano staff and a staff name will be centered between the two staves when using the name field in the Staff Sheet MOTE Use a Piana Staff Far Crass StafF Beaming 3 Add Below Tvpe 5 Note O Tab Voices on Piano Staves Co Rhythm Percussion The default voicing assignments for piano staves is as follows The top staff treble by default uses voices 1 4 Voice l is used by default when inserting notes in all voices Voice view The bottom staff bass clef by default uses voices 5 8 Voice 5 is used by default when inserting notes in all voices Voice view A piano staff can be from two to four staves See Add a Staff to this Piano Staff for more information Change this to a Piano Staff If a regular staff is selected before selecting Add Staff the option to c
257. n a Tablature staff are not like notes and graphics and you cannot drag them to new locations with the arrow tool Instead numbers must be selected and adjusted using the Nudge command Nudge Left and Nudge Right change the horizontal positions of numbers Nudge Up and Down adjust the string reference Changing Fret and String Indication Guitars and most fretted instruments have several different string and fret possibilities capable of generating the same pitch The Make Tab function will select one possibility for you To change the fret and string reference for a pitch select the number indicating the fret on the current string Nudge Up to change the fret indication for the next string up and its tuning Nudge Down to change the indication to the next string below and the tuning used for that string Note Nudge will not move numbers onto strings tuned beyond the range for the pitch being indicated Although standard tunings and even most alternate tunings can be used without trouble tunings using non ascending or descending pitches are not fully supported Tablature staves do not play over MIDI The Staff Sheet options for tablature staves are limited to changing their size and location Revert to Raw Raw data in MusicTime Deluxe appears as note heads with accidental and tie information only Revert to Raw removes all stems flags beams and marks from notes and leaves only this information and the MIDI data associated with each note
258. n be free floating on the page just like any of the other symbols p pulgar polex thumb d indice index index a a ular anulis mg inkypay ingerfa little Color The Color palette adds color to objects in MusicTime Deluxe Open the palette from the Palettes sub menu Windows menu or click on the name of any open palette until the Color palette appears Color changes made with the Color palette affect objects entered into the score such as notes rests marks chords and text The Pencil tool indicates the current color selection Adding Color To use the Color palette choose an object note rest etc from one of MusicTime Deluxe s palettes and then click on a color in the Color palette Enter the object in the score You can choose another color at any time MEN Using the Palettes Changing the Color of Selected Objects You can also edit the color of objects already entered into the score Select the objects using any of MusicTime Deluxe s selection methods then click one of the 16 available colors in the palette The color will be applied to the selected objects Customizing the Palette MusicTime Deluxe does not limit you to the 16 default colors in the palette Double click on any of the colors but black or white and a Color Picker appears Mac OS X makes five alternate views of the Color Picker available Choose a new color and click OK Black and white cannot be changed Note
259. n much the same way as a single staff A piano staff in MusicTime Deluxe is special because it allows you to use more than one staff for the same instrument Cutting and pasting in a piano staff affects both staves When you assign a MIDI channel to a piano staff both treble and bass staves use the same MIDI channel When you assign a MIDI program to a piano staff it also affects both staves You can elect to split notes to another staff and NOT keep them in a piano staff but since this is a piano part this tutorial will keep the notes in a piano staff 6 Click OK The new piano staff appears complete with a brace oetting the Key Signature MIDI and Master Tracks Pro files opened in MusicTime Deluxe always display initially in the key of C Major You will need to assign a key signature to your score and for our tutorial you will now change the key signature to G minor for When Johnny Comes Marching Home 1 Using the arrow pointer click on the first measure to the left of the first note PS 0 D NN c GE EE i c gr Ge ee CNN ee ee ee Fo E B1A1LJ1 llli ul EENEG SE IER Eeer E se E E E E ee ES re tt DL AE mm a E EC LL LL 3 2 From the Measures menu choose Key SIGNATURE The Key Sicnature dialog box appears The measure range you ao From Measure I t fe 5 selected is displayed at the top of the dialog To apply the key m Beier kr Cree Se signature to the entire score cli
260. n synth thereby eliminating the need for any additional hardware You ll probably still want to use your MIDI instrument for recording purposes but you can get surprisingly good playback quality just by using MusicTime Deluxe and the built in Apple MIDI Setup Synthesizer For more information on using Apple s General MIDI DLS Synthesizer see Chapter 7 The Menus Configuring MIDI MusicTime Deluxe needs to know how your system is configured so that the software can communicate with the hardware Setting Output Devices Channels on Macintosh On Mac OS X MIDI output devices are set in the Starr MIDI Device AND INSTRUMENT SETTINGS dialog The MIDI Setup dialog is used for Record and Thru settings Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings To set the output devices and channels on Macintosh do the following Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings Playback Device Built In Synth 1 HH Bank Apple General MIDI DLS H All Voices i Piano Organ Acoustic Bs Strings Soprano Sax Square Wave ice Ran TinkeBei ingered Bs Ben Strings Alto Sax Saw Wave Soundtrack Agogo Piano3 Organi Picked Sr Synstringsl Tenor Sax Syn Calliope Crystal steel Drums Fretless Bs Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Voice Oohs English Ham Solo Vex Goblin ek oni Synth Bass 1 Synth Drum Synth Bass 2 Reverse Cym Trumpet Piccolo Fantasia Ep GtfretNoise vi Flue Warm Pad Banjo Breath Noise Cello Seashor
261. nappropriate to assign different MIDI Channels to each voice unless a special effect is desired Pay careful attention to unused voices for each staff Channel selections are not separate from other staves If you select a piano for your top staff and that piano uses channel one any other staff set to channel one will also sound as a piano When two staves send out conflicting information on the same channel the last message sent will be used for both staves If two staves have different volumes or program assignments but both are set to the same channel both messages get sent but the message in the lower staff in the Staff Sheet gets sent last and that message gets used This means that if you do not choose an unused MIDI channel before selecting a new instrument an instrument on the same MIDI channel but on another staff will change as well Make sure each instrument uses just one of the sixteen MIDI channels for each device MusicTime Deluxe can send up to 32 unique channels of information at the same time Volume changes also need to be isolated by MIDI Channel When setting the volume in the Staff Sheet the single volume fader changes the volume for every voice and MIDI channel defined for the staff Volume messages are sent for each voice s MIDI channel selection even if a voice is unused in all other respects Check the MIDI channel assignments for each staff and all voices particularly when opening old scores or when imp
262. nction ties only notes that are in the same voice Tie Defaults The Spacing Defaults dialog from the View menu contains the default settings for tie offsets The default horizontal offset is 0 placing the tie s ends at the edge of the notes being tied Using a higher number moves the ties farther away from the note heads The default vertical offset is 3 and places the tie ends slightly above or below the note heads being tied Using 0 will start the tie ends from the middle of the note s head Entering higher values moves the ties higher or lower than the notes A maximum of 8 can be used to define the tie offsets Each number represents a quarter of the distance between two staff lines Slur Notes A slur is a curved line over or under two or more notes of different pitches indicating the notes are to be played as a group Slurs can be entered in MusicTime Deluxe using a variety of methods For more information about entering slurs using the pencil tool refer to the reference section for the Tools palette Using the Slur Notes command The menu item for Slur Notes will create a slur for you based on a selection The default slur is created over a group of notes Holding down shift while using the slur command will place the slur under the selected notes The Menus Slurs are drawn from either the note head or the stem depending upon the stem direction and the slur placement The default placement of the slur is at t
263. nd Restore Levels There is a pop up menu immediately to the right of the Zoom tool s magnifying glass icon This pop up lets you select the Zoom LEVEL to which the tool is set and to select the normal viewing level The Score Window The menu is divided into two parts labeled REstore LeveL the o A pem level and Zoom LeveL A check mark denotes the current settings Fit Page Fit Width There are two RESTORE LEVEL options ZOO 5 06 Fit Page 75 Fir Pace proportionally scales the page so that the entire page fits within 100 the ScorE wiNbpow Use this setting for previewing your layout before 200 printing It replaces the PRINT PREVIEW command which was formerly 300 found in the Firg Menu Whereas the old Print Preview did not allow cm 400 editing or adjustments the Fir PAGE permits the same degree of manipu lation as any other zoom level Fit Width Fir Wirta scales the display horizontally so that the page s full width can be displayed in the SCORE WINDOW The Measure Indicator Hi The Measure Inpicator shows the number of the current active measure The current measure 1s either the measure that contains a selection or the blinking insertion cursor or it is the measure that is currently being played The Measure Inpicator also allows you to jump to another point in the score Click on the MEASURE Jump to Measure 17 INpicAroR and the Jump To MEAsunE dialog box appears hs Enter the measure number you d like to
264. next The Menus highest octave To shift the range up or down by octaves drag the little QWERTY keyboard icon in the Keyboard window You can drag the keyboard icon left or right in one octave increments Watch Staves Setup When you play back a score in MusicTime Deluxe the Keyboard window will indicate which notes are being played The Watch Staves Windows or Setup Mac button opens a dialog that allows you to choose which of the score s staves will be displayed in the Keyboard window during playback If the notes in the score have been set to a particular color the appropriate keys in the Keyboard window will light up with that color when the notes play This comes in handy while viewing different staves or voices simultaneously on the keyboard Displaying Notes on the Keyboard MusicTime Deluxe s ability to display the score s notes on the keyboard can be a useful educational tool but if you re playing the piece back at tempo it may be difficult to see the individual notes and chords If you use the arrow key selection technique while the Keyboard window is open the selected notes will be highlighted on the graphic keyboard Using the arrow pointer place the insertion cursor next to the note or chord you d like to view Hold control command and press the left or right arrow keys to select the event The note or chord is displayed in the Keyboard window The notes appear in the Keyboard window with th
265. ngs are easiest to define if the measures are pre selected before opening the Measure Endings dialog but the measure range can also be entered from within the dialog When measures are selected that have endings already defined the ending type for the first measure selected will be indicated in the dialog For endings to be interpreted during playback the Play Repeats checkbox must be enabled The font button at the top of the Measure Endings dialog determines the font size and style for the numbers in the ending indications If Custom text box is selected the font selection will also be used for the text box Text boxes created within the Measure Endings dialog are standard text boxes and can be edited further after exiting the dialog Font selections for measure numbers apply to all endings but can be changed at any time Open the Measure Endings dialog and select a new font without selecting an ending to change the current font Click OK when you re through The ending indication selected determines both what number or numbers are used for the ending and how playback will interpret the ending As each ending selection is checked the field next to Custom text box updates to show you what characters are to be entered by default for the ending Custom Text Box When Custom text box is enabled the measure ending will display only the entered text Playback of measures with custom text boxes will still use the endings selected above the
266. nnannnnnnnnnennnennennnnnnnnnnnnne 120 Reminder Key Signatures cccccccsecccsceceeeceececeeesececeeecsaeeseueeseeeeseeeseeeeeas 120 SIBI NR S T reer ETE 120 ae m 121 Ree c ME UU ut 121 Custom MI BOX RENTRER TENTI 121 Lock Ending Open Closed ET 122 Changing the Vertical Position of Endmgs 122 coda PISOS ean Eaa EEE E A AA 122 Measure INNO CES oom Dam HESEUEVENHRDIE AULATSRNIISAERIAFIMEIME Ri E RUNE ENE NETTE 123 ANON FIIV DAC EN 123 Zug SD ACING E 124 Engraver s Spach ussesousincinp orbi ranieri nan AVAE a AeA aaraa aeaiia 124 Mathematically OU CU EE 124 Adjust Measure WidthS 0 n0nnaanonnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnrnrnnrrnrrrrrrrrnrrnrenrrerene 124 Adjust Measures Per Gvstem 124 Adjust Tor Ee 125 Al SIVOG nerea nr e E AANE E EE E EAS 125 General Spacing Guidelines E 125 Score Menu 125 AGO Wl 129 BI Le 125 Le e 126 Add _ Eeer 126 Pda PENO EE 126 Add a Staff to this Piano Giant 127 wizie m MT TT 127 DEEE S PTT 127 PUETE A ROO TTE 127 Move these notes to a new statt 128 OS EUS ST e 128 Keep Notes in a Piano Giant 128 Seed eli TT IT TU TET 128 Break Balle E 128 size RITENUTO 128 BF AGI TP 129 EE emere ear N ER EMEN E DINEM 129 Center el uic EE 129 Measures Per System iereececeaesiset asec nce MEER DU bag SEL MMEIERN Ee UN UR 129 Systems per Page assentire uti watt ERR meten oM dE 130 Bm aac UT UU T MESA 130
267. ns Change Note On Velocities Set all values to 64 Gei Change to of current values The fixed value range will accept values between 127 and 127 C Change smoothly from 64 to 64 If any operation would result in a value less than 0 or CyAdd D to all values greater than 127 the value assigned 1s either 0 or 127 depending on which limit was encountered The Menus To change just the ON velocity click on the note while holding the Shift Command keys A pop up menu with velocities will open Make Chord Make Chord combines two or more notes of the same duration into a chord Both MIDI Playback and screen display are changed Make Chord can be used to change imported or real time recorded data containing arpeggiated chords into an actual chord to which an arpeggio symbol can be added To use Make Chord select the notes that you wish to use in the chord and then use Make Chord Make Chord will work only when notes are of the same duration If notes have been guessed to be different durations first change all of the notes to the same duration Unless the notes combined into a chord were hand entered with Auto Space off the number of beats in the measure will change as well You may need to add rests or additional notes to complete the measure It is also a good idea to Align Playback Make Grace Cue This function lets you change notes to grace notes or cue notes and to clear the
268. ns are usually called courtesy accidentals The subject of courtesy accidentals is covered elsewhere in this manual Changing Durations The same technique for removing or adding accidentals to a selection can also be used to change the duration for selected notes In this next section you will not only change durations but also copy notes and chords tie them and learn to use the ALIGN PLAvBACK and ALIGN SpAcING operations after editing Measure 4 in When Johnny Comes Marching Home was played incorrectly in the MIDI File The measure should actually look identical to Measure 3 The first step will be to select and change the eighth note played with the left hand to a dotted quarter note 1 Select the D note in the top staff of Measure 4 You should now be familiar with two selection techniques You can use the arrow tool to click and drag a selection around the D note or you can use the shift select technique and click directly on the D note while holding down the shift key to select the note 2 Press the number 3 key on your computer keyboard The selected D note will change from an eighth note to a quarter note 3 Press the letter D on your computer keyboard The selected D note will change from a quarter note to a dotted quarter note Now we need to change the duration of the Bb and F in the bass clef from an eighth note to a quarter note 1 Select the Bb and the F in the bottom staff of Measure 4 using the
269. nter to select the second half of the measure needed Next hold down the shift key and double click in the following measures in that system to select each additional measure Finally while continuing to hold shift down double click to the left of the next system and you will have selected all the measures to the end of the score That is only one example for combining these selection techniques Other possibilities will occur to you as different situations present themselves About MIDI Paste Playing your MIDI master controller keyboard guitar or whatever while events notes or rests or regions are selected in MusicTime Deluxe will result in a MIDI Paste If you select a note or rest and then play your instrument the selected event will be replaced with the note or chord you play The duration stays the same as the original event Ifa region is selected the first event in the region will be replaced Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe Vie a Tate RO eJ Te C lam letyrem ET T3 DI T9 OH Chapter Three oving objects in MusicTime Deluxe is as easy as clicking and dragging A special hot spot location exists for everything moveable and using the option shift and control keys you can perform global changes to entire sections Understanding the location of the hot spots and the uses for the special keys 1s all you need to quickly customize your page layout and notation Moving Notes and Rests
270. ntil it is small enough to fit in the space created above After changing the left and right indents for each system you can hold down the control key and drag the lower system up and align the two systems Always align the system on the right to match the system on the left Changing the left system will change both systems at once Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Once you have created the parallel system arrangement it is best to print the score Using Center Staves Center Systems Align Spacing and many other operations can affect this layout so it is best to use this step only in the final stages before printing Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Score Window untitled 1 M Qu M T n E eg a a i B i a E E e NI eoe Mac OS X 60 The Score Window The Score Window Batter Ib MusicTime Deluxe you ll do most of your work in the Score window You can drag it resize it or scroll it to see more of your music Relative to the displayed page size MusicTime Deluxe shows your music just as it will be printed If you choose to reduce or enlarge your score the music will appear to be the same size in the Score window but the size of the displayed page will increase or decrease For more information see PAGE SETUP in the section on the FILE menu If the window or monitor is not large enough t
271. o communicate with MIDI hardware such as a MIDI interface or sound card The driver enables MusicTime Deluxe to use a MIDI interface s In and Out devices or to play a sound card s on board synthesizer There are many different MIDI interfaces on the market and each one requires a specific driver These drivers should be included with your interface or sound card They do not come with the MusicTime Deluxe software The instructions included with your MIDI hardware should cover installation of the drivers MIDI drivers on Macintosh MIDI Setup on Mac OS X If you are using Mac OS X and want to connect an external MIDI interface follow these steps 1 Connect your external MIDI interface to your Mac Most devices will work right away If your device does not please continue to step two 2 Launch Auno MIDI Setup in Applications Utilities 3 Click on the MIDI Devices tab Follow the instructions for setting up and configuring your MIDI studio Note If you have connected your MIDI interface to your Mac but it s still not being recognized click on the REscAN MIDI button at the top of Aupio MIDI Setup You should then see an icon representing the interface appear in Aupio MIDI SETUP 4 Quit Aupio MIDI SETUP 5 Launch MusicTime Deluxe Using Apple s General MIDI DLS Synthesizer Built In Synth You can play back your MusicTime Deluxe scores through the Mac s sound system using Apple s General MIDI DLS Synthesizer s built i
272. o display the entire width of the page you can use the Fir WIDTH option to scale the display The Window Header Toolbar As its name suggests the Toolbar contains the tools you ll use in MusicTime Deluxe Working in conjunction with the palettes these tools enter move select and erase the objects you enter into the score The Toolbar also contains the controls for real time recording MIDI playback stopping MIDI playback MIDI Thru and a graphic Zoom tool Last but not least the Toolbar provides feedback about your location in the score and which voice is currently active Voice The Voice Selector Y All Voices MusicTime Deluxe allows you to notate up to eight polyphonic voices per staff The Voice 1 SELECTOR displays the currently selected voice It also allows you to choose a voice tobe 2 displayed or edited 5 When you click and hold the Voice SeLector the Voice pop up menu appears Drag the E arrow pointer down to the desired voice and release the mouse button 7 d The voice number you chose will now be displayed in the Voice SELECTOR Any notes or rests you enter will be assigned to that voice Any edits you make will affect only that voice Objects assigned to other voices appear grayed out on your screen If you choose Voice all voices will be displayed normally and any edits you make will affect all voices Notes and rests will be entered in the default voices For a compl
273. oSpace Notes Bypass AutoSpace Staves Score Menu Add Page Remove Page Add Staff Delete Staff Split Staff Connect Staves Ctrl OM Ctrl M Ctrl Q Ctrl T Ctrl OK Ctrl B Ctrl E IC IA Ctrl N 2 J Ctrl J Ctrl Drag Click on note and hold then Alt Drag Ctrl Drag Ctrl P Ctrl P Ctrl S Ctrl 2 S Ctrl F Ctrl Windows Ctrl 8 L Ctrl M or Ctrl B Ctrl B Ctrl Alt X Ctrl Alt D 9 right click or Ctrl Alt V Ctr Alt C Ctr Alt G Ctrl G Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl 2 4 Ctrl Ctrl Alt M Ctrl Alt IM Ctrl Alt Q Ctrl Alt T Ctrl Alt K Ctrl Alt B Ctrl Alt E Ctr AIt A Ctrl Alt N Ctrl J Ctrl Alt J Alt Drag Click on note and hold then Alt Drag Alt Drag Ctrl Alt 2 P Ctrl Alt 8 P Ctrl Alt S Ctrl HLAlt 9 S Ctrl Alt F Alt E E Shortcuts Center Staves Center Systems Systems per Page Measures per System One Less Measure on System One More Measure on System Text Elements MIDI Device Instrument MIDI Playback View Menu Show Hide Show Hide Control Points Floating Windows Windows Menu Palett
274. of the Time Signature When the tempo amount is applied to the beat you should think of the tempo as applying to one note of the indicated value In 4 4 the tempo describes how long quarter notes are to be played In 6 8 the tempo describes how long eighth notes are to be played If a measure of 4 4 and 6 8 are both set to play at 100 an eighth note in the 4 4 measure will play twice as fast as the eighth note in the 6 8 measure Changing by Percentage Entering a percentage value for the defined measure range will scale the tempo and any changes already defined for the range Change Smoothly From This dialog will apply two tempo values to a range of measures The two numbers are scaled to fit the number of measures within the selection Changes within each measure will occur on each beat for the time signature of the measure If there are different time signatures the tempo 1s applied to the beat value of each measure Add to all values This option will increase or decrease the tempos for the selected region by a fixed amount Negative values can be entered This operation will maintain the relative differences between tempos unless tempo limits are encountered Tempo changes are saved with the measure and not the measure number If a tempo change is made for measure 5 and then 5 measures are inserted before measure 5 on all staves the tempo change will occur at measure 10 When measures are inserted for only one staff tempo
275. og box appears M Enclose numbers in a Box 2 Click the checkbox labeled ENABLE MEASURE Number Offset 0 NUMBERS fei above staff Pl D space s Ka Laus below staff 3 Click the radio button labeled EACH SYSTEM The measure numbers will appear only on the first measure of each system amm 4 First Bar Is A Pickup Bar should already be checked This checkbox is linked to the SET TIME SIGNATURE dialog where you already defined the first bar as a pickup Measure numbering will actually begin with the second bar the first full measure 5 Click OK The measure numbers appear on the score starting with the first measure of the second system Dragging to a New Pitch MusicTime Deluxe allows you to drag notes horizontally to change their placement or vertically to change their pitch The third A note in Measure 8 on beat 5 the one that s part of a beamed pair of eighth notes should be a B so you ll need to drag it up a half step 1 Using the arrow pointer click and hold on the note s head The note should sound briefly when you click on it 2 Drag the note up a half step to B and release the mouse button The B will sound when you drag the note up If you want to check your work place the insertion cursor in Measure 8 and play the score Playback will start from the beginning of Measure 8 Entering an Accidental Tutorial You may have noticed another wrong note in Measure 14 That s because the note
276. ogram name you selected now appear in the Program Name column of the Staff Sheet You can also quickly choose an instrument by clicking on the program name field and a pop up menu will appear with a list of all the instruments available MIDI Playback The music may not be completely formatted yet for printing but you have now entered everything you need for a simple piano score You re ready to play the score using MIDI MusicTime Deluxe s default MIDI set up assigns MIDI out to the built in synthesizer of your computer If you are using an external or other MIDI source please follow the instructions in the MIDI Setup section of this manual Try playing back the file Click with the arrow pointer in any blank space in the pickup bar to place the insertion cursor and set the start point MusicTime Deluxe will always play from the beginning of the measure that contains the insertion cursor You can either click the Play button in the Toolbar or press your computer s spacebar to start playback Click the Play button the stop button or press the spacebar again to stop playback If you are having problems with MIDI playback go to the MIDI Setup section of this manual and make sure everything is configured properly Tip You can use the Staff Sheet to select MIDI programs and set staff volume reverb and panning left or right speakers while MusicTime Deluxe is playing First to begin playback click the Play button Next open the C
277. olbar Icons B pere Klon Nudge Right A Nudge Right Nudge Up Nudge Down i Revert to Saved Extract Part 244 Toolbar Icons d i E oe lig ie fii em Accidentals to Sharps d Accidentals to Flats E bloe pen lal Slur Notes A Beam Group _4 Transpose Pitch Change Duration Jel Change Velocity Tie Notes Make Chord Make Grace Cue Genewa Font Selection Font Outlined Align Text Left Font Shadow Center Text a Align Right Add Measure Delete Measure m CG B a Is Measures per Systems per Time Signature Sc p i age j Key Signature Show Hide DU Barline Type Click on off mm Follow Playback Auto Guess and Coda Phrases Gees Numbers Align Playback Staff Split Point Transcription Align Spacing Value on Ip Gvox Online Add Page Support Page Setu Show Control Add Staff Points Remove Staff Split Staff fig o e on je omm 245 Toolbar Icons m uu P H ii FL DA n nu ri
278. ommands exist as menu items the keyboard shortcuts are the preferred method to nudge objects The four nudge commands are Nudge Left control command open bracket Nudge Right control command close bracket Nudge Up shift control command Nudge Down shift control command The basic nudge operations move data left or right and up or down A single nudge unit left or right is one pixel Nudge requires a selection Use the arrow tool to select one or more areas using the standard selection technique Additional areas can be defined if you hold the shift key down before selecting again Isolated notes and rests selected using the shift select method will also respond to the nudge command but will only move to the right or left See the section on selecting for more information Nudge Left and Right The Nudge Left and Right commands provide a powerful method for moving selections as a group Nudge can be particularly useful for adjusting the horizontal alignment of several staves without sacrificing their vertical alignment Use Align Spacing to apply engraver s rules to your The Menus music and then nudge to make subtle adjustments to horizontal spacing while still retaining the essential vertical alignment between staves This lets you create room for articulations composer notes graphics and lyrics Since nudge operations are frequently needed to move data in greater increments than a single nudge the nudge
279. on t want this release the shift key click once to clear the process and start again The shift key can also be used to select additional areas on other pages but we recommend that you keep all your edits on a single page unless you are selecting to the end of the score This keeps things simple for you and MusicTime Deluxe and makes it easier to remember what you have selected Recognizing the Selection When using the arrow pointer to select areas in your score there are a few points to consider control points When selecting graphic item control points are quite important In fact control points are quite important when selecting graphic items Selecting Control Points The left control points are the main control points recognized for selections When an item has four control points like text boxes selecting the left control point needs to either include both control points or more than a quarter of the left edge Items Without Control Points Some items most noticeably notes and rests don t have control points When selecting these items you should select the entire item Notes It may be helpful to know that MusicTime Deluxe recognizes a note as selected only when the left side is highlighted When notes have upward stems if there is a stem at all selecting just the first pixel at the tip of the note s head counts as selecting the note Selecting the rest of the note without that tip
280. ons when needed You should also use Save As and create new files periodically Saving versions of your scores as you work on them can allow you to restart at any point where you made significant changes and prepare alternate arrangements and layouts Splitting the Staff bech Now we will split the left and right hand parts onto their own staves First you must decide what note to use as the split point In this case the lowest note in the right hand part 1s the Bb2 below middle C Next select the staff you wish to split Most editing in MusicTime Deluxe requires selecting the item or items that need to be edited There are several ways to select music and each technique will be used during this tutorial So to split a staff you first need to select the staff Click the arrow button in the Toolbar Click the arrow pointer in the margin directly to the left of the first measure The first staff becomes highlighted The Split Staff operation will split the staff throughout the score so only the first staff needs to be selected 3 From the Score menu choose Str Tuis STAFF The Spuit Starr dialog box appears A staff can be split two ways You can move all of the notes HE E I ae ee below a specified note onto a new staff or you can move the notes associated with a particular voice or voices onto a new staff For this tutorial the staff will be split by selecting a note upon which to base the split point C No
281. ontrol command L is typed Please refer to the reference section concerning the Notes menu for further information on the Slur Notes command Changing a Slur s Shape Once a slur has been entered into a score it can be further moved or adjusted by dragging on any of the slur s three control points With the arrow selected click and drag on a control point to change the shape of a slur Moving a Slur If you hold the shift key while dragging a slur s control point the entire slur moves as a one object The nudge command also moves a slur if you select the left control point Slurs only nudge within the measure in which they are located If you need to move a slur to another measure use the arrow tool and shift key as described above Copying a slur If you hold the control option key while dragging a slur s control point the slur 1s copied to a new location You can also copy and paste slurs but note that pasted slurs adjusted for the width of the measure into which they are paste Erasing a slur To erase a slur click on a slur s control point with the eraser tool If you select the left control point of the slur you can also use the back space delete key or the Cut and Clear commands Two slur indications are included in the Notes palette This first 1s for horizontal slurs and is the most commonly used The second is for incidents where the slur will need to occur at a more vertical angle
282. ontrol option key while moving a staff changes all remaining staves and systems in the score by the same amount For example holding the control option while moving down the bottom staff of a piano system gives the same spacing between staves to all the remaining systems in the score If you hold the control option key while dragging the top staff of a system all remaining systems will be spaced the same distance apart As an example hold the control option key down and drag the second system for a piano staff further away from the top system When you release the distance you created between the first and second system will be used for all the remaining systems If the control option key was not used only the distance between the first and second system would have changed Horizontal changes made with the control option key held down also get applied to all remaining systems If you wish to indent all the remaining systems in a score hold down the control option key while dragging a system to the right All the remaining systems will receive the same indent This removes all indents by holding the control option key down while dragging a system to the far left Changes made with the control option key affect only the staves and systems after the one that is moved Any system before the edited one remains unchanged See also the section on Center Staves and Center Systems in the Score menu These two automatic
283. optimizes the page layout after establishing the system layout For final page layout of systems and staves see Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Measures Per System Measures Per System can change the number of measures for a single system or for all the remaining systems including the current system If you reduce the number of measures for a system the extra measures will be placed in the next system or the next several systems When changing the number of measures to be greater than the current amount measures in the following systems will be moved onto the current system Changing the number of measures per system can also change the number of pages depending on your selections and the number of measures and systems on each page MusicTime Deluxe The Menus will attempt to keep the number of systems on each page the same As Ce emu Gcr SESE measures are needed to fulfill the measures per system request however Gei Only this system unneeded systems will be removed from the end of the score All remaining systems Cancel You can also change the number of measures in any system without using O 0k a dialog by placing the insertion cursor in that system and then using the bracket keys and to move measures to and from the following system The left bracket key will move measures onto the next system The right bracket key will move measures onto the current system When moving measures in
284. or Lyrics item but lyric placement is often a subjective matter Using the Nudge commands is an excellent method for adjusting the spacing for MEN Using the Palettes individual lyrics horizontally while still retaining the vertical relationship between all the staves in the system Using the Lyric Tool To add a lyric to a staff line you should first select the staff with the notes to be used for lyrics or set the insert cursor flashing line using the arrow tool on the desired staff Set the voice indicator to either all voices or Voice 1 After selecting the lyric tool an arrow appears to the left of the selected system between the page margin and the Score window s left edge This vertical adjustment indication is used to change the vertical location for the lyric lines in each system When using the adjustment arrow to move lyrics in all voices mode Voice all of the lyric lines associated with the active staff will move as one When a specific voice is selected the adjustment arrow moves the lyric line associated with that voice When using the Lyric tool the Notes menu will be replaced with a Text menu Select a font size and style 1f desired from the Text menu This becomes the font selection for the current line You can change the font information later for either the entire lyric line or individual syllables To go back to the Arrow tool while using the Lyrics Pencil tool use the Esc key Adding a lyri
285. or a smaller staff size When extracting parts however make sure the reduction is still readable It may be better to have more page turns than squinting musicians See the section on output quality for important information about reductions MusicTime Deluxe should work with any Windows or Mac printer Make sure the most recent printer driver is installed and that your printer is selected as the default Fonts used when creating a score should also be available when printing If a font cannot be found when a file is being opened an alert will appear asking you to choose a substitute Before printing carefully check the pages to be printed for spacing and other page layout con siderations Ideally this should be done as each page is created If your score is a large orchestral arrangement you may need to consider the spacing for each tiled section as well The following sections explain how MusicTime Deluxe uses tiles and the printer selection to determine the page margins and layout options Page Margins and Page Layout Before you begin working with page margins you should make sure that the correct printer is selected on your computer The correct paper size and options are selected in the PAGE Setup dialog and are saved with your score The PAGE Setup dialog allows you to choose a margin setting for the score or use the default setting for the selected printer The easiest way to make sure a score s layout is consistent on multipl
286. or example typing V followed by 5 would select voice 5 To select all voices type V followed by either A or the dash Note The two keystrokes cannot occur too far apart or the shortcut will not work The Voice Selector d All Voices 1 d my cn un P When the voice selector is set to one of the eight voice selections only notes and rests in the selected voice will be displayed in solid black All other voices appear in light gray In addition only the current voice will respond to selections mouse actions or edit operations The voice selector also affects playback When any of the eight voices are selected in the voice selector only notes belonging to the selected voice will be sent over MIDI Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Rests In Different Voices and Hidden Rests The voice selector also affects rests and selecting a specific voice in the voice selector will display rests for the selected voice as solid black Rests in other voices appear in light gray You can hide rests but remember that the voice selector will not show hidden rests Use the Show Hide dialog to show the rests for a voice when editing Voice When the voice selector shows all voices Voice both selections and edit operations affect all voices Notes entered while the voice selector is set to are assigned to a default voice The default is voice one except when entering notes into the lower staves of a piano staff Piano stave
287. or measure ranges will not use Auto Guess Beam The Auto Guess Beam status is saved in preferences Choose Auto Guess Beam from the menu to toggle the check mark on or off Auto Space This function applies engraver s spacing automatically after several different operations in MusicTime Deluxe When adding or erasing notes or rests with the pencil and eraser tools Auto Space will apply the engraver s spacing operation to the notes in the measure being edited In addition erasing or adding an accidental will also apply the engraver s spacing When pasting data the Auto Space function applies an Align Spacing operation on the measures affected by the paste Auto Space automatically applies the engraver s spacing when dragging notes barlines and staves Holding down the control key during the drag bypasses these adjustments Please Note Operations that require selections or measure ranges will not use Auto Space Setup Toolbar Mode MusicTime Deluxe features a floating customizable Toolbar This Toolbar contains icons that represent commonly used MusicTime Deluxe commands The Toolbar contains a few icons by default but remains fully configurable You can choose the icons and the order in which they appear Make your choices with the Setup Toolbar Mode item in the Preferences menu Choose SETUP TOOLBAR Mopp to open the Toolbar Setup dialog There are 90 possible items that you can place in the Toolbar Most of the
288. or the first voice only When a cell in the Program Name column is clicked a popup menu appears allowing you to select the program for the staff s current device This setting will affect the voice currently displayed in the score s voice menu If a single voice is being viewed text will appear at the top of the Staff Sheet Window to remind of which voice you are viewing editing Alternatively you can click on a Channel or Gain cell to open the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings The Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog appears when you click in the Channel column to choose an instrument sound MIDI program change number for that staff Device Names The default device selected in the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog is General MIDI To choose from one of the other included devices use the Device menu in the dialog A more complete description of the Device menu appears later in this section 128 Program names are available for each device but not every synthesizer will use all 128 Some synthesizers may have more than 128 programs stored but the MIDI Program definition only uses 128 To use other programs on your synthesizer you will need to change the location of the program to one of the locations that can be recalled using the standard program numbers To select from any of the available program names click on a program name
289. or the notes on the bass staff let s try a more traditional approach 1 Select the arrow tool from the Score Window s toolbar 2 Drag select both the quarter note chord and the eighth note rest 3 Go to the Edit menu and select copy or right click copy or use cmd c 4 Place the cursor after the eighth rest 5 Go to the Edit menu and select paste or right click paste or use cmd v You have now copied the first half of the measure and pasted it in the second half using the universal copy and paste method Creating Ties l Now that you ve created the two chords needed in Measure 4 you need to add cy A the ties between them MusicTime Deluxe can automatically draw ties between consecutive notes of the same pitch 1 Select the chords to be tied 2 Choose Tie Notes from the Notes menu Ties appear between the notes A shortcut for adding or removing ties is to select the notes you wish to tie and use control command T Note To tie notes between two different systems or across a page you must use the shift select technique or adjust the number of measures per system until both notes are in the same system After dragging a selection around notes the tie operation will only tie notes within that selection Adjusting Ties EL Window Show Hide 38 x Show Control Points CH Use Handwritten Music Symbols Spacing Defaults Change Score Colors Guitar Frets Show Staves Te e Ee
290. or to indicate that both left and right hands are used to play the phrase Showing Hiding Rests When more than one voice is used within a measure a need may arise to hide rests that would otherwise confuse or complicate the way the measure is read The following example shows a measure with a hidden rest Here is the same example showing just the notes in voice 3 Unless the stem directions were changed these two examples would not mean the same thing to a musician seeing the notation When the use of a rest detracts from the notation consider using a different voice and hiding the rest Here 1s a different example requiring a hidden rest In this case an alternate line is indicated using cue notes Because the alternate line begins on the second beat a rest was added but later hidden using the SHow Hipe dialog Here is the same example with the rest showing Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Here is the example again with only voice 3 showing Entering Additional Voices When creating a measure requiring a hidden rest show the rests while creating the measure and create the measure by adding notes and rests from left to right If Auto Space is on it is best to enter the pitches from the right side of the measure This way the notes will be positioned evenly as they are added and the proper number of beats will be correctly incremented If Auto Space is off the notes should be added with regard to proper spacing
291. orting MIDI and Pro files Unless intentional most staves should use the same channel for all voices to avoid confusion We added the CHANGE ToGETHER checkbox in the CHoosE CHANNEL DEvIcE for just this purpose When checked quick changes can be made simultaneously for all voices with a single selection Set gain values of staff voices in the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Setting dialog The gain value attenuates any volume controller message sent while playing dynamics in the score Different voices that need different gain values require using a different MIDI channel When configuring different volume settings for different voices take care to account for every MIDI Channel in use in the Staff Sheet If two different voices use the same MIDI Channel they cannot have different instruments or volumes MIDI Tool Controllers and Program Changes In addition to the gain and program selections in the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Setting dialog program changes volume changes and any type of controller message can be added anywhere in a score to any staff The same cautions mentioned above apply when using the MIDI tool When program changes or controller messages are entered with the MIDI tool each message is associated with one of the eight voice layers and the MIDI channel in use for that voice When the voice selector is set to Voice controllers and program changes use the same channel as the default voice This is usually voice 1
292. ortion of the Time Signature When the tempo amount is applied to the beat you should think of the tempo as applying to one note of the indicated value In 4 4 the tempo describes how long quarter notes are to be played In 6 8 the tempo describes how long eighth notes are to be played If a measure of 4 4 and 6 8 are both set to play at 100 an eighth note in the 4 4 measure will play twice as fast as the eighth note in the 6 8 measure Changing by Percentage Entering a percentage value for the defined measure range will scale the tempo and any changes already defined for the range Change Smoothly From This dialog will apply two tempo values to a range of measures The two numbers are scaled to fit the number of measures within the selection Changes within each measure will occur on each beat for the time signature of the measure If there are different time signatures the tempo 1s applied to the beat value of each measure Add to all values e A Change Tempo This option will increase or decrease the tempos for the selected region by a fixed amount Negative values can From Measure 2 to l4 be entered This operation will maintain the relative differences between tempos unless tempo limits are Set all Tempos to 100 encountered Change to 100 X of current values 9 Change smoothly 100 to Tempo changes are saved with the measure and not the EX Addlo Drees measure number If a tempo change is made for measure
293. osing Close closes the active Score window If you make changes to a score you will be asked if you d like to save those changes before closing the file With MIDI and Pro files not yet saved in MusicTime Deluxe you will be asked if you wish to save the file as an MusicTime Deluxe file before closing even if you have saved changes This avoids any confusion since graphic information is saved only in an MusicTime Deluxe file Save Choose Save to keep any changes made in MusicTime Deluxe to the active file If the file has not been saved the Save As dialog will appear and you can enter a new file name See the Save As section for more information If you have opened a MIDI or Master Tracks Pro file you will always be prompted with the Save As dialog when Save is selected This reminds you that all of the graphic information you are working with in MusicTime Deluxe is saved only if you create an MusicTime Deluxe version of the file As with all computer files in addition to using Save to update your score for any changes you make we recommend that you also save backup copies onto different volumes hard drives or diskettes The Menus Save Score Document Save As untitled 2 mus EN a S m Scores Q search BB gvox34aa Nae Name gt Date Modified Backup Scores 5 13 08 10 58 AM PLACES p fern Desktop A Gvox Ny Applicati 7 Sales
294. ote you must do so before the tie 1s performed Use the control option key while applying the accidental to force MusicTime Deluxe to retain the accidental To apply an accidental after notes have been tied apply the accidental to the first note in the tied group We The Menus do not recommend that you change the accidental for a tied group if you placed a courtesy accidental within the group The keyboard shortcut for ties 1s control command T control command shift T toggles the ties up and down Tie Directions Stem direction and the number of notes being tied determines the tie directions for notes When chords are tied together the tie directions will be created for the chords according to MusicTime Deluxe s best judgment If you flip stem directions for a tied group the tie direction will also change To alter the tie directions without changing the stem direction shift select the tied notes that need the tie flipped and use control command T Adjusting Ties Using the Mouse Ties can be adjusted manually by dragging the tie s control point Control points for ties occur in the middle of the tie and can be adjusted either up or down provided the tie is not indicating a tie from or to a note in another system or page If a tie occurs over a system or page you will need to change flow the number of measures to bring both notes being tied onto the same system Note The Tie Notes fu
295. ou can use Revert to Saved to return to a previously saved version but all edits after the file was last saved will be discarded Delete Page will be available only when two or more pages exist The current page will be entered for the delete range but the Delete Page dialog allows a new range for either a different page or more than just MSs CRLETT one page or both From Page to 2 EE which totals pages The arrow button to the right of the page range fields will enter the page number for the last page Use this when you want to delete pages to the end of the score NOT UNDOABLE tele Caution MusicTime Deluxe does not allow you to delete discontinuous pages The page range includes all pages between the first and last page specified Add Staff The Add Staff dialog creates additional Note Rhythm Tab or Percussion blank staves in MusicTime Deluxe Add Staff is NOT UNDOABLE To remove an added staff use the Delete Staff item Add Staff does not require a selection but the current staff where the cursor is located is used to determine both where the staff is added and what operations are available within the Add Staff dialog Note Add Staff is only available in Page View Add _ Regular Staves As many as 128 staves can be used in MusicTime Deluxe but the total number of staves you The Menus can add within this dialog may depend on the number of systems each page currently displays The total number of gu
296. ou use the arrow key selection technique while the Keyboard window is open the selected notes will be highlighted on the graphic keyboard Using the arrow pointer place the insertion cursor next to the note or chord you d like to view Hold control command and press the left or right arrow keys to select the event The note or chord is displayed in the Keyboard window The notes appear in the Keyboard window with the color assigned to them in the Score window Only single events one note or chord in a single staff can be displayed T WK can hold control command QWERTY Keyboard Mate Entry and press the left or right arrow repeatedly to step through the score Tempo Window The Tempo window provides a quick and easy way to globally alter the tempo of a score Changes made with the Tempo window will scale the tempo for the whole score even when tempo changes within the score Changing the Tempo The Tempo window displays the current tempo in beats per minute bpm The displayed tempo is for the measure that contains the insertion cursor There are two ways to change the tempo The Menus g Drag the tempo control up or down to choose a new tempo You can even do this during playback to continuously vary the tempo q Use the and buttons to slowly and accurately increment and decrement the tempo Resetting to the Saved Tempo The Reset button causes the score to revert to the saved tempo This can
297. our synth sounds is currently being played by the keyboard That s generally much easier than changing the channel on your synth Sound Module Sound Module LL J L WANN MIDI Master Keyboard MIDI Interface Computer Running Encore MIDI Thru On MIDI Data From Master Keyboard Only MIDI Data From Encore And Master Keyboard MIDI Setup every time you want to work on a different staff For more about MIDI Thru see the MIDI Setup item in the Setup menu section of the Reference manual System Two A slightly more sophisticated setup uses a MIDI master controller a keyboard or some alternate controller and one or more sound modules or sound cards This requires you to use MusicTime Nnm mm EE PTE Sound Card MIDI Master Keyboard or Module Computer Running Encore Deluxe s MIDI Thru feature For more about MIDI Thru see the MIDI Setup item in the Setup menu section of the manual System Three There are several sound cards and modules being marketed that can be either installed or connected directly to your computer Many of these devices can also act as a MIDI interface for additional MIDI modules Assign one of MusicTime Deluxe s output devices to the sound card or module Then connect your keyboard or other controller to the card module s MIDI In You can connect additional MIDI instruments to the module s MIDI Out Other Options You may want to connect a MIDI interface to each of MusicTi
298. ovides an override MEN Using the Palettes method for when you need to add a space within the lyric line Hold down the control option key while pressing the space bar and a space character will be added to the lyric Creating Hyphens Between Words MusicTime Deluxe creates hyphens between syllables and automatically centers them for you Hyphens are adjustable but are not attached to a note or lyric To create a hyphen in MusicTime Deluxe press the key instead of the space bar at the end of the lyric The insert point advances to the next note but a hyphen is added between the previous lyric and the next To override the hyphen mode in order to add a dash to a lyric hold the control option key while typing the dash or minus character Adding a Melisma Melismas underlines indicating a syllable is to be sung for several notes can be added by typing an underscore shift hyphen under the last note of the sung phrase Melismas are created when the lyric line is completed for a system and will not appear immediately this is normal To force a melisma to appear select the arrow tool in the Toolbar This will exit lyric mode and update the screen for any melismas entered As melismas are frequently added under tied notes hold down the shift key while using the space bar to advance the lyric tool to a tied note and then type the underscore character to create the melisma line MusicTime Deluxe automatically draws t
299. ow Staves shows hidden staves within a system or systems The menu item requires a selection and all selected systems will be affected To better understand the process of showing staves refer to the following section regarding the hiding of staves Hide Staves Hide Staves hides one or several staves on a system by system basis You can hide a staff for as many systems as you desire and different staves can be hidden in different systems The uses for Hide Staves are many but a standard use is to hide staves within the arrangement for instruments that are not performing Another use may be to hide the entire drum track of an imported MIDI file Hide Staves requires a selection The selection can be one or more staves and can cover one or more systems All selected staves will be hidden Hiding staves in Linear View mode is temporary Hidden staves are all shown when switching from Page View to Linear View The Hide Staves and Show Staves menu options do not use dialogs and are not undoable Linear View Linear View changes the normal system by system view arranged vertically on each page into a con tinuously scrolling view with only one system arranged horizontally If staves have been hidden in page view they will be showing in Linear View but staves can also be hidden while in Linear View However when hiding staves in Linear View the change is only temporary and will neither affect hidden staves in page view nor be remembered fo
300. own the Control key while moving the barline Moving Staves And Systems Staves and systems use a hot spot that to move the vertical or horizontal position To change a staff s position click on the hot spot with the arrow tool and drag it to a new location Finding the Staff Hot Spot The hot spot for a staff is the beginning or ending barline When moving a staff use the arrow tool and click on the staff at the beginning or ending barline Continue to hold the mouse button down and drag to move the staff Note If you are selecting a staff on the left side and the entire staff becomes selected you have clicked a little too far to the left To the left of each staff is a hot spot for selecting the staff If the staff becomes selected by mistake click once in the staff to clear the selection and try again Both left and right sides can be used to change the vertical placement for a staff and system Set margin indents for the right or left side of a system by selecting the side you wish to change MusicTime Deluxe automatically adjusts the measures in the system When a staff is moved the distance between all staves and systems below the staff remains unchanged Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe If the top staff is moved only the distance between systems is affected When any staff other than the top staff is moved only the spacing within the system is affected Changing All Remaining Systems Hold the c
301. pace delete key will move the cursor back through the text deleting letters as it goes The tab key will move forward through the lyric selecting entire words Pressing shift tab will select words in reverse order Selecting the lyric tool and pencil changes MusicTime Deluxe s Notes menu to the Text menu Use the Text menu to set the font point size and style for your lyrics If no lyrics are selected these changes are global If lyrics are selected the changes affect only the selected lyrics allowing you to mix fonts and styles The arrow that you saw in the left margin when the lyric tool was selected 1s used to adjust the vertical alignment of the lyrics Drag it to move the lyrics up or down You can drag on individual lyrics with the arrow tool to adjust the horizontal placement Fitting It On The Page Set systems on page 1to 5 You may have noticed that since you added the vocal staff Only this page your nicely formatted piano score no longer fits so neatly on 7 one page Even if you follow the previously discussed steps Le TI All remaining pages for page layout you won t get all six systems to fit within the Cancel ok margins The simplest solution is to put the last system onto another page 1 From the Score menu choose SvsrEMs PER PAGE The Systems Per Pack dialog appears Tutorial 2 Reduce the number of systems per page from 6 to 5 3 Click OK The last system will be
302. position window in background Auditioning notes Note name MIDI Velocity setting Other solo tracks off Mac Slur tool 2 during draw or drag Opt Click Opt Click 2 during draw or drag M m o letter 7 amp 9 1 5 6 a g A G 3 4 home or return end page up page down Opt page up Opt page down Arrows Arrows Delete Click on window title bar Click on staff 3 Click on note 3 Click on note Opt while selecting Windows Slur tool during draw or drag Ctrl Click Alt Ctrl Click during draw or drag M m o letter 7 amp 9 1 5 6 a g A G Ee A home end page up page down Crtl page up Crtl page down Arrows Arrows Delete Right Click on staff Right Click on staff Crtl while selecting Shortcuts Mac Windows Move Slur Bend Release as a unit Drag Drag Accidental Spacing Click on note Click on note Marks Spacing Click on note Click on note Align Spacing Use Previous Set db 2 J Ctrl gt tings Add Chord Options while Chord Opt Opt Parsing Copying notes rests graphic objects Opt and drag Ctrl and drag Step entering tied notes Enter a note from your MIDI controller press T and then enter another note of the same pitch Shortcuts To
303. ppear in front of other windows in a program they can be hidden only behind other floating windows In MusicTime Deluxe the palettes the Tempo and Keyboard windows and the Toolbar are all floating windows They will always appear in front of the Score window and the Staff Sheet The Hide Floating Windows command gives you an easy way to remove these windows from the screen without actually closing them This is especially helpful with smaller monitors or at low resolutions Choose Hide Floating Windows from the View menu and any of the floating windows on the screen disappear Choose Show Floating Windows and they reappear Note Floating windows must be opened from the Windows menu before you can use the hide show command Windows Menu The Windows menu contains the Palette sub menu the Staff Sheet Keyboard Tempo Window Cus tomizable Toolbar and all open scores Minimize Window The Menus This sends your window to the OSX dock and may be resized by clicking on the icon in the dock Zoom This expands MusicTime Deluxe s window to the full screen Open All Palettes To open all 11 palettes use this command The palettes will be displayed on the left side and may be relocated by dragging Close All Palettes To close all 11 palettes use this command Palette To open any or all of the 11 palettes select Palettes in the Windows menu and select from the palettes sub menu that appears Palettes that are alr
304. put onto a new page page 2 A new page icon appears in the Toolbar Now if you want you can adjust the systems and the spacing between the staves The Fun Part This tutorial just scratches the surface of what you can do with MusicTime Deluxe If you ve followed it closely you ve already developed some excellent skills and habits to help you in your musical endeavors If you want to see what the complete piano vocal arrangement of the tutorial file looks like open the file When Johnny Comes Marching Home with Lyrics A few other operations adding the slur in Measure 11 or the guitar chords you can try on your own This manual is filled with examples and tips about things like voicing transposable chord symbols additional lyric lines all kinds of marks and much much more Now stop working and get playing Selecting In MusicTime Deluxe KESAL hen you make changes to your music in MusicTime Deluxe many of the edit operations require you to first select the notes and objects you want to change Four different selection objectives exist within MusicTime Deluxe notes graphics measures and staves Several methods can be used for selecting these items and some methods are better suited for particular operations than others Using and combining the proper selection methods will require fewer individual edits One of the most basic operations on a computer selecting an area with the arrow pointer
305. r The Menus when calculating the correct tempo and number of beats to be applied Hide Meter can be used to create a pickup within the score If a measure of 4 4 is instead defined as two measures one 7 8 and the other only 1 8 the time signatures in both measures can be hidden and the result can be an eighth note pickup into the next section Note Measure numbers are unaffected by Hide Meter operations Time Signature Reminders When the next system begins with a new time signature the previous measure will have a reminder added by default This optional reminder can be hidden from within the Show Hide dialog If the next measure s time signature is hidden a reminder is never used Pickup Bar The Pickup Bar checkbox performs several functions at once A pickup bar displays the time signature of the following measure instead of the selected time signature In addition the time signature in the next measure is automatically hidden and measure numbers are adjusted for the pickup indication Note First Bar is Pickup in the Measure Numbers dialog and the Pickup Bar option in the Set Time Signature dialog are connected Changing the selection in one dialog will change the option in both dialogs Special Note If the first measure is configured as a pickup bar the measure range in dialogs will be affected as well Be sure to take the pickup measure into account when calculating measure numbers A pickup measure is represented by a
306. r changes in the product described in this manual at any time and without notice All specifications are subject to change without notice Development Matt Ingalls Product Management Richard Hotchkiss User Manual Richard Hotchkiss Matt Ingalls Manual Edition 2012 2012 Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox All Rights Reserved Encore GVOX gvox com Master Tracks Pro MusicTime MusicTime Deluxe Passport and the GVOX Logo bring music to life are trademarks or are registered trademarks of Lyrrus Incorpo rated dba Gvox and its affiliates All rights reserved All copying distribution or use of these materials including the software guide or other materials in whole or part except as expressly permitted by law is prohibited US Patents 5 270 475 and 5 567 903 Other US and foreign patents pending This product is subjected to a limited warranty ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective trademark owners Visit us at www gvox com for customer support and news MusicTime Deluxe User Manual Contents Tutorial o oo eee cec ccc ecc ec eec eee eeeeseeeesee
307. r is at the receiving end This free interpretation of MIDI data is MIDI s greatest strength and greatest source of confusion The MIDI performance you achieve with your synthesizers 1s entirely your own But for shared MIDI files this is not always a good thing The General MIDI description allows MIDI users to refer to an instru mentation standard when selecting sounds General MIDI synthesizers abound in the marketplace and even if you do not own one if you can program your synthesizer you can configure your own General MIDI arrangement At a basic level the General MIDI standard is simply an agreement about the arrangement of patches and their names within the 128 possible program message choices for each channel An agreement also exists for a standard drum arrangement and this determines the pitches used for the array percussion instruments MIDI and MusicTime Deluxe Of course the sound of a General MIDI synth causes great debate among both manufactures and owners Some ask When do we stop defining how a piano should sound This deserves con sideration but we suggest that you simply include documentation when sharing your files with others even if you use the General MIDI patch assignments And if the MIDI performance is really important put it on tape and send it along Even a poor fidelity recording can give the listener more information about how the MIDI file should sound than trying to explain how SoloSynthV X
308. r keys does not correct for extra beats or other timing problems that might result in the process Changing duration using number keys on a selection does not correct for spacing either Two additional operations ALIGN PLAvBACK and ALIGN Spacinc fix playback and spacing problems More on those operations follows later For now let s complete the steps needed to make Measure 4 look like Measure 3 Copying a Note Using The Control Option Key The next step is to add the F note needed to create the correct chord in Measure 4 You could insert the note using the pencil tool but there is a method for copying a note that you will learn instead 1 Select the arrow tool from the Toolbar section of the Score window 2 Hold down the control win option mac key and click on the D note in Measure 4 3 Continue to hold down both control win option mac and the mouse button and drag the D note up one space to the F note location on the staff You have just copied the D note and created a chord Tutorial If you make a mistake and drag to the left or right instead of first moving vertically the note you copy will remain a D note and get copied to a new location in the measure If that happens select Undo Move from the Edit Menu and try again Remember When moving notes with the arrow tool the first direction in which you move decides if you are moving to a new pitch location vertical movement or time location horizon
309. r of these locations to adjust either part of the ending A special control point on the right side of the ending will change the measure ending to either open or closed depending on the current condition The status of the Lock Ending checkbox will not prevent this adjustment If the control option key is held down while changing an ending using any of the control points all other endings in that system will be adjusted at the same time This remains true for control points on both the left and right sides Coda Phrases The Coda Phrases dialog contains various musical phrases used to direct the player to another section in the score When Play Them is selected phrases entered with this dialog will also control playback Note Coda and segno signs also exist in the Symbols palette If you enter a coda or segno indication using the Symbols palette the section will not be interpreted during playback Only codas and segnos entered with the Coda Phrases dialog can affect playback Also included are the words Coda Segno and Fine which can be selected and placed at the appropriate measure Coda Phrases You can select only one phrase at a time Select a Phrase OK The Style Font and Size menus determine the E Ie Os appearance of the phrase selected Font choices apply CDC al Cada D 5 al Coda cancel to all phrases added with the Coda Phrases dialog OD C al Fine C D s al Fine Eis within the score Fic i MusicTime Deluxe p
310. r one staff will change the device referenced for all other staves as well The Choose Program Dialog In collapsed view the Program Name field will display only the number reference for voice one in the Staff Sheet Clicking on the Prg field will open a drop down menu of the instruments available to the device as set in the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog Voices Settings The voice selection drop down menu provides options for program assignment for all voices or for individual voices in a staff Gain Volume Gain is controlled through the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog with the fader at the bottom Changing the Staff Sheet Order The order in which the staves appear within the system can be changed from within the Staff Sheet Changes made to the staff order affects all systems Note Changing the staff order will change the status of hidden staves To change the location of a staff click on the number for the staff in the Staff Sheet and drag the staff up or down to the new position Release the mouse button and the staff will be moved to the new location Note We strongly recommend that you remove any braces or brackets before rearranging the The Menus staff order Keyboard Window The Keyboard window is a graphic on screen keyboard that can be played with your mouse or from your computer s QWERTY keyboard This enables you to input music from a keyboard in step time o
311. r real time without the need for a MIDI keyboard Playing the Keyboard To play the keyboard with your mouse simply click on the keys If you ve got a soundcard or a MIDI sound module connected to your computer you will hear the notes sound as you click on the keys The instrument sound you hear is determined by the channel and program settings for the active staff the staff that contains the blinking insertion cursor The MIDI program and channel settings are made in the Staff Sheet To play the graphic keyboard from your computer s keyboard you must first enable QWERTY note entry mode Click the checkbox labeled QWERTY Keyboard Note Entry in the lower left corner of the Keyboard window The lights on the little keyboard icon turn green and QWERTY note entry mode is enabled The illustration shows the QWERTY keys you can play and their corresponding notes Input notes in step time or real time just as you would with a MIDI keyboard You can even use the QWERTY keyboard to parse chords See Chord Parsing in the chapter Using the Palettes Note When recording in real time from the QWERTY keyboard turn Follow Playback off in the Setup menu for the best results Chords As you may already have noticed you can t enter chords with your mouse You can play chords on your QWERTY keyboard but the number of notes may be limited with certain key combina tions There is however a simple method for step entering c
312. r the Linear View selection Linear View does not affect the printing of your score Hide Floating Windows MusicTime Deluxe has several floating windows Floating windows always appear in front of other windows in a program they can be hidden only behind other floating windows In MusicTime Deluxe the palettes the Tempo and Keyboard windows and the Toolbar are all floating windows They will always appear in front of the Score window and the Staff Sheet The Hide Floating Windows command gives you an easy way to remove these windows from the screen without actually closing them This is especially helpful with smaller monitors or at low resolutions The Menus Choose Hide Floating Windows from the View menu and any of the floating windows on the screen disappear Choose Show Floating Windows and they reappear Note Floating windows must be opened from the Windows menu before you can use the hide show command Windows Menu The Windows menu contains the Palette sub menu the Staff Sheet Keyboard Tempo Window Cus tomizable Toolbar and all open scores Palette To open any or all of the 11 palettes select Palettes in the Windows menu and select from the palettes sub menu that appears Palettes that are already open will have a check mark next to them Palettes are closed by clicking the palette s Close box Open palettes and their locations are saved with preferences and recalled the next time you run MusicTime De
313. re staves that are to be read and played together The standard use for the brace is for instruments such as the piano celeste harp and organ Piano Staves in MusicTime Deluxe have braces added by default but these can be removed if you desire Bracket The Bracket or Accolade is commonly used to connect chamber or choral music or to connect instruments in the same family for orchestral ar rangements Break barline Connect Staves Bracket To add either brace or bracket or to break barlines Cancel for selected staves check the appropriate box Brace To remove one of these indications click in the box again to clear the check mark The Connect Staves dialog will display any existing braces brackets or a broken barline state for your selection by checking the appropriate box Center Staves Center Staves moves all the staves regardless of the vertical spacing within each system to equidistant positions on the page If the number of staves does not fit all extra staves are moved to additional tiles Caution Center Staves is NOT UNDOABLE Center Staves is a quick and easy method to redefine the page layout After adding or deleting staves in your score or when changing the page reduction amount you can use Center Staves to establish a basic layout that can be further edited as needed See Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe for more information about adjusting the page layout for staves and systems The Menus
314. re the voices that normally gray out when you re using the Voice Matre l Es Hel Selector to view individual voices Other Symbols Notes Rests in Voice are the non note rest objects you have entered into your O1 O2 O3 4 Os Os O7 Os score like text and chord symbols Choose Ehe color of Ehe selected item Inactive Voices Other Symbols C Background Near the top of the Change Color dialog is the Color per Staff Lines pop up Click on the color box and the pop up menu Other Symbols bk XE will appear to gain access to the 16 available colors Staff 1 lower Staff 2 upper The graphic below the drop down menu provides a Staff 2 lower visual representation of each of these items Choosing a color for any of the items will cause its color to change NOTE Checked items change throughout score in the graphic The Staff Lines list box displays each of the staves in the score To change a staff s color select a staff in the list box and choose a color from the pop up Press and hold the shift key to select multiple staves The Menus Guitar Frets Chord indications in MusicTime Deluxe are either text only or text and guitar fret indications With the Guitar Frets dialog you can change between either display for any selected section in your score Guitar Frets requires you to select the chords you want to change Select the chords and open the Change Guitar Frets dialog Show Staves Sh
315. retains title to the Program and documentation You further acknowledge that Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox has a valuable proprietary interest in the Program and documentation b Restrictions 1 You may not use copy reproduce modify alter or transfer the program or any copy or merged portion in whole or in part except as expressly provided in this license You may make a single copy of the Program for archival backup purposes in support of your use of the Program ii You acknowledge that the program contains trade secrets of Lyrrus Incorporated dba Gvox In order to protect such trade secrets you may not decompile reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the Program to a human perceivable form You may not modify adapt translate rent lease loan resell for profit distribute network or create derivative works based on all or any part of the program or documentation iii You and your employees and agents are required to protect the confidentiality of the Program You may not electronically transfer the Program or accompa nying documentation from one computer to another over a network You may not distribute or otherwise make the Program or documentation available to any third party by time sharing or otherwise without the prior written consent of Lyrrus Incorporated iv IF YOU USE COPY REPRODUCE MODIFY ALTER OR TRANSFER POSSESSION OF THE PROGRAM OR ANY COPY OR MERGED PORTION IN WHOLE OR IN PART EXCEPT AS EXPR
316. rial A beam appears over the selected group Beam Group should be used to create beams over rests or to include a rest in a beamed group of notes Beam Group 1s also used to create bracket indications for quarter and half note tuplets Changing Barlines You have now entered all the notes and rests and measures necessary for the repeats Now you can define the section to be repeated Barline Types Apply to Range of Measures 1 Select Measure 1 SCH Td Double click in the treble staff of the first full gem m ir n measure that is not the pickup bar Apply to Each Measure in Range Left Right 2 From the Measures menu choose BARLINE TYPES The Baptmp Types dialog box appears At the top E there a drop down menu lets you choose either Apply to Range of Measures or Apply to Selected I Measures For this exercise we will use Apply to Range of Measures Please type in the measure IV Play Repeats range to 16 Make sure the apply to Each Cancel Measure in Range is unchecked Any changes you make to the left barline will only affect the left barline of measure 1 Changes made to the right barline will only affect Measure 16 UE 3 Click the left and right repeat barline buttons 4 Make sure a check appears in the PLay Repeats checkbox If you choose Dr av Repeats and then play the score from the beginning via MIDI it will play until it reaches the right rep
317. rogram change after the previous change cancels the previous inserted MIDI event s effect and replaces it with the new message You can remove MIDI events added with the MIDI Tool by clicking on them with the eraser Imported and recorded MIDI events other than note events are not automatically converted into text items in MusicTime Deluxe MIDI messages which have been imported or recorded into MusicTime Deluxe cannot be removed but can be filtered out when importing or recording the score by setting the Record Setup dialog to only record notes See Record Setup in the Setup menu for more information To edit any MIDI message double click on the message A Word About Controllers Special MIDI messages called Controllers continuously modify a series of notes as they are being played Pitch bend modulation reverb and sustain are just a few of the standard controller types Controller definitions are open for each manufacturer to decide however so controllers can be used for everything from controlling stage lighting to bending notes and changing volume Marimba Pom 13 MEN Using the Palettes Note Just to make things even more confusing the word controller also describes anything that converts someone s movements performance into MIDI Data The controllers added with the MIDI tool are basically two numbers sent from your computer to your synthesizer The first number represents the controller selected The
318. rrent key signature there are instances where your music may require changing the accidentals In the key of C for instance the correct accidental depends on several factors which MusicTime Deluxe cannot know about Notes which do not have an accidental attached will not be affected when changing to flats or sharps Enharmonics The term enharmonic describes two pitches that are notated differently but are still played and sounded the same In practice this is not always true since some instruments can generate slightly different tunings for a pitch depending upon how the pitch is created but in general and always for MIDI the enharmonic spelling for a pitch is just another way to describe the same pitch An example would be F flat and E Every note has an enharmonic equivalent The actual spelling for the enharmonic depends on the key signature Most commonly the enharmonic function helps avoid crowded chord clusters with excessive or confusing accidental indications To change a single note in a chord we recommend that you select the note using the shift click select method see Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe Simplify Accidentals Simplifying accidentals changes the accidentals to best fit the key while removing double sharps and double flats Stems direction Although a menu item has been provided for changing stem direction we recommend that you learn the shortcut equivalents control command U for
319. s SS TAFF ME g X app Size 12 D Style 3 Enter the word Piano into the text box B ate You can also set the font font size and style on a PC by ER C Underline clicking the Font button On a Mac simply choose the desired xo v o justification Le f font size and style from the displayed pop up menus The C Cancel Note Font selection applies to all staves OK staff name will appear on the score as well as in the Staff Sheet dialog when you are done 4 Click OK Piano now appears in the Staff Sheet and on the score to the left of the first system Selecting the MIDI Channel and Instrument sa See ees or MIDI Program B ss BO c i Ao Set the MIDI channel for staff 1 mer r Name Play Solo Size Key Chn Program Name k cain 1 Piano D O3 C 1 Built in 1 Click in the text field below the heading Chn The Chn channel column should already display 1 This means that staff 1 will play back on MIDI Channel 1 For more information about playback devices refer to the MIDI Setup section of this manual When you click the Channel field the STAFF MIDI DEVICE AND INSTRUMENT SETTINGS dialog box appears 2 Select a MIDI channel and Playback Device The STAFF MIDI DEVICE AND INSTRUMENT SETTINGS dialog box allows you to assign a playback device and MIDI channel to each of the eight possible voices in a staff So far you ve only entered notes in voice 1 so that s the onl
320. s This selection is checked by default In normal practice the notes on all staves are considered when using Align Spacing In some instances you may wish to change only the selected staves without changing other staves in the system Uncheck the All Staves option if you do not want MusicTime Deluxe to align the entire system General Spacing Guidelines Although several options exist within the Align Spacing dialog the correct choice will depend on how much prior spacing has been applied to the score Generally speaking the options to alter the number or width of measures should be performed only before graphics and lyrics have been added This ensures that any prior spacing for these items will not be altered in the process After a general arrangement for your score has been decided Adjust Measure Widths and Adjust Measures Per System should not be used again or you may lose spacing considerations that Align Spacing does not calculate Finally after adding lyrics and symbols to each measure you may need to make some final tweaks to the spacing We recommend using Nudge and not Align Spacing See the section on Nudge under the Edit menu for more information Save often save well and save copies of your work as you progress Score Menu Add Page Add um page s The Add Page item allows you to enter any number of blank pages either before or after a before page the currently displayed page c tul All new page
321. s how fast a note is played The faster the note is played the higher the velocity value assigned Since striking a key faster usually results in striking the key harder velocity values have become an effective way to communicate louder playing on most keyboards emulating a piano s response This assumption about velocity is just an assumption however and many other uses for velocity messages exist Velocity can change instrument sounds Instead of a saxophone sound getting louder higher velocity values could change the saxophone to more of a growling sound or even switch completely to an electric guitar Even when velocity changes the volume the message sent only describes one possible volume level For continuous volume changes additional messages need to be sent for every change in volume MIDI uses controller messages for this purpose Often called continuous controllers these messages use two numbers to carry information One number defines the function and the other sends a value All of these numbers have a range It is no coincidence that the same number range appears again and again when changing MIDI values MIDI uses 128 numbers for almost everything 128 different patches or programs can be sent over a channel velocity ranges from 1 to 127 0 is a special message for velocity there are 128 controller types and 128 values usable for each controller Even the number of pitches equals 128 All of these messages must be sorte
322. s 149 Makea C SCOE eee ene nee TTE 149 Create then open using Wizard Wumdows 149 1 149 New LIST AUG SCOPE E 149 Oe 150 OSO oe r E E E E E S 150 SAIO E 150 SUE 150 Rever tO AV CO MEET T UU I enacts 151 EDO 151 PACE NEE 152 Auto Compress EE 152 ACTA Text ano e 152 Priintand luet e NEE 153 Pae S SD a E E EE E ee 153 Recom SCO raa TT 153 El 153 DINGO onan 153 E EN 153 CODI eege 154 WS ATTE UE 154 Autospace On While Pasting 00nn0annannnnnnennennnnnnennennnnrennrnnnrnnrnnrnnnrnnenerrnnne 154 Autospace Off While Pasting sesucicun uua edat k npe a ex tt nme boe RUP Duk t tu Eo EORR 154 4 155 GEC Al PYP 195 pip we P 199 d Table of Contents Nudge Let and IN Le E 155 Nudge Up and WR WEE 156 Notes Menu 156 Attributes anannannannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnerrnnrnrrnrrnrrnrrrnrrnrnnrnnrrnrrnnrnnernrrnnrnnrrnnnnn 156 NOE Sarco e E EEE ENE EE E EAEE EEEE EGS 156 Heer 157 SELIO ee 157 Accidentals eene nemen ememememememeteremeretere reris rrr eren 157 AE SN ler 158 UT MT
323. s created will use the page layout of the current page If you add pages pou 0k after the current page the last measure of the current page will be used to set the time signature and key signature for all measures in the new pages When adding pages before the current page the first measure of the current page will be used to determine the time signature and key signature for all measures in the new pages Note Be careful when adding pages before the first page in your score If you have created a pickup measure the time signature of that pickup measure will be used for all measures in the inserted section Add Page does not have an undo option for the operation If you wish to remove the pages added use the Delete Page function Delete Page From 2 to Delete Page which totals 1 pages Delete Page removes pages from your score Data in those pages gets Cancel NOT UNDOABLE OK Ki The Menus removed with the pages Warning Delete Page is NOT UNDOABLE If you delete pages with notation the notation is lost You can use Revert to Saved to return to a previously saved version but all edits after the file was last saved will be discarded Delete Page will be available only when two or more pages exist The current page will be entered for the delete range but the Delete Page dialog allows a new range for either a different page or more than just one page or both The arrow button to the right of the page range fields will
324. s to all staves e Enter a value into the parameter box labeled Start tablature at fret n e Click OK The selected notes are re transcribed Note All selected items are used for creating the tablature numbers Don t select more than one staff unless you want the tablature part to include fingerings for notes on more than one staff Updates to the tab staff can be made for one note or an entire score Whatever is selected will be converted to numbers on the tab staff Previous fretting indications will be replaced Note If you edit the pitch of a note or notes in a regular staff and then select and reconvert just those notes to an existing tab staff the fingering numbers in the affected measures will revert to the default fingerings Therefore you should be satisfied with the pitches before you nudge the fingering numbers around to different strings If two or more tab staves exist in a score the order in which they appear will determine which staff receives the numbering indications If both staves are intended to be references for the same notation you will need to update each staff separately Use the Staff Sheet to swap staff positions and use Make Tab for each staff By rearranging the staff order it is possible to convert the same piece of notation for several different fretted instruments Create Tab Staff The Tab Staff created by default is in a standard 6 string guitar tuning Use the OK Open Setup button to change
325. s to be altered and typing the keyboard shortcut for MEN Using the Palettes O N ma shifts double sharp Shift JL doublefiat the accidental To remove an accidental from a note click on the note again with the same accidental selected or type the shortcut letter again while the note 1s selected Courtesy Accidentals Enclosing the accidental in parentheses properly indicates a courtesy accidental The Notes palette includes parentheses for this purpose The parenthesis indication is combined with any selected accidental when applied to a note MusicTime Deluxe adds a courtesy accidental when the parenthesis indicator and accidental indicator of choice are selected MusicTime Deluxe normally ignores attempts to add an accidental to a note if the key signature or a previous note in the measure has the same accidental indication To override this behavior and add an additional accidental in the same measure hold down the control option key while applying an accidental With the control option key held down MusicTime Deluxe will always allow an accidental to be added with the pencil tool Accidentals can be spaced either closer to or farther away from the note head by holding the shift key while clicking on the note Note Using the control option key to force an accidental onto a note requires using the pencil The Clefs Palette The Clefs palette contains eight clef choices Treble Bass Alto T
326. s use voice one for the treble or upper staff and voice 5 for the bass or lower staff If a third and fourth staff are added to the piano staff the default voice for the third staff below the default bass clef 1s voice 7 The fourth staff is voice 8 When the voice selector shows Voice paste operations will ignore the voice assignments of the copied data and use the default voice for each staff When pasting data existing notes and rests are replaced for all voice when the voice selector shows Voice Voices 1 8 When the voice selector is set to a voice from one to eight notes recorded in real time step entered or added with the mouse are entered using that voice number Paste operations respect the voice selector settings as well and all pasted material replaces and makes changes to the voice number specified Stem Direction and Voices When notes are entered in either the default mode or voice 1 MusicTime Deluxe applies several rules concerning stem direction Notes above the middle staff line are stems up and notes below the middle staff line are stems down This defaults when the note is entered or moved to a new pitch with the mouse Notes in voices other than the default voice or voice 1 defaults to stems down When using two or more voices for a single instrument the stem directions will need the least adjustment if voice one is used for the voice group with the greatest number of pitches above the middle s
327. same techniques as mentioned above 2 Press the number 3 key on your computer keyboard The selected notes will change from eighth notes to quarter notes Next we need to change the duration of the rest in the bass clef from a quarter note rest to an eighth note rest Tutorial 1 Select the quarter note rest that s to the right of the quarter note chord in the bottom staff of Measure 4 using the same techniques as mentioned above 2 Press the number 4 key on your computer keyboard The selected rest will change from a quarter to an eighth As you may have noticed the number keys on your computer keyboard will change the duration for all selected notes The letters D and T can be used to add or remove dots and tuplet indications to the selection The following are the values for each number key Whole Note 2 Half Note 3 Quarter Note 4 Eighth Note 5 Sixteenth Note 6 Thirty second Note 7 Sixty fourth Note 8 One Hundred and Twenty eighth Note D adds or removes the dotted indication T converts to the tuplet indication To remove a tuplet indication press a number key to select the desired duration For more information about tuplets and how to change the tuplet indication refer to the Using The Palettes chapter of this manual While notes are selected these number keys will change all selected notes to the values indicated above However changing note durations using numbe
328. sanes 182 Sien BNET ERROR UR eae 182 nda NL 182 DEIO Le 183 PIG ed EE TINTE TTD 183 Add _ Regular isse ee ee aa ee ere ene ae eee 183 Adda PIANO SAIN E 184 Change this to a Piano Giant 184 Add a Staff to this Piano Staff EE 184 en E E eet E A E AE E E E 185 Type Note Rhythm Tab Hercuseon 185 asp CAT 0 AN MT 185 on Table of Contents TO EE 185 Be e Ola EE 185 BIS EE 186 OME TAS EEN 186 Move these notes to a new statt 186 PCE TNS Clef e 186 Keep Notes in a Piano E EE 186 CONNECT IIVE S raa E EA TEATA 186 preak Elle S E E E E E E E E EE A E 187 DICO E 187 Sie ie WE 187 EE nn ne ee ee ee ee 187 CISD Ebene 188 oystems DB Patet etude o sonata E neuen tdm PR NEU AME 188 Measures Per E 188 Bd En re EREE I T E UU 189 COS PSS as oS vars tircscrat popes setec sc tian 189 Jeng eile BE ERR 189 Colposer Name E 189 Headers and Biel morsan aE E o ea NN PUR MEI UD 190 Page Date and IME RU T Um TES 190 CAE OA oa 190 PJS 190 CODY drea Lee 190 MIDI Device Instrument Gettmgdes 191 MIDI Playback Settings RETRO OT 191 ides m E 193 Ile le Tel 193 nijce E 193 Stan Nane ees 193 Control e ln Om TT 193 ACCA ON NC EE 193 Ji Clef amp lun CN 194 BaCk OUNO D 194 Fage NA NR t E 194 FRIES OVER
329. se items correspond to menu commands The Toolbar will expand to accommodate and can be resized by dragging the bottom right corner To add icons to the Toolbar e Enter SETUP TooLBAR Moner in the preferences menu Click on the icons on the bottom of the window to add them to the toolbar in whichever order you prefer To remove icons from the Toolbar e Enter SETUP TooLBAR Moner in the preferences menu e Drag the icon from the upper part of the window to the lower part or hold down the shift key and click on the tool to be removed The Toolbar is a floating window that can be activated or deactivated through the Windows menu You can rearrange the order of the enabled tools by clicking and dragging them to the desired position Make sure you select Serur TOOLBAR Mope from the Preferences menu again after editing the toolbar The toolbar will not function while Serur TOOLBAR Mope is on Record Transcription Setup Record items Record Items is used for determining both a split point when recording in real time and for selecting what types of MIDI data are to be either recorded or imported into MusicTime Deluxe Selecting Record Transcription Setup opens a window to the recording options The Split function lets you split incoming notes at a specific pitch location when recording in real time For Split to work properly you should have two staves or a piano staff showing in your score Set the starting
330. sed to display the time Date and time indications will update as you work on the score These indications are saved as special instructions and not as the actual date or time when the score is saved Every time you open the score these settings will reflect the currently displayed time and date for your computer as defined in Windows Date Time Control Panel or Mac s System Preferences Start on Page Start on Page indicates which page begins showing numbering options using the P option For example if you type a 3 in this box you won t see page numbers for pages 1 and 2 and page numbers will start on page 3 Note This feature only hides page numbers It does not re paginate Use Page Offset to re paginate Page Offset Using an offset allows two different scores intended to be first and second sections for the same score to be printed with a consistent page reference For example if your first section ended on page 33 you can continue the page numbering for the second file by entering the number 33 into the page offset Now the second section can be numbered starting with page 34 Copyright Notice Copyright information is centered at the bottom of the score Six lines are provided for copyright Each line can use a different font selection Font changes are made independently from other lines The Menus MIDI Device Instrument Settings The Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog provides access to all ins
331. ses Ivi Use Phrase 9 D C al Coda C To Coda C D S al Coda Fine C D C al Fine D C D S al Fine C Segno OD S Coda Zil Play All Phrases Font Style Times Bold M Italic Size 12 HH Underline Note Font applies to all phrases F The Menus added with the Coda Phrases dialog within the score MusicTime Deluxe places Coda phrases within the selected measure at a default location and can be adjusted Each phrase however can be adjusted only within the measure it was added to and will not move beyond that measure To move the phrase click and hold on the phrase and move it to the desired location Measure Numbers Measure numbers can be added or removed at any time Measure SS Te numbers showing in the score will also appear on printouts Font Style l mE Times D jBold Mitalic Font attributes for measure numbers are selected by clicking the sze 10 M9 EOM Font button AA Namie fei Every 1 measure s Click the Add Numbers checkbox to activate the measure numbers C Each system function f Start with First Bar ral First Bar is a Pickup Measure numbers can be shown for every measure every nth Enclose numbers in a Box measure or at the beginning of each system If you select Each system the numbers will automatically update when the layout is changed to show the new measure number beginning each system Number Offset 0 Place lo space s ms pid The first measure num
332. seseeseeaeeeeseeeeseeseegees 19 Running Music hun Deluxe e 19 penno Eeer 19 Changing the Starting Clef t 20 Roven IO E EE 20 SSDIIEUDG SE 21 Creating a Pickup Bar nie oot etedesngee cee cee dHopoentdeied uu Md Icd 23 Adang a E 23 Changing buet inne ele Er 23 Assigning a Measure to be a Pickup Bar 24 Blue M oL eee ee T E 24 EONO AR O S ee ee E 25 El e a gl E a EEES 25 Selecting the MIDI Channel and Instrument or MIDI Program 26 USR erc Le EE 2 Changing the MIDI Volume tr 27 A elei laten a EE 28 Dragging to a i i dai RTT 28 Bleu tee e EC 28 e HL Gree dite e 29 Ville VEN ee e nt 29 ORNS TI AEN MR mU 30 Copying a Note Using The Control Option hey 31 Erasing Notes and SSS cetacean esee siu ID MEUM MEM Lue ees 32 Copying a Chord Using The Control Option Key 32 e 272 11 96 TES eee ee een ne T ee nee eee 33 AGUSIA HE 33 e e wl 816 P Eeer 34 Me DSi Rote eee eee ee ee A een ee MM EE 34 Ire a MCA SUTO aa tree seen ae ner ener ree eee eee tee ee eee 35 ele dl LE RN 36 BAUM INO Sacer ene cca cee ee cee eae pee 36 Si iere lt 37 RODO ENNO Soe E T E 3 Lavibdg 10 eal bezu Ee 38 SE le Un ek EE gt eee ee ree ne er T Em 39 Ee Ee lare Big DIUS eO tectaemens 39 Ville tee 40 KOVNO SVS un E 40 Bi gclelo lace mici oc eee eee ene ene ieee Om 41 Ae Sle E ESE meen ren ne Ene ene enter tear nee OT 41 Biko leien oul tod a ET eer ae eee ene US 42 NIO SOD Kee 42
333. signature for the new range is not indicated Click the arrow to the right of the measure range to enter the last measure in your score in the to box You can use this to select to the end without knowing how many measures currently exist MusicTime Deluxe includes two standard time signatures C is used for 4 4 and is the same as 2 4 Since the click value can be altered the metronome could effectively give the impression of 8 8 or 4 4 time as well However the tempo applied to the meter will be based always upon a quarter note See the section on Tempo for more information Note The click amount must always divide evenly into the number of beats upper or left portion of time signature Other When the standard selections do not include the time signature desired you can define one yourself using Other MusicTime Deluxe allows up to sixteen beats per measure upper or left portion of time signature and units of 1 whole note 2 half note 4 quarter note 8 eighth note 16 sixteenth note and 32 thirty second note When defining the choice for Other the number of clicks to be used will be updated to a common selection If you wish to base the click on another value you can enter the number after you have finished defining the time signature The click however must divide evenly into the number of beats Hide Meter Hide Meter will simply hide the time signature defined The time signature is still used howeve
334. sions The shortest note duration in the melody line is an eighth note Choose the closest duration available in the TRANSCRIPTION SETUP dialog In this case that would be the eighth note 3 Click OK gt __ Enable Enter Key to Start Stop Recording TIT __ Ignore Triplets IV Auto Align Playback After Transcribing The next thing you ll need to do is set up the metronome click and enable it 1 From the MusicTime Deluxe Preferences menu choose CLick On Off You may change the click set up by going to MusicTime Deluxe gt Preferences gt Click Setup Click Setup l Device Chan Pitch Vel Dur msec Bar click Built In Synth 1 10 34 100 5 SS Beat click Built In Synth 1 10 FH ai 33 Rap Bi l Only Use Click When Recording Pre roll Playback Click Tutorial Before you attempt to record it might be a good idea to slow down the tempo Change Tempo 1 From Measure to 17 Place the cursor in the first measure of the vocal staff Gei Set all Tempos to 200 2 From the Measures menu choose TEMPO Change to 100 of current values The CHANGE TEMPo dialog appears Change smoothly 80 to 120 Add 0 to all values OOO 3 Indicate Measure range and Set all tempos to 200 beats per minute fe NW Cm RE e 4 Click OK Before you record you should make sure that MusicTime Deluxe s Split Staff function 1s turned off Split S
335. slur to make them more legato or smooth Play Hairpins contains two options The first Ramp to Ending Dynamic enables MusicTime Deluxe to scan ahead to the next dynamic marking and smoothly crescendo or decresceno The second option Always Change Dynamic By makes all hairpins perform in the same way increasing or decreasing by n velocity from the last dynamic marking before the hairpin Play Marks allows you to change velocity and duration for specific accent and articulation markings View Menu The View menu contains several methods to select both how the score is viewed and what items are to be shown within the score Show Hide Show Hide contains checkboxes to either show or hide notational elements and page layout options such as arulers and page margins To show any of the selections in the Show Hide dialog enable the checkbox next to the item that is click in the box so a 3 appears With the exception of rulers all selections in the Show Hide dialog affect only the current score and are saved for each score independently Rulers Rulers are useful in page view when aligning several objects at different locations You can select either inches or centimeters Ruler status on or off 1s saved with a score only but the selection of inches or centimeters is saved in preferences The inches or centimeter selection applies to all open scores Rulers are not available on Mac Staff Name Staff names can be displayed on the
336. ss the notes combined into a chord were hand entered with Auto Space off the number of beats in the measure will change as well You may need to add rests or additional notes to complete the measure It is also a good idea to Align Playback Make Grace Cue This function lets you change notes to grace notes or cue notes and to clear the grace or cue attributes MusicTime Deluxe does not count grace notes when calculating the number of beats in each measure and their playback can be set to play in advance of the next note if the grace note can Cue Motels borrow time from a preceding note or rest Cue notes have their PASSEN full beat value counted in the measure and are muted by default If cue notes are to be used to indicate alternate or secondary lines Scale duration by Ns add all of the cue notes in a separate voice Play before the beat p av Deore he Ded _ No slash appegagiatura Grace Cue Note Grace C Standard Note s Before MusicTime Deluxe can create grace notes you must first enter the duration used for the grace as a regular note Note When a phrase of two or more beamed notes are converted to grace notes the original duration of the note is retained in the beamed configuration Single grace notes however are always converted to the standard eighth note grace character When notes added to a measure are intended to be grace notes you will need to turn OFF Auto Space and Auto Guess Beam With Auto Sp
337. st common set up involves a single MIDI instrument with its own sound generating capa bilities a MIDI interface and your computer running MusicTime Deluxe The MIDI Out of the instrument 1s connected to the MIDI In of the interface the MIDI Out of the interface 1s connected to the MIDI In of the instrument There is also a slight variation of this setup If you are using a multitimbral instrument with the ability to receive MIDI data on several channels simultaneously you may want to turn off the instru ment s ocal control Normally an instrument s local control is on This means the keyboard controls its internal local sound generating hardware When local control is off the performance data from the instrument notes pitch bend sustain pedal etc is transmitted via the MIDI Out device but it does not control the local synthesizer hardware In other words you play the keyboard and the only thing that comes out is MIDI data no sound If you connected the instrument s MIDI Out to its own MIDI In you would generate sound Turning local control off essentially splits an instrument into a master controller and a separate sound module mmm 7 Synthesizer MIDI Interface Computer Running Encore So why would this be useful If you are working on a score with multiple staves on multiple MIDI channels you can turn on MusicTime Deluxe s MIDI Thru option and use MusicTime Deluxe to determine which channel and thereby which of y
338. st or chord using your MIDI instrument Select the note rest or chord that you want to replace in your score and play the replacement note or notes on your MIDI instrument The duration will be the same as the existing notes or rest If you select more than one event only the first item found in the selection will be replaced MIDI Paste automatically clears the selection after making the replacement Save Preferences MusicTime Deluxe automatically saves preferences However we do understand that sometimes you may want a different preferences set up for different scores To acheive this you will need to make templates with the preference set ups you desire MusicTime Deluxe allows an unlimited number of user created templates Spacing and Clef Changes Since clefs cannot be dragged to new locations with the mouse and ALIGN Spacinc does not keep notes from overlapping clefs past the start of a measure you ll have to take a few extra steps to correctly space measures in which a clef change is needed and where room for the clef change was not allowed for in the first place If the clef change occurs at the end of a measure first complete the measure before adding the clef Select and justify the measure optional Unless the measure contents do not require extra space for the clef you will probably need to create the needed space yourself With Auto Space off select the arrow tool and hold down both the control and shift keys Then
339. staves when using the name field in the Staff Sheet Voices on Piano Staves The default voicing assignments for piano staves is as follows The top staff treble by default uses voices 1 4 Voice 1 is used by default when inserting notes in all voices Voice view The bottom staff bass clef by default uses voices 5 8 Voice 5 1s used by default when inserting notes in all voices Voice view A piano staff can be from two to four staves See Add a Staff to this Piano Staff for more The Menus information Add Staff Add a Staff to this Piano Staff ada 1_ staves Add a Piano Staff If an existing piano staff with fewer than four staves 1s Add a stalt to this Piano Stalf selected before opening the Add Staff dialog the option Note Use a Piano Staff for cross staff beaming for Add a staff to this Piano Staff will be enabled Organ Placement Add Below arrangements sometimes need more than two staves PEETER Piano parts for two players can also use the four stave eegen system The voicing defaults when adding a third or fourth stave will use voices normally intended for the bass clef of a piano staff The third staff will use voice 7 by default and the fourth staff will use voice 8 These are the default assignments for notes entered in all voices or Voice view Cross staff beaming requires piano staves To create a beam between two staves in a Piano Staff you must use the s
340. strument or instruments to be heard Click in the solo field for the staff you wish to solo A solid diamond indicates a soloed staff Staves which are not soloed will reflect their temporary mute status by changing the play indication the solid triangle to gray As many staves as desired can be soloed and the solo function can be enabled and disabled while playing Name The Name field is used within the score when Show Names is enabled in the Show Hide dialog The name is always placed to the left of the staff and will be centered between the staves of a piano staff Click in the Name field to open the Staff Name dialog and enter a name for the staff You can also use this dialog to set the font and style for the name as it appears on the score Staff names are always right justified against the staff If you want to change this enter spaces after the name to offset the staff name Line returns can be used as well Size MusicTime Deluxe provides four sizes for staves Click the Size field to open the Set Staff Size dialog Staff sizes can be set independently for each staff Use the provided checkbox for changing all staves at the same time Move the slider from to 4 to set the staff size Key The Key field in the Staff Sheet transposes only the playback of the staff Clicking in the Key field opens a dropdown menu with a list of all known instrument transpositions The Key function transposes individual instruments staves
341. sustain pedal is to be used For a full discussion on the Pedal indication we suggest that you refer to a notation manual or music dictionary Pedal indications can optionally affect MIDI playback The pedal indication uses controller 64 messages to control sustain To turn MIDI playback of the pedal on or off double click on the indication in the palette When MIDI is used for the indication a value of 127 for controller 64 will be sent over MIDI at E 3 Click crosshair on line the location of the sign and a sustain off message a value of 0 for controller 264 will be sent every time a 9 is inserted Please refer to your synthesizer manual to learn 1f your synthesizer responds to controller 64 messages EI You can drag the notch with the arrow pointer The new notch appears Note The zi and indications can be moved only if you are MEN Using the Palettes working in all voices or voice one The voice selection is important for MIDI Playback since the Pedal indicator only affects all voices when the voice indication is set to a dash Pedal indications do not affect voices separately Additional Pedal Indicators Two additional graphics included in the tools palette indicate pedal usage These are graphic items only and do not affect MIDI playback On both the slanting and horizontal line symbols the initial and ending jogs denote the pedal down and release moments To apply either of t
342. t key 2 Click on the head of a note displaying a sharp sign The sharp sign moves slightly to the left You can click up to 7 times before the sign returns to its original position You can change many notes in one operation using a letter shortcut First select the notes in your score Use either the shift select technique above or draw a selection around the notes If you use the shift selection technique you can add additional notes to your selection by continuing to hold both the mouse button and shift key down while moving the arrow tool over each note you wish to add to the selection Tutorial If you select an area by clicking and dragging with the arrow tool you can add to the selection by holding the shift key down after the first selection and selecting in new areas The following are the shortcut letters for selecting or changing the accidentals in MusicTime Deluxe S for Sharp F for Flat N for Natural Shift S for double sharp Shift F for double flat When notes are selected in your score these letter keys will add or remove the indicated accidental for each selected note Note Ifthe key signature or a previous note in a measure already displays the selected accidental standard music notation does not repeat the indication MusicTime Deluxe will not add accidentals to a selected note if the indication is already in affect You can however force accidentals onto notes if needed Such indicatio
343. t lyric Esc takes you back to Arrow tool The Text Tool Text boxes in MusicTime Deluxe can hold up to 8 192 characters and text can exist in different fonts sizes and styles within each text box Text boxes like all graphic items in MusicTime Deluxe are attached to a measure This attachment ensures that tempo and other musical instructions get copied and move along with the music during spacing and part extraction Creating a Text Box Select the Text Tool from the Graphics palette Locate in your score the pointer where the top left corner of the text should be Click and drag the text pointer to define a text box A dotted reference line will be drawn showing where the text will be placed Text boxes resize after you exit text entry mode to eliminate extra space If you resize the width of a text box the text within reformats to word wrap each line to fit the new MEN Using the Palettes text box width Click and drag the lower right control point to change the size of the text box and reformat You can adjust the text box width without exiting text entry or after existing text entry using the arrow tool Changing Fonts Within a Text Box You can change Font selections at any time If text has not been selected or entered changes to the font selection are applied to the text that is about to be entered You can also perform changes on previously entered text by selecting the text you wish to
344. taff allows you to record into a piano staff in real time and split the notes onto the treble and bass staves as you record However if you intend to record in only one staff while Split Staff is on you may wipe out data that s already been recorded in another staff 1 From the MusicTime Deluxe Preferences menu choose Record TRANSCRIPTION SETUP The Record TRANSCRIPTION SETUP dialog box appears 2 Make certain the checkbox labeled Split Notes Below is disabled not checked 3 Click OK Now you can record the vocal melody Place the insertion cursor in the pickup bar of the vocal staff Recording will begin in the measure that contains the cursor 2 Click the Record button in the Toolbar or press the enter key If everything is set up properly you should hear a 1 bar count in before recording begins Since this piece has a pickup bar recording will actually begin on beat 6 of the count in Note Enter key must be enabled through Preferences gt Record Transcription Set Up 3 Play your MIDI instrument 4 Stop recording before the end of measure 16 To stop recording click the Record button again or press the spacebar There is a brief pause while all the notes are guessed and beamed If you made a mistake use the Undo command to erase the recording Entering Lyrics The next step 1s to add the lyrics to the vocal part MusicTime Deluxe makes entering lyrics simple Lyrics are attached to notes and you can
345. taff line Note If AuTO SPACE 1s off enter each voice by clicking in the notes from left to right If Auro SPACE is on notes are best added from the far right side of the measure letting the auto spacing routine perform the spacing for you Voices and Beaming Two important rules concerning beams and voices should be remembered 1 Beams can be created only between notes that are in the same voice 2 Beams will not extend to another staff cross beam unless both staves belong to a piano staff If notes are selected and changed to a new voice all beams drawn for the selected notes will be removed For this reason voicing operations should be performed prior to beaming operations whenever possible Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Piano staves share all eight voices and are designed specifically to address the need for cross staff beaming Cross staff beaming is discussed later in this section When To Use Another Voice To better understand how to use MusicTime Deluxe s voicing capabilities it is important to know when a musical idea will require two or more voices The example below uses two voices The total number of beats used in the first measure is greater than the time signature The quarter notes were entered in voice one the default voice For this example the quarter notes were also changed so that all were stems up The voice selector was then set to voice two The whole notes were entered and the tie
346. taff when it is not needed by using the hide staff function See the section on Hide Staff for more information Tab Staff The Tab Staff indicates the fingering for fretted instruments Each line of the Tab staff refers to a string on the instrument and numbers placed along the string indicate the fingering position relative to the instrument s frets and tuning Click on OK Open Setup to set up the Tab staff Tab staves are usually combined with standard notation staves since the durations for each note cannot be easily indicated along with the fingering numbers A complete discussion of the Tab Staff can be found in the section concerning the Make Tab item See the Notes menu and Make Tab or Tablature Staff for more information Percussion Staff Percussion staves are used for notating drum and percussion parts See Chapter 12 Percussion Staff for more information about adding and editing a percussion staff The Menus Delete Staff When a staff is no longer needed for the entire score you can use Delete Staff to completely remove the staff Delete Staff requires a selection All selected staves will be removed Caution Delete Staff is NOT UNDOABLE All notation on the staves is deleted along with the staff or staves themselves If you are working on a score with several instruments and you wish to hide instruments for a section when they are not playing use Hide Staves and not Delete Staff The Hide Staves command does not re
347. tal movement Erasing Notes and Rests You now have a two note chord identical to the chord that begins in Measure 3 but there are extra rests in Measure 4 that need to be removed before you can create the second chord and tie the two together MusicTime Deluxe lets you remove notes or rests in several ways You can use the eraser tool and click on each note or rest one at a time or you can make a selection and remove everything in the selection Using the eraser tool when AutoSpace is on will change the spacing of the measure as each note or rest is erased If you erased the two quarter note rests in Measure 4 using the eraser each erase operation would move the eighth note at the end of Measure 4 closer to the start of the measure For this excerise go to the setup menus and turn off AutoSpace by scrolling down to it and releasing the mouse button AutoSpace will then be unchecked Now when you make a selection and remove notes or rests in a measure the remaining notes no longer adjust automatically In our example we want to keep the eighth note at the end of Measure 4 and only remove the quarter note rests 1 Select the Arrow tool if it isn t already selected and select both quarter rests on the top staff You can use the same shift select technique for rests as you did for notes but it may be easier in this example to click and drag with the mouse to create the selection 2 Select Clear from the Edit Menu or pr
348. te What actually happens when different velocity values are used depends entirely upon the synthesizer responding to the MIDI messages Common practice however uses velocity to control volume For more information about velocity see the appendix on MIDI Change Velocity requires a selection The dialog for changing velocity contains both ON and OFF selections These settings can be enabled independently Note Consult the documentation for your synthesizer to determine if it responds to OF or OFF Velocity or both Most synthesizers will respond to OF Velocity but very few respond to OFF Velocity There are four choices in the Change Velocity dialog Setting all velocities to the same value will ensure that all volumes are the same Changing by percentage maintains any changes made within the selection and scales the velocity levels The values range from 1 to 999 Percentage changes close to maximum or minimum will compress the dynamic range to one extreme or the other Change smoothly will replace the velocity values for the selected notes with new values obtained from the value range entered The first value will be applied to the first note and the second value applied to the last note in your selection Notes between the beginning and end selections will be altered according to their placement in time This means the changes in velocity level for short durations will be more gradual than changes between notes with longer duratio
349. te and rest indicators These are the two augmentation dots and the tuplet indicator Augmentation Dots The single augmentation dot indicates a duration increased by one half of the note value A double dot indicates the duration is increased by three quarters The dot can be selected using the D key PE Select the double dot by using shift option D The dotted combinations are applied after selecting MEN Using the Palettes a note duration and are automatically cleared when a new note duration is selected Tuplets The last item in the Notes palette is the tuplet indication The tuplet selection defaults to the standard triplet 3 2 The word tuplet refers to the various combinations of unequal rhythmic patterns which can only be notated by subdividing a standard duration note If you are unfamiliar with the concept of tuplets you may find it easier to understand how the numbers will apply to a selected note duration by converting the colon sign into the phrase in the time that and then forming a sentence using the selected duration For example if you select an eighth note and the tuplet indicator is set for 3 2 you could think of the new duration for the eighth note as 3 eighth notes in the time that 2 eighth notes would normally occupy To enter a tuplet select the desired note duration Then click on the tuplet item at the bottom of the Notes palette or press the T key Enter the tuplet in the score
350. tely fill the number of beats for the measure based on the current time signature When voices are required to begin on beats after the initial downbeat the proper amount of rest indications should be entered before the first notes If a measure is edited or entered out of order that is from back to front or inside out ALIGN PLAYBACK and ALIGN SPACING may be needed to correct MIDI playback Using Additional Voices What if you need additional sixteenth notes That would require using a third voice In the following example a sixteenth note phrase was added for the last beat The choice of voice 3 for the added notes was made only to provide a clear example of the additional voice as if it was added as an afterthought to our previous example or being played by a third instrument In general practice it is recommended that voices be entered using voice one for the highest pitched notes in the score This is only a recommendation however and as long as care is taken to complete the voices used in each measure any voice number can be used Using Two Voices Sometimes two or more voices will be needed even when the same durations are used fa F Ach L Voices in MusicTime Deluxe In the previous example two voices have been used to create the beamed groups The stems up notes are all in voice one The stems down notes are all in voice 2 This example could be for two instruments notated on the same staff
351. tes from voices Ka Lj Oz 3 C4 Enter the split point in the highlighted text box ris a a a As mentioned earlier the lowest note in the right hand part is the Bb2 below middle C therefore you want to move all of the notes below Bb2 onto the new staff containing the left hand Set the clef to Bass P part The text box defaults to C3 where C is the A Cre note and 3 represents the octave MIDI notes range Create a Piano Staff from a low of C 2 C minus 2 to G8 with C3 being middle C The octaves are numbered from each C to the B above it So the Bb below middle C C3 is Bb2 Tutorial You can enter the split point in two ways The easiest way is to simply play the note on your MIDI instrument while the text box is highlighted you may need to select the text box first That note will then appear in the text box You can also type in the note using your computer s keyboard Enter a B then a lower case b for the flat sign and the number 2 You could also enter the enharmonic A2 using the pound number sign for the sharp sign Note MusicTime Deluxe will display an AZ2 when you use MIDI to enter the split point 5 Choose a clef for the new staff By default the bass clef should be selected If it is not click the radio button next to Bass There should be a mark in the checkbox labeled Kepr Notes iN A PIANO Start Windows or CREATE A Pravo Srarr Mac MusicTime Deluxe treats a piano staff i
352. test method of step entering notes If you re using a MIDI keyboard or other MIDI instrument you can use it to enter pitches in step time The notes durations are determined by the current duration chosen in MusicTime Deluxe If you use the computer s number keys to choose durations you can enter notes with one hand and choose durations with the other With a little practice it s quite easy Note If you are using a MIDI master controller and a separate sound module you will need to click on the Thru button in the Toolbar When Thru is on MIDI data received at the computer s MIDI in port is simultaneously transmitted from the computer s MIDI Out port See The Menus chapter for more information about MIDI Thru Place the insertion cursor in the pickup bar of the vocal staff When you use MIDI step entry place the cursor in the measure where the notes are to be inserted Choose the eighth note in the Notes palette Tutorial For MIDI step entry to work the Notes palette must be the active palette and the pencil tool must be selected in the Toolbar 3 Play the first four notes of the melody The notes appear in the vocal staff It 1s best to play fairly staccato Notes are not entered in the score until you release the key on your MIDI keyboard If you play a phrase and the notes overlap even slightly those notes will be scored as a chord This comes in handy when you want to enter widely spaced chords Play the first note then the
353. th Drum Rey Cymbal GuitFrethoise Breath Noise Sea Shore Bird Tweet Phone Ring Helicopter Applause Gun Shot J Reverb Level The Dynamics settings allow you to customize the velocity range for each dynamic marking The Send Volume Control check box sends the dynamics data within the ranges selected to MIDI controller 7 volume If you are using the Garritan Studio to use Garritan s instrument samples MusicTime Deluxe will recognize the Garritan Studio and send the volume message to the Mod wheel as per Garritan s specifications Change Note Velocities replaces the recorded velocities with the velocities specified in the dynamics ranges The Humanize feature uses more random attack MIDI Playback Settings Dynamics OK Velocity Ranges Play Pedal Markings 3l Cancel Play Slurs SS Help 55 Play Hairpins by 9 Ramp to Ending Dynamic d CQ Always Change Duration By 40 q1 SE 103 Play Marks Accents 115 127 A Add to the velocity gt Add to the velocity Send volume Control Articulations Play duration at 35 Change Note Velocities Play duration ak 75 Humanize V Play duration at 5 192 The Menus velocities and volume velocities Play Pedal Markings activates the sustain pedal controller 64 when indicated and releases when indicated in the score Play Slurs sends MIDI legato to controller 68 This adjusts the attack and decay of the notes in the
354. th the tempo tool will override the previous tempo settings when CHANGE PLAYBACK 1s checked MIDI Playback Settings Dynamics Velocity Ranges IV Play Pedal Markings V Play Slurs PPP Ivi Play Hairpins 55 Gei Ramp to Ending Dynamic Lp 3 Always Change Dynamic By 40 sept 79 mf Ivi Play Marks 5 Accents 103 A Add 40 to the velocity 115 Add 20 tothe velocity 127 Articulations Play duration at 95 Mi Send Volume Control ay duration a Change Note Velocities jay curator 73 W Humanize A Play duration at 50 Canes Hairpins or Wedges Hairpins or Wedges are dynamics markings used to indicate a temporary increase or decrease in volume for a section Hairpins can affect MIDI playback by scaling the velocity values of the notes MEN Using the Palettes in the area where the hairpin is added To set the value used for scaling and enable their use in playback double click on the hairpin item in the Tools palette This opens the MIDI PLAYBACK SETTINGS dialog box Hold the shift key while drawing or dragging to flip the hairpin to the opposite direction Adding a hairpin After selecting the hairpin tool place the crosshair anywhere on the score Click hold and drag the crosshair to the left to indicate diminishing volume Click hold and drag the crosshair to the right to indicate increasing volume Hairpins can stand alone or be used in conjunction with other dynami
355. the device type for one staff will change the device referenced for all other staves as well The Choose Program Dialog In collapsed view the Program Name field will display only the number reference for voice one in the Staff Sheet Clicking on the Prg field will open a drop down menu of the instruments available to the device as set in the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog Voices Settings The voice selection drop down menu provides options for program assignment for all voices or for individual voices in a staff Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings Staff 1 H4 Playback Device Built In Synth 1 Bank Apple General MIDI DLS Y All Voices p 2 Voice 1 M t 2 Acoustic Bs Strings 5oprano5ax Square Wave ice Rain Weit Voice 3 Voice 4 Fretless Bs Syntrings2 Baritone Sax Chitfer Lead rv ee Ecordion Fr Voice 6 armonica Voice 7 indeneon SynthBass2 Orchestran Clarimet Bass amp Lead Star Theme ws Violin Trumpet Piccolo Famasia P Voice 8 Seat Vioa Trombone Flute WarmPad Vibraphone CleanGt Contrabass MutedTrumpet PanFlute ____ Space Voice Koto og Marimba Med Gt Tremolo Str French Homs Xylophone Overdrive Gt PizzicatoStr Tubular bell DistertionCt Harp Synth Brass1 Whistle Halo Pad Fiddle impari Synth Brass2 Ocarina
356. the same measure will also be aligned Autospace Off While Pasting If Auto Space is off MusicTime Deluxe will not use Align Spacing for the pasted area and the original spacing will be maintained If the measure width of copied data is different than the measure s into which the data is pasted the data 1s scaled to fit the new area This works best when complete measures are copied but will also affect paste operations for notes that do not fill the measure Note Paste operations will paste notes text lyrics and all graphic indications with the exception of Clefs Paste does not paste tempo time signature and key signature changes MusicTime Deluxe copies data within each measure but not the measure itself Time signatures tempos and key signatures are all attributes saved for each measure Clefs are anchors giving MusicTime Deluxe a reference point for relating all the entered note data Tempo indications added from the Tool palette will be pasted but only as a graphic item If you are copying a section that includes clef changes time signature changes or key signature changes we recommend that you first create the measures needed and define at least the time signature for each section before pasting Key signatures can be added before or after pasting and clefs should always be added after the paste If the time signature of copied data 1s different than the measure into which it is being pasted MusicTime Del
357. these defaults Tablature staves are created below the selected staff but can be moved to any staff position after they are created see Staff Sheet for more information Setup The OK Open Setup button takes you to the dialog used to select the number of strings and their respective tuning MusicTime Deluxe can create a tablature staff containing from one to eight string indications Each string will correspond to a line in the tablature staff MusicTime Deluxe uses the tuning information when creating the fret position numbers and when nudge is used to change the string reference You may use one of our presets or create The Menus you own set up Note Tablature and notation for fretted instruments 1s frequently written an octave higher than played The standard guitar tuning for example uses E2 as the pitch for Low E but most guitarists tune to El The Key function in the Staff Sheet can be used to transpose the playback for a guitar part on the standard staff for the proper register of the intended instrument Font menus provided in Setup determine how the number indications in the tablature staff are to be displayed and printed The font choice affects all tablature staves in the score Selecting a tablature staff alone and then choosing Make Tab will open the Setup dialog independently of the Make Tab dialog This permits you to change just the font and tuning information Changing the String Indications Numbers o
358. tion of individual notes can also be used for creating slurs but The Menus take care A slur will be generated between every pair of shift selected notes Shift clicking on the beginning and ending note head of a phrase will slur that phrase Beam Notes The Beam Notes item has a sub menu containing the four beaming operations used within MusicTime Deluxe For more information on changing Beams see also Attributes gt Beams Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe and Spacing Defaults Beam Group creates brackets or beams over all selected notes and rests and also creates beams across barlines Beam On Beat uses the time signature and beat location for the selected notes to determine a default beaming combination The Auto Guess Beam function uses Beam On Beat Sub Group will break the secondary beams under the primary beam of a beamed group into smaller groups without changing the duration information This leaves only the primary beam connecting the entire group Flatten Beams changes angled beams so that they run in a straight horizontal line All notes must be in the same voice for Beam Group and Beam On Beat to work Notes in different voices will be beamed according to the logic or selection applied to each separate voice Beam Group and Beam On Beat require an unbeamed selection to function properly If any of the selected areas were previously beamed these two beaming operations will undo
359. tions as a group Nudge can be particularly useful for adjusting the horizontal alignment of several staves without sacrificing their vertical alignment Use Align Spacing to apply engraver s rules to your music and then nudge to make subtle adjustments to horizontal spacing while still retaining the essential vertical alignment between staves This lets you create room for articulations composer notes graphics and lyrics Since nudge operations are frequently needed to move data in greater increments than a single The Menus nudge the nudge command will respond to key repeat messages The delay before repeats occur can be set in the Keyboard Control Panel Nudge Up and Down MusicTime Deluxe allows you to use Nudge Up and Nudge Down commands on objects To change the pitch of a note up or down use Move Notes in the Notes menu Notes Menu Change Note Attribute Attributes Stem Height Note Head The Attributes menu 1s a hierar Set stem height 0 633 7 Set head type chical menu with a sub menu for me Notes Beams and Rests Each Apply to Beamed Notes J i of these sub menu items opens a 7 dialog for that item and allows you 4 e to change how MusicTime Deluxe _ hift accidental left 0 7 displays and prints the related Set Play State Mute Play The Attributes menu requires that you first select the notes or rests to be altered Notes set Stem Height The stem height can be any number fro
360. to reopen the window for each staff or voice MIDI Playback Settings Music is just a bunch of notes if there is no life to it With MIDI Playback Settings you can bring music to life or close to it nothing can replace a live musician by adjusting the velocities of dynamics and markings The MIDI Playback Settings window allows you to control dynamics velocities Send Volume Control Change Note Velocities Humanize MIDI Playback Settings Play Pedal Markings Slurs and Hairpins Lm BE UE oe Ramp to Ending Dynamic Always Change oe ee ETT I bad ees Dynamic By n Play Marks including Accents eer M Play Hairpins and Articulations pe Ramp to Ending Dynamic ez Always Change Dynamic By 40 The Dynamics settings allow you to customize amp the velocity range for each dynamic marking raf p A Play Marks The Send Volume Control check box sends ra ae m the dynamics data within the ranges selected 103 Add 40 tothe velocity to MIDI controller 77 volume If you are Zeen gt Add 20 re the velocity using the Garritan Studio to use Garritan s 127 Articulations EN instrument samples MusicTime Deluxe iil Send Volume Control es ios will recognize the Garritan Studio and send C Change Note Velocities Play duration at 75 the volume message to the Mod wheel as M Humanize A Play duration at SO X per Garritan s specifications Change Note Velocities replaces the recorded velocities ao qu with the velocities specif
361. to use for the selected staff voice A test note will be played Hitting a key on the computer keyboard will play another test note Select the MIDI channel It is best to assign each staff to its own MIDI channel If staves or voices share MIDI channels then you must be careful to ensure that they use the same settings otherwise unpredictable conflicts may occur Adjust the Gain volume by moving the slider If the slider is all the way to the left then the gain is at maximum Adjust the Pan to determine speaker balance left right or somewhere in between Adjust the Reverb Level as desired Repeat the process for each staff and voice Click OK You may make all of your instrument assignments in one use of the dialog and then hit OK There is no need to have to reopen the window for each staff or voice MIDI Playback Settings Music is just a bunch of notes if there is no life to it With MIDI Playback Settings you can bring music to life or close to it nothing can replace a live musician by adjusting the velocities of dynamics and markings The MIDI Playback Settings window allows you to control dynamics velocities Send Volume Control Change Note Velocities Humanize Play Pedal Markings Slurs and Hairpins Ramp to The Menus Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings Staff 1 w i 1 MSG Device Preset Type Port A ei Bank General MIDI Open VST Player All voies Grand Piano Bright Grand E
362. trument settings You may assign instruments MIDI channels to any staff to any voice from any device or bank as well as adjusting the Gain Pan and Reverb Level MusicTime Deluxe has the capabilities to use two copies of the built in synthesizer thereby doubling the number in individual MIDI channels This enables you to hear a score with full instrumentation without using multiple MIDI devices Use the staff selection to indicate which staff you would like to assign the device instrument with the staff name drop down menu Select the Playback Device This can be the Built in Synths a MIDI device plugged into your computer another MIDI enabled application or a VST Instrument Set the Playback Device s Bank If you are using the built in synth the default bank is already set If you are using an external MIDI Device a popup menu allows you to choose a common mapping of instrument names to MIDI instrument number The default mapping uses General MIDI standard to which most newer synths adhere For more advanced synths text fields are displayed for Bank settings on the device The MSB setting corresponds to MIDI Controller 0 and the LSB setting corresponds to MIDI Controller 32 Refer to your synth s documentation for more information about Bank control messages Select which voice in this staff will use this set up MusicTime Deluxe defaults to All Voices Click on the grid to select the instrument patch on the playback device you want
363. ttava do not Slurs A slur is a curved line over or under two or more notes of different pitches indicating the notes are to be played without articulation or smoothly If you are familiar with drawing programs and their terminology the slur generated in MusicTime Deluxe can be considered a bezier curve meaning it s slightly thicker in the middle and tapered on each end Slurs attach themselves to a beginning and end note and automatically recalculate as long as Auto Guess Beam is selected in the Preferences menu To bypass Auto Guess Beam simply hold down the Control key while creating or adjusting the slur MIDI will play the slurs that you create Adjustments to MIDI playback can be made by double clicking on the slur tool EN Using the Palettes 100 Tempo Indications Drawing a Slur Select the slur tool Position the crosshair where the beginning of the slur should be drawn Then click and drag the mouse to draw the slur on the screen The slur you draw should consist only of a single arc or curve Release the mouse when you have completed the drawing of your slur MusicTime Deluxe automatically converts the drawing into a curve For another method of drawing a slur hold the shift key and make three spots for the shape of the slur beginning middle and end Automatic Slurs For the most consistent slurs MusicTime Deluxe will draw the slur for you on a selected group of notes when c
364. u that all of the graphic information you are working with in MusicTime Deluxe is saved only if you create an MusicTime Deluxe version of the file As with all computer files in addition to using Save to update your score for any changes you make we recommend that you also save backup copies onto different volumes hard drives or diskettes How often you choose to do this is up to you but consider how much time it would take to recreate a lost score if and use that as a guide One or two backups before you start or stop working is a good habit to get into but if you work for several hours on a score you should use Save As in addition to using the Save function and create alternate versions as you go along Since MusicTime Deluxe scores are relatively small a diskette is both an efficient and cost effective way to make backups Use Save As to make backups See the Save As section for more information Save As Save As 1s used to save MusicTime Deluxe scores that are new untitled scores or MIDI MusicXML and MasterTracks Pro files that were opened with MusicTime Deluxe Save As will save in the MusicTime Deluxe format The Menus Save File Save in O Bach Encores v CH zi ES mj ECG Mu Recent Documents 2 Desktop Mu Documents QJ Mu Computer a File name Untitled 1 Wl My Network Save as type Encore Files enc v The Save As dialog you ll see is the standard Save As dialog for your platform Revert
365. uantizing it before you open it in MusicTime Deluxe Move Notes Move Notes section of the menu lets you easily change the pitch of the selected notes up or down by a half step or by an octave Simply select the note s before using the operation Chords in the selected area will be transposed also Measures Menu Add Measure The Menus Add Measure creates new measures anywhere within the score for either one or all staves in the system The default setting for Add Measure adds one measure after the measure in which the insert point was placed The range of measures can be changed and new measures can be added either before or after the specified measure The lower portion of the Add Measure dialog allows the new measures to be added to all staves or on a single staff only If you select Only on staff the initial entry will be obtained from the measure in which the insert point was placed Enter a new staff number if you wish Note Staff numbers are the same as instruments in the Staff Sheet Combined staves such as a piano staff get counted as one staff even though they technically contain two or more staves Add Measure does not have an undo option but the added measures can be easily removed with the Delete Measure function if later you decide you don t need them Delete Measure Delete Measure removes measures and all data and information related to oes Nos those measures from either one or all st
366. uivalents control command U for stems up and control command D for stems down Select the notes you want to change and apply either the shortcut keys or menu item Changing stem direction for chords will also change the tie direction See the section on Tie Notes for more information about tie directions and flipping ties control command T toggles the ties up and down Voice 1 Stem Directions Stem directions for notes in voice will follow standard notation practice and be placed up or down depending on their pitch location in reference to the clef Voice 2 8 Stem Directions Voices other than voice one default to stems down except when using a combined staff such as the piano staff In a piano staff the notes in the bass clef will default to voice 5 These notes will also follow standard notation practice and set the stem direction according to the clef in use When two or more voices are used in the same measure you may need to flip the stems for one voice Most commonly some or all of the notes in voice one will have stem down directions and will need to be changed to stems up Set the voice selector to the voice you wish to affect and it will be easier to select only those notes and change their stem direction without affecting the other voices Normalize The Menus Normalize sets stems back to the default directions Marks Add To add marks to a group of notes 1 Select the notes 2 On the Notes menu point
367. unless the Auto Guess Beam item in the Setup menu is disabled a check mark next to the Auto Guess Beam selection in the Setup menu indicates the choice is enabled Until a score is saved as an MusicTime Deluxe file you are making changes only to the raw MIDI data and any graphic information you change is temporary Starting with version 3 0 MusicTime Deluxe for Windows can open files created with MusicTime Deluxe for the Macintosh Save the files with the appropriate name and extension enc on the Macintosh To open Windows files in MusicTime Deluxe for the Macintosh simply move them onto your Mac and select Open from the File menu Close Choosing Close closes the active Score window If you make changes to a score you will be asked if you d like to save those changes before closing the file With MIDI and Pro files not yet saved in MusicTime Deluxe you will be asked if you wish to save the file as an MusicTime Deluxe file before closing even if you have saved changes This avoids any confusion since graphic information is saved only in an MusicTime Deluxe file Save Choose Save to keep any changes made in MusicTime Deluxe to the active file If the file has not been saved the Save As dialog will appear and you can enter a new file name See the Save As section for more information If you have opened a MIDI or Master Tracks Pro file you will always be prompted with the Save As dialog when Save is selected This reminds yo
368. urations This portion of the dialog requires the checkbox to be enabled if you wish the note types to change Use your mouse to place a check mark in the box next to the words Set Note Duration and select the duration including dots and the tuplet indication if needed Changing the duration will change both the duration and the start time for the notes If the new duration is greater than the number of beats in the measure notes in each measure that exceed the time signature will not be heard Note All of the choices in the Set Note Duration section can also be applied quickly to selections using shortcut keys See the section on the Notes palette for details Set Play Duration The second option in the Change Durations dialog concerns the MIDI duration to be played for each note Changing Play Duration for Step Entered Notes The default playback for notes entered with the mouse or step entered with a MIDI Keyboard is 90 of the displayed value Changing Play Duration for Real Time and Imported Notes Notes recorded in real time or imported MIDI Files initially have unique durations for each note depending on the recording Even after Guess Durations and Transcription Options have assigned a display duration value the original recording or MIDI file is maintained as much as possible When changing the duration for real time and imported scores the new play duration is the percentage of the transcribed value and not the record
369. used to change a real time or imported MIDI file to The Menus perform closer to the transcription obtained Align Playback can also be used if extensive editing for a section requires re establishing the correct note order and timing Align Playback does not affect durations A selection is required for Align Playback Only notes within the selection are affected by the Align Playback operation Multiple areas on a page can be changed together using shift to select additional areas after making the first selection See Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe for more information Align Spacing Align Spacing establishes the horizontal and vertical spacing relationships between notes both within each measure and for all measures in the system Align Spacing affects all measures on all staves for a range of measures If the measure range is selected before opening the Align Spacing dialog the measure range will be entered into the upper portion of the dialog for you The measure range can be changed by entering new measure numbers The arrow button to the right of the last measure selection is a shortcut for selecting to the end of the score MusicTime Deluxe provides two different methods to calculate the spacing for notes and can also alter the layout Engraver s Spacing Engraver s spacing follows more of the rules traditional in engraving practices and tries to provide a compromise between strict placement within the measure according to
370. ussed in this section Note Be careful when drag selecting additional areas Avoid creating overlapping areas of selection When holding down the shift key if a drag selection starts to overlap another selection the overlapping area will appear as a normal score again non inverted Technically the area is not selected Overlapping areas are difficult for MusicTime Deluxe to account for and should be avoided Keep selections from overlapping and everything you select will be properly recognized Shift Selecting Regions MusicTime Deluxe lets you use the shift key for defining the first selection area without the need to drag If shift 1s held down before the first click a small plus sign will indicate the location for the upper left corner of a selection The second click determines the lower right corner of the selected Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe area and draw the selection You can also select from lower left to upper right Using this technique to define a region works only when defining the first selection area Additional selections added using the shift key will require the standard click and drag technique Don t confuse using the shift key to select a region with shift selecting individual notes If the shift key is held down and you click on anything other than a note or rest you will get a plus sign That sign indicates that your next click will define a selection rectangle If you d
371. uto Guess Beam If on this function automatically applies the Guess Durations and Beam on Beat operations for all recorded data imported MIDI or Master Tracks Pro files and step entered notes Auto Guess Beam automatically beams notes together when adding or erasing notes with the pencil and eraser tools Auto Guess Beam automatically readjusts beams and stem when dragging notes It will also attempt to move any slur that appears attached to the dragged note Holding down the control key during the drag bypasses these adjustments Please Note Operations that require selections or measure ranges will not use Auto Guess Beam The Auto Guess Beam status is saved in preferences Choose Auto Guess Beam from the menu to toggle the check mark on or off Auto Space This function applies engraver s spacing automatically after several different operations in MusicTime Deluxe When adding or erasing notes or rests with the pencil and eraser tools Auto Space will apply the engraver s spacing operation to the notes in the measure being edited In addition erasing or adding an accidental will also apply the engraver s spacing When pasting data the Auto Space function applies an Align Spacing operation on the measures The Menus affected by the paste Auto Space automatically applies the engraver s spacing when dragging notes barlines and staves Holding down the control key during the drag bypasses these adjustments Pleas
372. uxe will paste copied data into the new measures as best as it can If notes were copied from radically different time signatures the notes will be pasted over a different number of measures but the values will remain the same Generally speaking every note and rest in every voice is first counted as an item MusicTime Deluxe will keep adding notes and rests to each measure until no space remains If the last item exceeds the number of beats for that measure MusicTime Deluxe leaves it up to you to decide what to do Changing the time signature for a measure after pasting will not move notes to other measures See the section on Time Signatures for more information The Menus Measure widths and number of measures per system will need to be defined for each new area either before or after pasting New measures and pages created in MusicTime Deluxe when pasting will use the last existing system before the paste and create new systems with the same number of measures If a paste creates new pages the page layout of the last page before the paste will be copied for all the new pages created Clear Clear is similar to Cut with one very important difference the cleared data is not copied to the MusicTime Deluxe clipboard A Clear command can be undone but the cleared area is not stored for further use in the clipboard and the current clipboard contents remain Clear does not have a command key equivalent but instead uses t
373. ves Voices can be two instruments playing different parts such as two flute parts on one staff or one instrument such as a piano for which hands and even fingers can generate different rhythms simultaneously Whenever the instrumentation or performance requires two or more musical ideas to coexist on the same staff or staves MusicTime Deluxe uses voices to keep the concepts distinct for both playback and beaming operations MusicTime Deluxe makes eight voices available When using a Piano Staff which MusicTime Deluxe considers one staff the combined staves share all eight voices Each note and rest belongs to only one of the eight voices When different voices are used to notate a measure each voice becomes equivalent to an individual instrument with its own part It 1s important therefore to make sure that each voice s musical line is completed within the measure that 1s all the metric time accounted for with rests entered even if they are hidden for all the parts to play correctly To specify and check the voicing used in your score you need to use the Voice Selector menu You ll find this menu within the Score window in the upper left corner Keyboard Shortcut for Changing Voices Voicing and viewing separate voices are common operations so a shortcut is provided for changing the voice menu using the computer keyboard When the Score window is active type the letter V followed by the number of the voice desired F
374. voice 1 view MIDI interpretation of dynamics affects all voices when the voice selection is set to Voice but does not work selectively on separate voices The Marks Palettes The Marks 1 and 2 palettes contain a variety of ornaments symbols and marks that can be attached to a note or freely placed anywhere within the score Optionally the marks symbols in the Marks 2 palette can affect MIDI playback for their attached notes by changing the velocity or duration When attached to notes marks remain connected to the notes for all operations Remove marks by applying the same mark again to the note Additional types of marks can be placed above or below a note but only one can be attached to a note at a time To attach a mark to a note use the pencil tool choose a mark from the palette and click directly on the note head When adding a mark in this fashion MusicTime Deluxe automatically places the mark above the note regardless of stem direction or the type of mark selected To place a mark below a note hold the control option key while applying the mark Adjusting Marks To adjust the vertical position of the mark hold the shift key after applying the mark and click again i d on the note s head with the same mark Each click raises the mark a little higher Eventually a maximum vertical adjustment will be reached If you continue to click the mark will then drop to the lowest possible position Continued cl
375. voice 87 Bright saw wave lead 119 Synth drum 24 Tango accordion 56 Orchestra hit 88 Brass and lead 120 Reverse cymbal 25 Acoustic nylon guitar 57 Trumpet 89 Fantasia pad 121 Guitar fret noise 26 Acoustic steel guitar 58 Trombone 90 Warm pad 122 Breath noise 27 Electric jazz guitar 59 Tuba 9 Poly synth pad 123 Sea shore 28 Electric clean guitar 60 Muted trumpet 92 Space voices pad 124 Bird tweet 29 Electric muted guitar 61 French horn 93 Bowed glass pad 125 Telephone ring 30 Overdriven guitar 62 Brass section 94 Metal pad 126 Helicopter 3 Distortion guitar 63 Synth brass 1 95 Halo pad 127 Applause 32 Guitar harmonics 64 Synth brass 2 96 Sweep pad 128 Gun shot MIDI and MusicTime Deluxe General MIDI Drum Map 35 BO Acoustic Bass 59 B2 Ride Cymbal 2 36 C1 Bass Drum 1 60 C3 Hi Bongo 37 C 1 Rim Shot 61 C 3 Lo Bongo 38 DI Acou Snare 62 D3 Mute Hi Conga 39 DI Hand Clap 63 D 3 Open Hi Conga 40 El Elec Snare 64 E3 Lo Conga 41 Fl Lo Tom 65 F3 Hi Timbale 42 F 1 Closed Hi Hat 66 F 3 Lo Timbale 43 G1 HiTom 67 G3 Hi Agogo 44 Gf Pedal Hi Hat 68 G 3 Lo Agogo 45 Al Lo Tom 69 A3 Cabasa 46 A 1 Open Hi Hat 1 70 A 3 Maracas 47 B1 Lo Mid Tom 71 B3 Whistle Short 48 C2 Hi Mid Tom 72 C4 WhistleLong 49 C 2 Crash Cymbal 1 73 C 4 Short Guiro 50 D2 Acoustic Hi Tom 74 D4 Long Guiro 51 D 2 Ride Cymbal 75 D 4 Claves 52 E2 Chinese Cymbal 76 E4 Hi Wood Block 53 F2 Ride Bell 77 F4 Low Wood Block 54 F 2 Tambourin
376. voice selector is set to a specific voice When the voice selector is set to Voice each piano staff will use a unique voice by default and cross staff beaming will not occur Voicing MIDI Files and Live Recording When sequenced material or real time recording requires voicing ALIGN PLAYBACK should be used to update the MIDI information after changing notes and rests to their new voice assignments When changing voice assignments use the voice selector to isolate each voice Then count the number of beats used Another method to quickly check for timing changes is to use ALIGN SPACING and check the alignment for each voice Sometimes a missing rest or miscalculated duration will become apparent after ALIGN SPACING attempts to correct the spacing based on the existing information If this is the case undo the operation and turn off Auto Space Correct the problem by either inserting new notes or rests with the pencil tool or changing the duration of existing material After correcting the problem select the measure and use ALIGN PLAYBACK ALIGN SPACING should also be used to correct timing problems When a measure is edited extensively it may become necessary to erase portions and re enter the information in the correct order Note Whenever multiple voices are being edited check the rest status in the SHow HipE dialog Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Spacing and voicing is extremely difficult and confusing if rests are hidden for
377. was played as a natural when it should have been a sharp The Notes palette is also used to add or remove accidentals 1 Click the sharp icon in the Notes palette The pencil button in the Toolbar is selected automatically and the mouse pointer looks like a sharp sign when you move it over the score 2 z You can also select the sharp sign from your computer s keyboard by pressing the S key 2 Go to measure 14 in the score and click on the head of the F note in the second chord The F sounds and a sharp sign is added to the note Shift Selecting Notes Zei Here s an alternate method for adding a sharp sign using a selection technique called shift selecting 1 With the sharp sign and the pencil tool still selected click the note s head a second time The sharp sign is removed 2 Select the arrow pointer Click the arrow button in the Toolbar or press A on your computer s keyboard 3 Press and hold the shift key down 4 While holding the shift key click on the head of the F note with the arrow pointer The note becomes highlighted You have just selected a single note 5 Release the shift key and press the S key on your computer s keyboard A sharp sign is added to the note 6 Click anywhere on the score to deselect the note and remove the highlight Moving Accidentals You can also nudge the sharp sign to the left 1 With the sharp sign and pencil tool selected press and hold the shif
378. well Stretching One Measure Click on the barline and drag Spacing within the measure is scaled when Auto Spacing 1s activated Stretching a System Click on the barline and drag Spacing within the measure is scaled when Auto Spacing 1s activated Note The stretch function will affect clef changes added to measures Other operations do not move clefs Moving Beams and Brackets Beams have three hot spots Each end of the beam or bracket can be moved to change the angle The center or any part or the beam other than the ends of the beam or bracket controls the height without changing the angle msnm pug Zen r 377 a m3 EE i utt EE Note When beams are adjusted and the beam is dragged to the other side of the note heads the stems automatically flip to connect to the beam Since brackets are not related to stem direction moving a bracket above or below a group of notes will not affect the stem directions Moving Objects in MusicTime Deluxe Moving Marks Marks when attached to notes are adjusted by clicking on the note head with the same mark selected and the shift key held down Each click raises the mark a little more For more information on how to move marks refer to the section on the Marks palette Moving Text Move text boxes in MusicTime Deluxe by clicking anywhere within the text box and dragging To better see the text box we recommend that you show the control points The four control
379. wice in the box to highlight it and then type the desired staff number Remember Delete Measure is not undoable Once deleted measures are gone unless you can use the Revert to Saved function explained above Tempo The tempo can be adjusted for the entire score or just a section within the score The Menus If you select the area you wish to change before opening the Tempo dialog your selection will be entered into the dialog s measure range If no selection has been made the measure range will default to the current location or measure 1 Note All measures between the first and last measure indicated will be included in the operation The Tempo dialog defaults to changing by a percentage After using the dialog once however your selections are sticky and your last operation choice will remain selected Finding the Current Tempo for a Measure When the Tempo dialog is first opened the tempo indicated in the Set all Tempos to field is for the From measure in the selection range Tempo changes after this may exist but are not indicated If the measure range is altered within the dialog the tempo for the new range is not indicated Set all Tempos to This option changes all tempos in the selected area to the one tempo entered here If the selected measures contain different time signatures 1 e 4 4 and 6 8 each time signature will apply the new value to the beat value used Note The beat is the lower p
380. with the exception of Clefs Paste does not paste tempo time signature and key signature changes MusicTime Deluxe copies data within each measure but not the measure itself Time signatures tempos and key signatures are all attributes saved for each measure Clefs are anchors giving MusicTime Deluxe a reference point for relating all the entered note data Tempo indications added from the Tool palette will be pasted but only as a graphic item If you are copying a section that includes clef changes time signature changes or key signature changes we recommend that you first create the measures needed and define at least the time signature for each section before pasting Key signatures can be added before or after pasting and clefs should always be added after the paste If the time signature of copied data 1s different than the measure into which it is being pasted MusicTime Deluxe will paste copied data into the new measures as best as it can If notes were copied from radically different time signatures the notes will be pasted over a different number of measures but the values will remain the same Generally speaking every note and rest in every voice is first counted as an item MusicTime Deluxe will keep adding notes and rests to each The Menus measure until no space remains If the last item exceeds the number of beats for that measure MusicTime Deluxe leaves it up to you to decide what to do Changing t
381. xact width Tutorial The page margins appear in the Score window as a grey line around the score Anything within this line will print If you scroll to the end of the score you ll notice that the last two systems are apparently off the page Or more accurately they are on another page below the first one That s because MusicTime Deluxe prints large scores in tiles Say for example that you re working on a large orchestral score The size of a single page of a full orchestral score could easily exceed the standard paper sizes that will fit in your computer s printer To get around this MusicTime Deluxe will print a large page in tiles separate pieces of paper that can be assembled afterward But the piano score you re working on should fit easily on a single page There are two things you can do to make this work change the size of the music on the page and arrange the measures and systems so that they make better use of the available space Changing Staff Size Set Staff Size One way to change the size of the music is to select a different point size for the Anastasia font Anastasia is the font that All staves same size MusicTime Deluxe uses to display and print music play p subi A 1 Open the Staff Sheet window a 2 Click on the number 3 under the heading Size Staff 3 e The Set Starr Size dialog box appears You can choose a staff size XX ta ranging from 1 to 4 where is the smallest and 4 is the l
382. xt with the notes still selected shift was held down and the number 3 entered This changed the displayed duration back to quarter notes but because the shift key was held down only the screen representation changed The notes will continue to play back as eighths Voices in MusicTime Deluxe Finally here is the example showing notes in voice 5 re RR Ce hopp 9 PE p eem een a a pM E I I LRQ T c E S I L E M M 3 u Please Note There are no hidden rests in these cross staff beaming examples When a piano staff is used notes can move from staff to staff without the need to use rests to specify the proper beat Notes are spaced and played in the order each new note is added to a voice AUTO SPACE will align notes when step entering from a MIDI keyboard or using the mouse For AUTO SPACE to work effectively the pitches should be entered by clicking into the right side of the measure Auro SPACE will continue to compensate as each note and rest is added until the measure 1s completed When using a MIDI keyboard to enter a part the up and down arrow keys can be used to change staves in a piano system without losing track of the measure location This allows cross staff beaming during keyboard step entry During both mouse and MIDI keyboard entry Auro BEAM and Auro Space will create cross staff beams only if the
383. y When a cell in the Program Name column is clicked a popup menu appears allowing you to select the program for the staff s current device This setting will affect the voice currently displayed in the score s voice menu If a single voice is being viewed text will appear at the top of the Staff Sheet Window to remind of which voice you are viewing editing Alternatively you can click on a Channel or Gain cell to open the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings The Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog appears when you click in the Channel column to choose an instrument sound MIDI program change number for that staff Device Names The default device selected in the Staff MIDI Device and Instrument Settings dialog is Built In Synth To choose from one of the other included devices use the Device menu in the dialog A more complete description of the Device menu appears later in this section 128 Program names are available for each device but not every synthesizer will use all 128 Some synthesizers may have more than 128 programs stored but the MIDI Program definition only uses 128 To use other programs on your synthesizer you will need to change the location of the program to one of the locations that can be recalled using the standard program numbers To select from any of the available program names click on a program name in the matrix
384. y of the pages specified those tiles are counted as part of the page specified Printing a page automatically includes all the tiles for the page as well Using the Free MusicTime Deluxe Demo as a File Viewer If you would like to share your MusicTime Deluxe file with someone who does not have MusicTime Deluxe and you would like them to both see and hear your score tell them to download the free MusicTime Deluxe demo available at www gvox com The demo does not allow a user to save or print music however it will allow the user to view and play the file Creating MIDI Files Another way you can share your MusicTime Deluxe files is by exporting them as MIDI files which you can then post on a website or email to friends This enables others to hear but not see your score To create a MIDI file in MusicTime Deluxe go to FILE gt Exporrt and select MIDI FILE from the dropdown box Printing with MusicTime Deluxe File Menu New New Default Score Open Close Save Save as Revert To Saved Print Print Selection Page Setup Quit Exit Edit Menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Clear Select All Nudge Left Nudge Right Nudge Up Nudge Down Notes Menu Note Attributes Set note to voice n Enharmonic Simplify Enharmonic Stem Up Stem Down Add Mark Remove Mark Tie Notes Flip Tie Direction Slur Notes above Mac N O H W S 8 H S R P Q
385. y one you have to worry about If you have a MIDI instrument that makes something approximating a piano sound set voice one to that instrument s MIDI channel Then select the device as your MIDI interface or Built in Synth 1 or 2 3 Click the instrument name or number of your choice preferably one that will result in a piano sound on your MIDI playback device Tutorial Staff MID Device and Instrument Settings Piano HA Playback Device Built In Synth 1 H4 Bank Apple General MIDI DLS All Voices H4 3 Pani organi Acoustic Bs Strings soprano Sax Square Wave Ice Rain Tinkle Bell Piano Organ2 Fingered Bs Ise Strings P P E Piani Organi Picked Bs Syn Stringsl Tenor Sax SvnCalliope Crystal Jste EPianol Reed Organ SanBsssl Chor Aahs elo ynth Drum Clav Bandoneon Synth Bass2 OrchestraHit Clarinet Bass amp lead Star Theme Celesta Nylon srGt Wei Trumpet Pieco Fa Glockenspiel ed af Meis Trombone MusicBox laze Gz Cello Recorder PaWsym _ Shamisen Vibraphone CleznGt Contrabass Mutedlrumpet Pan flute Space Voice koro Jai Marimba MutedGt Tremolo Str French Horns Xylophone Overdrive Ct PizzicanStr Brass 1 Tubular bei DistortonGt Wa ynth Esc Whistle ae Pad Fidde Wees Santur Gt Harmonics_ Timpani synth ess Jean sweep Pad Shansi Gunshot MIDI Channel 1 FA e e I Gain Pan Reverb Level 4 Click OK The device and pr
386. yed only once but held for the full value of all the combined notes Tie Notes requires that you first select the notes to be tied All notes to be tied must be within the same selection If notes to be tied exist across system breaks or page breaks you can either change the number of measures in the system or select the notes you wish to tie using the shift select method of clicking on the note head See Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe for more information Notes to be tied must be the same pitch If a tie occurs over a barline accidentals will be removed from the note in the following measure after the tie has been performed but both notes must be notated the same before the tie will be allowed If you wish to apply a courtesy accidental to a tied note you must do so before the tie is performed Use the control option key while applying the accidental to force MusicTime Deluxe to retain the accidental To apply an accidental after notes have been tied apply the accidental to the first note in the tied group We do not recommend that you change the accidental for a tied group if you placed a courtesy accidental within the group The keyboard shortcut for ties is control command T control command shift T toggles the ties up and down Tie Directions Stem direction and the number of notes being tied determines the tie directions for notes When chords are tied together the tie directions will be created for the chords accor
387. your mouse through your score and easily selecting entire regions for editing There are a few situations where shift selecting is not recommended however and other selection techniques are more appropriate Note Copying and pasting partial note information from beamed groups or chords is not recommended for any copy operation including standard drag selection If you need to copy 49 Selecting in MusicTime Deluxe something from a group you should either copy and paste the entire group and then erase what you don t want or separate the item from the group before copying Selecting Measures Although you can draw a selection to include an entire measure by far the most reliable and efficient method for selecting measures uses a double click to select the measure For this selection process to work you must double click in some portion of the measure that doesn t have a note rest or other graphic item This double click creates an inverted selection for that measure and selects everything within the measure series 16 Mo 139 KX ZS ee ee LU 4 5l d ia ee Ee L El EID IE LT gl meum 338 38 38 8 38 33 3 a E One advantage of double clicking to select a measure over drag selecting is that you make sure you don t accidentally select a measure in another system by mistake The areas between systems can be difficult to see and may even overlap in some cases Use the double

MusicTime Deluxe Menu - Passport Music Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents